Diagnostics SM 2228782 2

Technical
Publications
2228782
Revision 2
CT ProSpeed Series
Diagnostics
Copyright 1999–2002 by General Electric Company
Operating Documentation
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS CT PROSPEED SERIES DIAGNOSTICS
REV 0 2228782
D THIS SERVICE MANUAL IS AVAILABLE IN ENGLISH ONLY.

WARNING D IF A CUSTOMER’S SERVICE PROVIDER REQUIRES A LANGUAGE OTHER
THAN ENGLISH, IT IS THE CUSTOMER’S RESPONSIBILITY TO PROVIDE
TRANSLATION SERVICES.
D DO NOT ATTEMPT TO SERVICE THE EQUIPMENT UNLESS THIS SERVICE
MANUAL HAS BEEN CONSULTED AND IS UNDERSTOOD.
D FAILURE TO HEED THIS WARNING MAY RESULT IN INJURY TO THE SERVICE
PROVIDER, OPERATOR OR PATIENT FROM ELECTRIC SHOCK,
MECHANICAL OR OTHER HAZARDS.
D CE MANUEL DE MAINTENANCE N’EST DISPONIBLE QU’EN ANGLAIS.

AVERTISSEMENT D SI LE TECHNICIEN DU CLIENT A BESOIN DE CE MANUEL DANS UNE AUTRE
LANGUE QUE L’ANGLAIS, C’EST AU CLIENT QU’IL INCOMBE DE LE FAIRE
TRADUIRE.
D NE PAS TENTER D’INTERVENTION SUR LES ÉQUIPEMENTS TANT QUE LE
MANUEL SERVICE N’A PAS ÉTÉ CONSULTÉ ET COMPRIS.
D LE NON-RESPECT DE CET AVERTISSEMENT PEUT ENTRAÎNER CHEZ LE
TECHNICIEN, L’OPÉRATEUR OU LE PATIENT DES BLESSURES DUES À DES
DANGERS ÉLECTRIQUES, MÉCANIQUES OU AUTRES.
D DIESES KUNDENDIENST–HANDBUCH EXISTIERT NUR IN

ENGLISCHER SPRACHE.
WARNUNG
D FALLS EIN FREMDER KUNDENDIENST EINE ANDERE SPRACHE BENÖTIGT,
IST ES AUFGABE DES KUNDEN FÜR EINE ENTSPRECHENDE ÜBERSETZUNG
ZU SORGEN.
D VERSUCHEN SIE NICHT, DAS GERÄT ZU REPARIEREN, BEVOR DIESES
KUNDENDIENST–HANDBUCH NICHT ZU RATE GEZOGEN UND VERSTANDEN
WURDE.
D WIRD DIESE WARNUNG NICHT BEACHTET, SO KANN ES ZU VERLETZUNGEN
DES KUNDENDIENSTTECHNIKERS, DES BEDIENERS ODER DES PATIENTEN
DURCH ELEKTRISCHE SCHLÄGE, MECHANISCHE ODER SONSTIGE
GEFAHREN KOMMEN.
D ESTE MANUAL DE SERVICIO SÓLO EXISTE EN INGLÉS.

AVISO D SI ALGÚN PROVEEDOR DE SERVICIOS AJENO A GEMS SOLICITA UN IDIOMA
QUE NO SEA EL INGLÉS, ES RESPONSABILIDAD DEL CLIENTE OFRECER UN
SERVICIO DE TRADUCCIÓN.
D NO SE DEBERÁ DAR SERVICIO TÉCNICO AL EQUIPO, SIN HABER
CONSULTADO Y COMPRENDIDO ESTE MANUAL DE SERVICIO.
D LA NO OBSERVANCIA DEL PRESENTE AVISO PUEDE DAR LUGAR A QUE EL
PROVEEDOR DE SERVICIOS, EL OPERADOR O EL PACIENTE SUFRAN
LESIONES PROVOCADAS POR CAUSAS ELÉCTRICAS, MECÁNICAS O DE
OTRA NATURALEZA.
a
REV 0 2228782
D ESTE MANUAL DE ASSISTÊNCIA TÉCNICA SÓ SE ENCONTRA

DISPONÍVEL EM INGLÊS.
ATENÇÃO
D SE QUALQUER OUTRO SERVIÇO DE ASSISTÊNCIA TÉCNICA, QUE NÃO A
GEMS, SOLICITAR ESTES MANUAIS NOUTRO IDIOMA, É DA
RESPONSABILIDADE DO CLIENTE FORNECER OS SERVIÇOS DE TRADUÇÃO.
D NÃO TENTE REPARAR O EQUIPAMENTO SEM TER CONSULTADO E
COMPREENDIDO ESTE MANUAL DE ASSISTÊNCIA TÉCNICA.
D O NÃO CUMPRIMENTO DESTE AVISO PODE POR EM PERIGO A SEGURANÇA
DO TÉCNICO, OPERADOR OU PACIENTE DEVIDO A‘ CHOQUES ELÉTRICOS,
MECÂNICOS OU OUTROS.
D IL PRESENTE MANUALE DI MANUTENZIONE È DISPONIBILE

SOLTANTO IN INGLESE.
AVVERTENZA
D SE UN ADDETTO ALLA MANUTENZIONE ESTERNO ALLA GEMS RICHIEDE IL
MANUALE IN UNA LINGUA DIVERSA, IL CLIENTE È TENUTO A PROVVEDERE
DIRETTAMENTE ALLA TRADUZIONE.
D SI PROCEDA ALLA MANUTENZIONE DELL’APPARECCHIATURA SOLO DOPO
AVER CONSULTATO IL PRESENTE MANUALE ED AVERNE COMPRESO IL
CONTENUTO.
D NON TENERE CONTO DELLA PRESENTE AVVERTENZA POTREBBE FAR
COMPIERE OPERAZIONI DA CUI DERIVINO LESIONI ALL’ADDETTO ALLA
MANUTENZIONE, ALL’UTILIZZATORE ED AL PAZIENTE PER
FOLGORAZIONE ELETTRICA, PER URTI MECCANICI OD ALTRI RISCHI.
b
REV 0 2228782
IMPORTANT! . . . X-RAY PROTECTION

X-ray equipment if not properly used may cause injury. Accordingly, the instructions herein contained should
be thoroughly read and understood by everyone who will use the equipment before you attempt to place this
equipment in operation. The General Electric Company, Medical Systems Group, will be glad to assist and
cooperate in placing this equipment in use.
Although this apparatus incorporates a high degree of protection against x-radiation other than the useful beam, no
practical design of equipment can provide complete protection. Nor can any practical design compel the operator to
take adequate precautions to prevent the possibility of any persons carelessly exposing themselves or others to
radiation.
It is important that everyone having anything to do with x-radiation be properly trained and fully acquainted with the
recommendations of the National Council on Radiation Protection and Measurements as published in NCRP Reports
available from NCRP Publications, 7910 Woodmont Avenue, Room 1016, Bethesda, Maryland 20814, and of the
International Commission on Radiation Protection, and take adequate steps to protect against injury.
The equipment is sold with the understanding that the General Electric Company, Medical Systems Group, its agents,
and representatives have no responsibility for injury or damage which may result from improper use of the equipment.
Various protective material and devices are available. It is urged that such materials or devices be used.

All electrical installations that are preliminary to positioning of the equipment at the site prepared for the equipment shall be
performed by licensed electrical contractors. In addition, electrical feeds into the Power Distribution Unit shall be performed
by licensed electrical contractors. Other connections between pieces of electrical equipment, calibrations, and testing shall
be performed by qualified GE Medical personnel. The products involved (and the accompanying electrical installations) are
highly sophisticated, and special engineering competence is required.
In performing all electrical work on these products, GE will use its own specially trained field engineers. All of GE’s electrical
work on these products will comply with the requirements of the applicable electrical codes.
The purchaser of GE equipment shall only utilize qualified personnel (i.e., GE’s field engineers, personnel of third-party
service companies with equivalent training, or licensed electricians) to perform electrical servicing on the equipment.
c
REV 0 2228782
DAMAGE IN TRANSPORTATION
All packages should be closely examined at time of delivery. If damage is apparent, have notation “damage in
shipment” written on all copies of the freight or express bill before delivery is accepted or “signed for” by a General
Electric representative or a hospital receiving agent. Whether noted or concealed, damage MUST be reported to the
carrier immediately upon discovery, or in any event, within 14 days after receipt, and the contents and containers held
for inspection by the carrier. A transportation company will not pay a claim for damage if an inspection is not requested
within this 14 day period.
Call Traffic and Transportation, Milwaukee, WI (414) 827–3449 / 8*285–3449 immediately after damage is found. At
this time be ready to supply name of carrier, delivery date, consignee name, freight or express bill number, item
damaged and extent of damage.
Complete instructions regarding claim procedure are found in Section “S” of the Policy & Procedure Bulletins.
OMISSIONS & ERRORS
GE personnel, please use the GEMS CQA Process to report all omissions, errors, and defects in this documentation.
Customers, please contact your GE Sales or Service representatives.
CAUTION
Do not use the following devices near this equipment. Use of these devices near this equipment could cause
this equipment to malfunction.
Devices not to be used near this equipment:
Devices which intrinsically transmit radio waves such as; cellular phone, radio transceiver, mobile radio transmitter,
radio–controlled toy, etc.
Keep power to these devices turned off when near this equipment.
Medical staff in charge of this equipment is required to instruct technicians, patients an

d
REV 2 2228782
REVISION HISTORY
REV DATE PRIMARY REASON FOR CHANGE

0 . . . . . . Jan. 5, 1999 . . . Initial release. (The previous Diagnostics manual for CT ProSpeed Series
........................ (in ‘ToolBook’ format) is changed to this ‘Acrobat’ format manual.
1 . . . . . Aug. 22, 2001 . . . Added: V3.08/3.10/4.01 information to X–ray Generator section.
2 . . Decem. 24, 2002 . . . Added: Error Code (ER114, 438, 439)
LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES
PAGE REV PAGE REV PAGE REV PAGE REV PAGE REV
Title page . . . . . . . . . . 2 B–2 . . . . . . . . . . . blank 4–22 . . . . . . . . . . . blank Tab 4 (DAS/Detector) ii . . . . . . . . . . . . . . blank
Title page rear . . blank 5–1 to 5–5 . . . . . . . . . . 0 i................... 0 1–1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0
a to d . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0 Tab 2 (Operator Con- 5–6 . . . . . . . . . . . . blank ii . . . . . . . . . . . . . . blank 1–2 . . . . . . . . . . . . blank
A .................. 2 sole) 6–1 to 6–9 . . . . . . . . . . 0 1–1 to 1–10 . . . . . . . . . 0 2–1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0
B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . blank i to ii . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0 6–10 . . . . . . . . . . . blank 2–2 . . . . . . . . . . . . blank
i to iv . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0 1–1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0 A–1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0 Tab 5 (X–ray Genera- 2–3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0
1–2 . . . . . . . . . . . . blank A–2 . . . . . . . . . . . blank tor) 2–4 . . . . . . . . . . . . blank
Tab 1 (System) 2–1 to 2–19 . . . . . . . . . 0 i................... 0 2–5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0
i to ii . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0 2–20 . . . . . . . . . . . blank Tab 3 (Table/Gantry) ii . . . . . . . . . . . . . . blank 2–6 . . . . . . . . . . . . blank
1–1 to 1–3 . . . . . . . . . . 0 3–1 to 3–11 . . . . . . . . . 0 i................... 0 1–1 to 1–4 . . . . . . . . . . 0 2–7 to 2–10 . . . . . . . . . 0
1–4 . . . . . . . . . . . . blank 3–12 . . . . . . . . . . . blank ii . . . . . . . . . . . . . . blank 2–1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0 3–1 to 3–4 . . . . . . . . . . 0
2–1 to 2–52 . . . . . . . . . 0 3–13 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0 1–1 to 1–7 . . . . . . . . . . 0 2–2 . . . . . . . . . . . . blank
3–1 to 3–26 . . . . . . . . . 0 3–14 . . . . . . . . . . . blank 1–8 . . . . . . . . . . . . blank 3–1 to 3–13 . . . . . . . . . 0
Tab APPENDIX
4–1 to 4–14 . . . . . . . . . 0 3–15 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0 2–1 to 2–8 . . . . . . . . . . 0 3–14 . . . . . . . . . . . blank
A–1 to A–4 . . . . . . . . . 0
5–1 to 5–66 . . . . . . . . . 2 3–16 . . . . . . . . . . . blank 3–1 to 3–11 . . . . . . . . . 0 4–1 to 4–42 . . . . . . . . . 1
A–1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0 3–17 to 3–25 . . . . . . . 0 3–12 . . . . . . . . . . . blank
A–2 . . . . . . . . . . . blank 3–26 . . . . . . . . . . . blank 4–1 to 4–5 . . . . . . . . . . 0 Tab 6 (DC III)
B–1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0 4–1 to 4–21 . . . . . . . . . 0 4–6 . . . . . . . . . . . . blank i................... 0 Blank/Rear cover . . . . –
A
blank 2228782
B
REV 0 2228782
CONTENTS
SYSTEM (TAB 1)
Introduction
Maintenance Program – Support
Maintenance Program – Support Display
Maintenance Program – Others
Message and Error Code Lists
OPERATOR CONSOLE (TAB 2)
Introduction
Power–on Test (Qj, Qj–Base, Qj–Hlt, Zj–Adv)
Power–up Sequence (Zj)
LED Description
SCSI Board Test
ETC Board Test
TABLE/GANTRY (TAB 3)
LED and Switch Descriptions
Power–on Test
Off–line Test
Servo Amp. and Servo Motor
DAS/DETECTOR (TAB 4)
Channel – Ring Radius
X–RAY GENERATOR (TAB 5)
General Descriptions
Failure Analysis
Service Tests
DC III (TAB 6)
Introduction
Diagnostics
LED Description
i
REV 0 2228782
INTRODUCTION
WARNING!
DEATH OR SERIOUS INJURY!!
READ AND THOROUGHLY UNDERSTAND THE ‘PROSPEED SERIES SAFETY GUIDELINES’
MANUAL (P9011AW) BEFORE PERFORMING ANY PROCEDURE IN THIS ‘DIAGNOSTICS.’
BEFORE USING THIS MANUAL

This CT system is especially dangerous because its weighty Gantry continuously rotates at high speeds with high
power electric current (550 ∼ 750 VDC) conducted through its slip rings.
The hazards, although sometimes obvious, need to be recognized since the potential for serious injury or death exists.
ii
REV 0 2228782
INTRODUCTION (continued)
CT PRODUCTS WHICH THIS MANUAL APPLIES TO

This ‘CT ProSpeed Series Diagnostics’ manual is used for CT products listed in the table below:
PRODUCT NAME AND CODE NAME
Code Name Product Name
GEMS–AM GEMS–E GEMS–A GEYMS
Qj ProSpeed S ProSpeed S ProSpeed S –
ProSpeed SX ProSpeed SX ProSpeed SX Lemage
Qj–Base ProSpeed ProSpeed S Fast ProSpeed Lemage SX/E

ProSpeed S Fast
– ProSpeed SX Power ProSpeed SX Power Lemage SX
Qj–Hlt ProSpeed ProSpeed SX Power ProSpeed Lemage Supreme

ProSpeed SX Power
– ProSpeed SX Advantage ProSpeed SX Advantage –
Zj–Adv – ProSpeed Advantage ProSpeed Advantage ProSeed SA

ProSeed SA Libra
Zj ProSpeed VX ProSpeed VX ProSpeed VX ProSeed Accell
ProSeed Accell EI
ProSpeed ProSpeed ProSpeed ProSeed
ProSpeed Plus ProSpeed Plus ProSpeed Plus ProSeed EF
Each of the code names represents a product family; for example, ProSpeed S, ProSpeed SX, and Lemage constitute
a product family, called ‘Qj.’
In this manual, product names (ProSpeed, Lemage, ...) or product family names (i.e., code names; Qj, Zj–Adv, ...)
are used to indicate some sections, illustrations, or other types of information which are only applied to those products
indicated.
iii
REV 0 2228782
INTRODUCTION (continued)
MAJOR DIFFERENCES
The following table describes some major differences among product families.
DIFFERENCES AMONG PRODUCT FAMILIES
Code Name Operator Console Detector

CPU Board Operation Display
Qj CPW Liquid Crystal Display Xe Detector
Qj–Base CPW
Qj–Hlt CPW Hilight Detector
Zj–Adv CPW Plasma Display
Zj FMP1 Xe Detector
Liquid Crystal Plasma
Xe Hilight
iv
REV 0 2228782
SYSTEM
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION PAGE
SECTION 1 – INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–1

1-1 INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–1
1-2 MAINTENANCE PROGRAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–2
SECTION 2 – MAINTENANCE PROGRAM – SUPPORT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–1

2-1 FUNCTIONS OF SUPPORT PROGRAMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–1
2-2 HOW TO USE SUPPORT PROGRAMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–2
2-3 OFF LINE SCAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–4
2-4 TABLE/GANTRY CONTROL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–10
2-5 STATISTICS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–12
2-6 ALIGNMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–23
2-7 CALCULATION WITH MEAN FILE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–30
2-8 CALCULATION WITH RAW DATA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–32
2-9 RAW DATA DIRECTORY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–34
2-10 MEAN FILE DIRECTORY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–35
2-11 FD DUMP/LOAD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–36
2-12 MT DUMP/LOAD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–38
2-13 MOD DUMP/LOAD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–40
2-14 WARM UP ERROR ANALYSIS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–43
2-15 GENERATOR/TUBE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–46
2-16 MTF SURVEY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–49
2-17 DAS DATA TRANSFER TEST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–51
SECTION 3 – MAINTENANCE PROGRAM – SUPPORT DISPLAY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–1

3-1 FUNCTIONS OF SUPPORT DISPLAY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–1
3-2 HOW TO USE SUPPORT DISPLAY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–4
3-3 ARTIFACT IMAGE EXAMPLES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–6
3-4 FILE SELECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–8
3-5 START POSITION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–11
3-6 RANGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–12
3-7 ROI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–13
3-8 MAGNIFY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–14
3-9 PROFILE(H) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–16
3-10 PROFILE(V) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–18
3-11 HISTOGRAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–20
3-12 NUMERICAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–21
3-13 WHERE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–22
3-14 SET CURSOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–23
3-15 ERASE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–24
3-16 GRID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–25
i SYSTEM
REV 0 2228782
TABLE OF CONTENTS (continued)
SECTION PAGE
SECTION 4 – MAINTENANCE PROGRAM – OTHERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–1

4-1 OFF–LINE CALIBRATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–1
4-2 CT NUMBER ADJUST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–4
4-3 POST RECON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–5
4-4 MT RECOVERY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–7
4-5 OD SWEEPER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–9
4-6 OD STUDY RECOVERY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–10
4-7 TEMPERATURE INITIALIZE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–12
4-8 SERVICE MODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–13
4-9 SYSTEM PARAMETER DUMP/LOAD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–14
SECTION 5 – MESSAGE AND ERROR CODE LISTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–1

5-1 MESSAGE LIST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–1
5-1-1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–1
5-1-2 Message List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–4
5-1-3 Error Message List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–7
5-2 ERROR CODE LIST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–34
5-2-1 System Error Code, Abort Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–35
5-2-2 INFCTL/IMGCTL Error Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–41
5-2-3 Display Error Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–47
5-2-4 FPU (FPJOIN) Error Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–52
5-2-5 DMA Error Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–53
5-2-6 RAWCTL Error Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–54
5-2-7 Ethernet Error Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–55
APPENDIX A – HOW TO MAKE CRASH SAVE DISK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A–1
APPENDIX B – HOW TO MAKE FLOT DISK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B–1
ii SYSTEM
REV 0 2228782
SECTION 1 – INTRODUCTION
1-1 INTRODUCTION
This CT system provides the Power–on Test programs to identify system failures. For this test, refer to the Operator
Console tab of this manual. The following sections describe how to use the service maintenance programs and error
codes.
D SECTION 2 – MAINTENANCE PROGRAM – SUPPORT

SECTION 3 – MAINTENANCE PROGRAM – SUPPORT DISPLAY
SECTION 4 – MAINTENANCE PROGRAM – OTHERS
These sections describe Maintenance Programs used during system service. These programs are used
to adjust and/or analyze the system.
D SECTION 5 – ERROR CODE AND MESSAGE LIST
This section contains the system messages, alarm messages and error messages sent to the status dis-
play. These messages are used to analyze system failure.
1–1 SYSTEM
REV 0 2228782
1-2 MAINTENANCE PROGRAM

Section 2 ∼ 5 describe the functions of the service Maintenance Programs contained in the Maintenance Menu. It
includes the following programs:
1. SUPPORT
2. SUPPORT DISPLAY
3. OFF–LINE CALIBRATION
4. CT No. ADJUST
5. POST RECON
6. CUSTOM PARAMETERS
7. MT RECOVERY
8. OD SWEEPER
9. OD STUDY RECOVERY
10. TEMPERATURE INITIALIZE
11. SERVICE MODE
12. SYSTEM PARAMETER DUMP/LOAD
The sections which follow describe how to use these programs.
1–2 SYSTEM
REV 0 2228782
1-2 MAINTENANCE PROGRAM (continued)
Operational Description
Ensure that “NEW PATIENT” on the LCD (Liquid Crystal Display) or plasma display screen blinks, and then touch
the “Maintenance” prompt until it inverts to black to display the Maintenance Menu.
*** MAINTENANCE MENU ***

1. CALIBRATION
Select No.=_
Insert the “BOOT” disk into the floppy disk drive.
Enter $$ to display the following Service Maintenance menu.
*** MAINTENANCE MENU ***

1. SUPPORT
2. SUPPORT DISPLAY
3. OFF–LINE CALIBRATION
4. CT No. ADJUST
5. POST RECON
6. CUSTOM PARAMETERS
7. MT RECOVERY
8. OD SWEEPER
9. OD STUDY RECOVERY
10 TEMPERATURE INITIALIZE
11 SERVICE MODE
12.SYSTEM PARAMETER DUMP/LOAD
Select No. =
Type the corresponding number and press Enter to start the program.
1–3 SYSTEM
blank 2228782
1–4 SYSTEM
REV 0 2228782
SECTION 2 – MAINTENANCE PROGRAM –

SUPPORT
2-1 FUNCTIONS OF SUPPORT PROGRAMS

The SUPPORT contains the following menus:
1. OFF–LINE SCAN --- Collects Scan raw data
2. TABLE/GANTRY CONTROL --- On–line control of Table and Gantry
3. STATISTICS --- Data statistics
4. ALIGNMENT --- X–ray alignment
5. CAL WITH MEAN FILE --- Calculation between MEAN FILE #1 and MEAN FILE #2
6. CAL WITH RAW DATA --- Calculation between RAW DATA and MEAN FILE
7. RAW DATA DIRECTORY --- Shows the raw data information list of the system
8. MEAN FILE DIRECTORY --- Shows the mean file information list of the system
9. FD DUMP/LOAD --- Transfers raw data files
10. MT DUMP/LOAD --- Transfers raw data files
11. MOD DUMP/LOAD --- Transfers raw data files
12. WARM UP ERROR ANALYSIS
13. GENERATOR / TUBE --- Generator diagnostics and Tube calibration
14. MTF SURVEY --- Calculates the image spatial resolution
15. DAS DATA TRANSFER TEST --- Das data transfer test from CIF board to FPU of the operator console
2–1 SYSTEM
REV 0 2228782
2-2 HOW TO USE SUPPORT PROGRAMS

1. Select 1. (SUPPORT) from the Maintenance menu to display the following SUPPORT MENU:
*** SUPPORT MENU ***
1. OFF LINE SCAN
2. TABLE/GANTRY CONTROL
3. STATISTICS
4. ALIGNMENT
5. CAL WITH MEAN FILE
6. CAL WITH RAW DATA
7. RAW DATA DIRECTORY
8. MEAN FILE DIRECTORY
9. FD DUMP/LOAD
10.MT DUMP/ LOAD
11.MOD DUMP/LOAD
12.WARM UP ERROR ANALYSIS
13.GENERATOR/TUBE
14.MTF SURVEY
15.DAS DATA TRANSFER TEST
Select No.=
2. Select an item from the menu. When you exit an item, this menu automatically reappears for the next selection.
Note
D When the software requires an entry, it either displays the most recently set parameter for that
selection, or a default parameter. Press <ENTR> to accept the displayed parameter.
D Press the END Key to terminate the current process and return (send) software control to a level one
level prior to (higher than) the terminated process.
When using a support program, press the Cancel Key to directly return to the SUPPORT menu. The
following diagram lists software levels.
NEW PATIENT BLINKING

SOFTKEY
EXAMPLE PROMPT END or Cancel
MAINTENANCE menu
Select: 1
END or Cancel
SUPPORT menu
Select: 1
END
Cancel
KIND OF SCAN menu
Select: 1
END
Cancel
AXIAL: SCAN OR EDIT
D If you make an improper entry, the software displays the following message and waits for a valid input.
** INVALID ENTRY
2–2 SYSTEM
REV 0 2228782
2-2 HOW TO USE SUPPORT PROGRAMS (Continued)

Note
D If a system error occurs, the software displays the following message and sends control one level higher,
to the prior level.
** SYSTEM ERROR XXXXXXXX

(Error Code)
D A raw data file created by a Support program has the following ID No. :
00 : 00000. XX. 01 ; 01
Station Study Series Image
Acquisition
Here XX: 1 ~ 99. A raw data file can be selected by entering a Series number only, since the rest is pre–de-
termined as above.
D The screen displays up to 30 lines of text and/or data at a time.
2–3 SYSTEM
REV 0 2228782
2-3 OFF LINE SCAN

This menu is used to perform off–line scans (axial, stationary, or scout) and collect raw data files.
A series No. must be specified every time an off–line scan is performed. If a new series No. is not specified every
time, the software will overwrite the existing file. It will not automatically update the series No., even if scan parameters
are modified.
Enter 1 (OFF LINE SCAN ) in the SUPPORT menu to display the following menu:
*** KIND OF SCAN ***

1. AXIAL
2. STATIONARY
3. SCOUT
Select No.=
1. AXIAL SCAN
1. Enter 1 (AXIAL) in the “KIND OF SCAN” menu to display the following scan parameter list:
Select No.=1
*** AXIAL SCAN ***
SCAN TIME 1.5 sec
THICKNESS 10.0 mm
SCAN FOV 25 cm
RECON FOV 25.0 cm
XG, ROTOR XG ON
kV 120 kV
mA 60 mA
START DEGREE 0 deg
1. SCAN
2. EDIT
Select No.=_
This list contains either default scan parameters or previously selected parameters.
2. To modify the parameters, select 2 (EDIT).
1. SCAN
2. EDIT
2–4 SYSTEM
REV 0 2228782
2-3 OFF LINE SCAN (Continued)

Select No.=2
SCAN TIME <1: 1.5sec, 2: 2.0sec, 3: 3.0sec 4: 5.0sec >
( 2 )=_
THICKNESS <1: 10.0mm, 2: 5.0mm, 3: 3.0mm, 4: 2.0mm, 5: 1.0mm >
( 1 )=2_
SCAN FOV <1: 25cm, 2: 35cm, 3: 42cm >
( 1 )=_
RECON FOV <3.0, 3.1, 3.2,....,49.9, 50.0 [cm] >
( 25.0 )=_
XG, ROTOR <1: XG ON, 2: ROTOR ON, 3: BOTH OFF >
( 1 )=_
KV <1: 80kv, 2: 120kv, 3:135kv>
( 2 )=_
mA <1: 60mA, 2: 80mA, 3: 100mA, 4: 130mA, 5: 160mA,
6: 200mA >
( 1 )=_
START DEGREE <0, 1,2,,,,,358, 359 [DEG] >
( 1 )=_
NO OF SCAN <1–30>
( 1 )=_
DAS TEST <1:NORMAL, 2:TEST PATTERN, 3:LOW64, 4:LOW16,
5:MEDIUM16, 6:MEDIUM4, 7:HIGH4, 8:HIGH1>
( 1 )=_
Note
The mA parameter only appears when XG ON is selected.
3. Select 1 (SCAN) to perform the scan.
1. SCAN
2. EDIT
Select No.=1
4. Specify a raw data file ID No. (Series No.: 1 ~ 99; Study No. is fixed at “00000”).
(Remember to change the series No. when acquiring multiple scans) Then, proceed to scan operation.
*** RAW DATA FILE SELECT ****

* Enter SERIES No.=1
PRESS < SET > AND < START > TO SCAN
** SCAN END
Note
The CRT either displays previously set scan parameters or default parameters.
Once you quit the Support Program, the scan parameters revert to the default values.
2–5 SYSTEM
REV 0 2228782
DAS Test Parameters

Select one of the following (1 ∼ 8) from the ‘DAS TEST’ parameter.
Parameters 3 through 8 check the linearity of the CAM (or NCAM) input circuits and amplifiers.
Parameter Description
1: NORMAL A DAS Test is not performed; i.e., a normal scan is performed.
2: TEST PATTERN The DAS transfers test pattern data to the Operator Console to check whether the
data is correctly transferred. Use ‘STATISTICS’ to verify the transferred data.
3: LOW X64 A test signal (to the CAM and NCAM Boards) is low level and the amplification fac-
tor of the CAM (or NCAM) amplifiers is X64.
4: LOW X16 A test signal (to the CAM and NCAM Boards) is low level and the amplification fac-
5: MEDIUM X16 A test signal (to the CAM and NCAM Boards) is medium level and the amplification
factor of the CAM (or NCAM) amplifiers is X16.
6: MEDIUM X4 A test signal (to the CAM and NCAM Boards) is medium level and the amplification
factor of the CAM (or NCAM) amplifiers is X4.
7: HIGH X4 A test signal (to the CAM and NCAM Boards) is high level and the amplification fac-
8: HIGH X1 A test signal (to the CAM and NCAM Boards) is high level and the amplification fac-
2. STATIONARY SCAN
1. Enter 2 (STATIONARY) in the “KIND OF SCAN” menu to display the following scan parameter list.

1. AXIAL
2. STATIONARY
3. SCOUT
Select No.=2
*** STATIONARY SCAN ***
AZIMUTH Present Degree
SCAN TIME 5.0 sec
THICKNESS 10.0 mm
SCAN FOV 25 cm
RECON FOV 25.0 cm
XG, ROTOR XG ON
KV 120 kV
mA 60 mA
NO OF SCAN 1
DAS TEST NORMAL
1. SCAN
2. EDIT
Select No.=_
2–6 SYSTEM
REV 0 2228782

3. The Gantry does not rotate during a stationary scan.

Specify a Gantry azimuth (X–ray tube) position at any multiples of five degrees between 0 and 355 degrees.
The 0 degrees position is equivalent to the x–Ray tube at 12 o’clock; the 90 degrees position is equivalent to the
tube at the three o’clock position (viewed from Table).
The rest parameters are identical to the axial scan.
Select No.=2
AZIMUTH <0, 5, 10, .... 350, 355 [ deg ] –1: Present Deg >
( –1 )=_
SCAN TIME <1: 1.5sec, 2: 2.0sec, 3: 3.0sec 4: 5.0sec >
( 2 )=_
THICKNESS <1: 10.0mm, 2: 5.0mm, 3: 3.0mm, 4: 2.0mm, 5: 1.0mm >
( 1 )=2_
SCAN FOV <1: 25cm, 2: 35cm, 3: 42cm >
( 1 )=_
RECON FOV <3.0, 3.1, 3.2,....,49.9, 50.0 [cm] >
( 25.0 )=_
( 1 )=_
KV <1: 80kv, 2: 120kv, 3:135kv>
( 2 )=_
mA <1: 60mA, 2: 80mA, 3: 100mA, 4: 130mA, 5: 160mA,
6: 200mA >
( 1 )=_
START DEGREE <0, 1,2,,,,,358, 359 [DEG] >
( 1 )=_
NO OF SCAN <1–30>
( 1 )=_
( 1 )=_
Note
1. SCAN
2. EDIT
Select No.=1

PRESS < SET > AND < START > TO SCAN
** SCAN END
Note
2–7 SYSTEM
REV 0 2228782
3. SCOUT SCAN
1. Enter 3 (SCOUT) in the “KIND OF SCAN” menu to display the following scan parameter list.

1. AXIAL
2. STATIONARY
3. SCOUT
Select No.=3
*** SCOUT SCAN ***
AZIMUTH 0 deg
TABLE 250 mm
THICKNESS 1.0 mm
XG, ROTOR XG ON
KV 120 kV
mA 60 mA
DAS TEST NORMAL
1. SCAN
2. EDIT
Select No.=_
3. The scout scan list contains parameters common to the axial scan, and, in addition, Azimuth and Table parame-
ters:
Specify a Gantry azimuth (X–ray tube) position at any multiples of five degrees between 0 degrees and 355
degrees.
Enter a Table travel parameter (scanned length) (between 50 mm and 500 mm; 1 mm step).
Select No.=2
AZIMUTH <0, 5, 10, .... 350, 355 [ deg ] –1: Present deg >
( 0 )=_
TABLE <50, 51, 52,..., 499, 500 [mm] >
( 250 )=_
( 1 )=_
KV <1: 80kv, 2: 120kv, 3:135kv>
( 2 )=_
mA <1: 60mA, 2: 80mA, 3: 100mA>
( 1 )=_
( 1 )=_
Note
1. SCAN
2. EDIT
Select No.=1
2–8 SYSTEM
REV 0 2228782


6. Upon entering the Series No., the Gantry moves to the designated azimuth position.
Push the blinking SET button, and the Table will move for –20 mm in the IN direction. Then push the blinking
START button and hold it until the scan is over; the Table will move in the OUT direction for the designated
travel plus +20 mm.
Note
2–9 SYSTEM
REV 0 2228782
2-4 TABLE/GANTRY CONTROL

On–line control of the Table and Gantry can be checked with this program by positioning the Table or Gantry to
arbitrary positions. The Table is moved to an entered absolute position. The X–ray tube is moved to an entered
azimuth position (multiples of five degrees between 0 and 355 degrees).
Enter 2 (TABLE/GANTRY CONTROL) in the “SUPPORT” menu to display the following menu:
*** TABLE/GANTRY CONTROL ***

1. TABLE CONTROL
2. GANTRY CONTROL
Select No.=_
1. TABLE CONTROL
1. Enter 1 (TABLE CONTROL) in “TABLE/GANTRY CONTROL” menu to display the following TABLE CONTROL
parameters.
*** TABLE/GANTRY CONTROL ***

1. TABLE CONTROL
2. GANTRY CONTROL
Select No.=1
*** TABLE CONTROL ***
Enter ABSOLUTE POSITION
< -760.0mm ( IN ) <---> ( OUT ) 760.0mm >=100
KEEP PRESSING < TABLE SET >
Press < ENTER > to Move
*** TABLE CONTROL ***
Enter ABSOLUTE POSITION
< -760.0mm ( IN ) <---> ( OUT ) 760.0mm >=_
The above is an example where the table is moved to the 100 mm position. Enter values falling within the IN
and OUT limit values (–760.0 mm and +760.0 mm, in this example). The travel range (OUT – IN) is 1520 mm.
When the required travel is 20 mm or less, the following message does not appear but the Table starts moving
upon pressing ENTER.
KEEP PRESSING < TABLE SET >

Press < ENTER > to Move
2–10 SYSTEM
REV 0 2228782
2-4 TABLE/GANTRY CONTROL (Continued)
2. GANTRY CONTROL
1. Enter 2 (GANTRY CONTROL) in the “TABLE/GANTRY CONTROL” menu to display the following GANTRY
CONTROL parameter:
1. TABLE CONTROL
2. GANTRY CONTROL
Select No.=2
*** GANTRY CONTROL ***
Enter GANTRY POSITION <0, 5, 10,,,,,,355 DEG> =
2. The Gantry is moved to the entered position.
2–11 SYSTEM
REV 0 2228782
2-5 STATISTICS
This program displays DAS data, including offset data, in decimal or hexadecimal numbers, with or without applying
corrections (offset file correction and/or reference channel correction),or performs arithmetic operations (average,
Log, etc) on the raw data. You can store processed or unprocessed DAS data to MEAN file or RAW file.
1. Enter 3 (STATISTICS) in the “SUPPORT” menu to display the following:
*** STATISTICS ***

*** RAW DATA FILE SELECT ***
Enter ID No.=_
2. Enter the ID No. (Series #) of the raw data file to process.
Note
You can shorten the ID No. (STUDY #. SER #. ACQ #).
Example:
0. 4. 1 4
0. 6. 1 6

Enter ID No.=0.4.1
STUDY SER AQ HF TYPE STM AZM TBL THK FOV KV MA FCS DATE & TIME
0000 04 01 H CW 5.0 000 +0 10.0 25 120 80 1992/07/01 12:34:56
*** RAW DATA FORMAT ***

1. OFFSET AVERAGE
2. DAS DATA
3. FAN
Select No.=_
2–12 SYSTEM
REV 0 2228782
2-5 STATISTICS (Continued)
1. OFFSET AVERAGE
During each scan, the software collects 64 views of data (offset data) to obtain offset average data for each channel,
just before X–ray exposure starts. This program examines the offset average data, and the maximum or minimum
offset data and standard deviation data of each channel. You can also store this data to MEAN FILE.
1. Select 1 (OFFSET AVERAGE). The following screen appears.
*** OFFSET AVERAGE ***

MAX MAX +346.0000 XXX ch XX view
MIN +221.0000 XXX ch XX view
AVE +295.4994
MIN MAX +338.5000 XXX ch XX view

AVE +266.5227
MEAN MAX +340.5078 XXX ch
MIN +218.0781 XXX ch
AVE +281.0197
S.D. MAX +34.0549 XXX ch
MIN +0.4558 XXX ch
AVE +9.8788
*** KIND OF DATA ***
1.MAX
2.MIN
3.MEAN
4.S.D.
Select No.=_
“OFFSET AVERAGE” displays the following data, and the channel and view Nos. that produced these data:
The maximum, minimum, and averaged data of MAX data of each channel.
The maximum, minimum, and averaged data of MIN data of each channel.
The maximum, minimum, and averaged data of MEAN data of each channel.
The maximum, minimum, and averaged data of S.D. (Standard deviation) data of each channel.
See the Illustration 2–1.
2–13 SYSTEM
REV 0 2228782
CH CH CHANNEL
1 2
VIEW 1
OFFSET VIEWS DD D
OFFSE RAW DATA
VIEW 64
MAX * *
MIN * *
MEAN * * D D D
S.D. * *
MAX, MIN, MEAN, AND S.D. FOR OFFSET VIEWS

ILLUSTRATION 2–1
2. Select one of “KIND OF DATA” item from the menu. Example: If you select 1 (MAX), the following screen ap-
pears.

1. MAX
2. MIN
3. MEAN
4. S.D.
Select No.=1
** DISPLAY/FILING **
1.DISPLAY
2.STORE FILE
Select No.=_
a. DISPLAY
This selection numerically displays the offset data for each channel on the screen.
Select 1 (DISPLAY) from the “DISPLAY/FILING” menu.
1. DISPLAY
2. STORE FILE
Select No.=1
Select CHANNEL No.(1) =_
Press “RTN” to see data from the first 104 channels (Ch. 1 to Ch.104). To see subsequent channel data,
enter a channel number, and that channel’s data is displayed in the first line of the table followed by data from
the following channels. The number in parentheses is the default number.
2–14 SYSTEM
REV 0 2228782

CHANNEL MAX DATA
0001 +313.5000 +236.5000 +319.0000 +278.0000
0005 +277.5000 +276.5000 +323.0000 +322.5000
0009 +320.5000 +320.0000 +326.5000 +326.5000
0013 +301.0000 +299.5000 +249.0000 +248.5000
.
.
.
0085 +288.5000 +291.5000 +297.5000 +297.5000
0089 +309.0000 +286.5000 +277.0000 +274.5000
0093 +284.5000 +284.0000 +284.0000 +284.0000
0097 +296.5000 +296.5000 +300.5000 +300.0000
Select CHANNEL No.(105) =
Note
The displayed channel Nos. correspond to as described below.
Xe Type Detector System SS Type Detector System

Ch. 1~6 : special reference channels Ch. 2~4: Q–cal channels
Ch. 7~819 : active channels Ch. 5~14: reference channels
Ch. 820 ~833 : normal reference channels Ch.17~933: active channels
Ch. 950~959: reference channels
b. STORE
This selection stores the offset data (MAX, MIN, MEAN, or S.D. data) to a MEAN file. The mean file takes the
form shown below (in the case of Xe Type Detector system, for example):
1 ~ 819 R1 ~ R14 R15~ R28
Where,
1 ~ 819: offset data of special reference and active channels
R1 ~ R28: offset data of reference channels
You can store up to 16 MEAN files. Enter a file No. (1 ~ 16) and a comment (39 characters maximum).
1. DISPLAY
2. STORE FILE
Select No.=2
*** STORE FILE ***
Enter MEAN FILE No.<1-16>=1
Enter COMMENT =MAX OF OFFSET
** STORE
** STORE END
2–15 SYSTEM
REV 0 2228782
2. DAS DATA
This program displays DAS data transferred from the DAS to the IPU (via DAS Buffer Unit in DISP), with no data
correction (offset file correction or reference channel correction) applied to the data. Special floating point hexadeci-
mal numbers are displayed for each channel, or for each view, with the channel and view numbers indicating the trans-
fer sequence. It also displays Offset data. Refer to the Note followed.
1. Select 2 (DAS DATA) from the “RAW DATA FORMAT” menu.
2. Enter 1 (VIEW) to display the channel data on a selected view, or 2 (CHANNEL) to display the view data on a
selected channel.

1. OFFSET AVERAGE
2. DAS DATA
3. FAN
Select No.=2
*** DAS DATA ***
1. VIEW
2. CHANNEL
Select No.=1
Enter VIEW No.=100
** START
Enter CHANNEL No.(1) =_
3. Press “RTN” to display blocks of data, as shown below. Each block consists of 31 pieces of data. Each view
contains 22 blocks. To see subsequent channel data, enter a channel number, and that channel’s data is dis-
played in the first line of the table, followed by data from the following channels. The number in parentheses
is the default number.
CHANNEL VIEW No. = 0100

0001 00E0 04C1 086A 08FF 09E8 0A94 0C6B 138F
0009 140B 1483 1550 1620 176F 188B 1A45 1B6E
0017 1DE3 23EE 24AC 25BE 2615 273F 2835 28FD
.
.
.
0180 2D85 2DE6 2E2F 2DC2 2D1E 2CD7 2BD3
0187 29C7 290B 27E2 26FE 2603 255B 245B 23C4
0195 1D3A 1AB3 1989 17DE 1703 1632 1524 1468
Enter CHANNEL No.(203) =
4. Press “END” to return to “Enter VIEW No. =” to select and see channel data from a different view.
ENTER CHANNEL No.(203)= END

End of Display
Enter VIEW No.=_
2–16 SYSTEM
REV 0 2228782

Note
Data format (Special floating–point)
a1 a0 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
DAS COUNT = 2N bi x 2 i (bi : “0” or “1”)
a1 a0 N
0 0 –1
0 1 1
1 0 3
1 1 5
EXAMPLE (540B)16 = (01 01 0100 0000 1011) 2

= 21 x (1 x 163 + 4 x 162 + 0 x 16 + 11)
= (10262)10
The displayed channel and view numbers only indicate the transfer sequence of DAS data; they are not
the real channel or view numbers.
For Xe detector system, 858 pieces of data are transferred during one view period.
(858 = 61 channels (1 block) x 14 (triggers) + 4 (View End Mark data))
For SS detector system, 980 pieces of data are transferred during one view period.
(980 = 61 channels (1 block) X 16 (triggers) + 4 (View End Mark data))
The offset view numbers and active view numbers are as follows:
View 1 ~ 65: offset views (one dummy view (view 1) + 64 views)
View 66 ~ 1146: active views (one dummy view (view 66) + 1080 views)
2–17 SYSTEM
REV 0 2228782
3. FAN
This selection displays raw data in decimal numbers with or without applying corrections (offset file correction and/or
reference channel correction) and/or arithmetic operation (natural logarithm) to DAS data.
The channel numbers displayed correspond to the DAS or Detector channel numbers as described below:

You can store the processed or unprocessed raw data to a MEAN file or RAW file.
1. Select 3 (FAN) from the “RAW DATA FORMAT” menu and choose whether or not to apply corrections or
conversion to the data.

1. OFFSET AVERAGE
2. DAS DATA
3. FAN
Select No.=3
*** OPERATION SELECT ***
OFFSET FILE CORRECTION <0:YES, 1:NO> (1)=
REFERENCE CH. CORRECTION <0:6ch, 1:14block, 2:NO> (2)=
NATURAL LOG. CONVERSION <0:YES, 1:NO> (1)=_
Note
REFERENCE CH. CORRECTION <0: 6 ch, 1: 22 block, 2: No>
6 ch: Performs the reference channel correction using the mean of data of Ch. 1, Ch. 2, ..., Ch. 6.
14 block: Performs the reference channel correction using the normal reference channel data.
2–18 SYSTEM
REV 0 2228782

** START
MAX MAX +30376.000000 XXX ch XX view
AVE +10700.650000
MIN MAX +28112.000000 XXX ch XX view
AVE +9979.113000
MEAN MAX +29012.460000 XXX ch
MIN +962.605900 XXX ch
AVE +10256.390000
S.D. MAX +981.421200 XXX ch
MIN +6.808363 XXX ch
AVE +153.021000
1. ORIGINAL
2. MAX
3. MIN
4. MEAN
5. S.D.
Select No.=_
The system displays the following data after calculations:
The maximum, minimum, and averaged data of S.D. (Standard deviation) data of each channel.
See Illustration 2–2.
CH CH CHANNEL
1 2
VIEW 65
ACTIVE VIEWS DD D
RAW DATA
VIEW 1144
MAX * *
MIN * *
MEAN * * D D D
S.D. * *
MAX, MIN, MEAN, AND S.D. FOR ACTIVE VIEWS

ILLUSTRATION 2–2
2–19 SYSTEM
REV 0 2228782

2. Select Kind of Data.
ORIGINAL displays the channel data for a certain view, or displays the view data for a certain channel.
MAX, MIN, MEAN and S.D. display the maximum, minimum, mean, and S.D. data of each channel.
The following describes the procedures for each data.
*** ORIGINAL ***

1. ORIGINAL
2. MAX
3. MIN
4. MEAN
5. S.D.
Select No.=1
a. DISPLAY
*** DISPLAY/FILING ***

1. DISPLAY
2. STORE FILE
Select No.=1
*** DISPLAY ***
1. VIEW
2. CHANNEL
Select No.=1
Enter VIEW No.=10
Enter CHANNEL No.(1)=_
CHANNEL VIEW No. =010
0001 +311.000000 +234.000000 +318.000000 +274.500000
0005 +276.000000 +275.000000 +273.000000 +322.000000
0009 +318.000000 +319.000000 +269.000000 +325.000000
.
.
.
0093 +308.500000 +285.500000 +276.500000 +273.000000
0097 +272.000000 +282.500000 +274.500000 +282.500000
0101 +245.000000 +295.500000 +295.500000 +299.000000
Enter CHANNEL No.(105) =_
2–20 SYSTEM
REV 0 2228782

b. STORE

1. DISPLAY
2. STORE FILE
Select No.=2
*** STORE FILE ***
Enter RAW FILE No.<1-3>3
** START
** STORE END
***DISPLAY/FILING ***
1. DISPLAY
2. STORE FILE
Select No.=_
The raw data file takes the format shown in Illustration 2–3.
CH CH
CHANNEL
1 2
VIEW 1
OFFSET DATA
VIEW 64
VIEW 65
ACTIVE DATA
VIEW 1144
RAW DATA FILE

ILLUSTRATION 2–3
2–21 SYSTEM
REV 0 2228782
*** MAX ***

Note
MIN, MEAN, S.D. menus are similar to this MAX menu.

1. ORIGINAL
2. MAX
3. MIN
4. MEAN
5. S.D.
Select No.=2
a. DISPLAY
1. DISPLAY
2. STORE FILE
Select No.=1
Select Channel No. (1) = ‘CR’
CHANNEL MAX DATA
0001 +1712.000000 +1606.500000 +1646.000000 +1643.500000
0005 +1630.500000 +1595.500000 +1716.000000 +1722.000000
.
.
.
0093 +1930.000000 +1870.000000 +2046.000000 +1916.000000
0097 +2004.000000 +1972.000000 +2038.000000 +2018.000000
0101 +2084.000000 +2058.000000 +2086.000000 +2116.000000
b. STORE
1. DISPLAY
2. STORE
Select No.=2
*** STORE FILE ***
Enter MEAN FILE No.<1-16>=4
Enter COMMENT =MAX DATA OF CHANNEL
** START
** STORE END
1. DISPLAY
2. STORE FILE
Select No.=_
2–22 SYSTEM
REV 0 2228782
2-6 ALIGNMENT
This menu is used to center the phantoms and check or adjust X–ray alignment. Three programs are available for
X–ray check/adjustment procedures: GRAVITY SAG AMPLITUDE, ISO CENTER CHANNEL, and FILTER CENTER
CHANNEL. The ISO CENTER CHANNEL program aligns the X–ray tube to the Detector. The FILTER CENTER
CHANNEL program checks/adjusts filter alignment to the Detector.
You can display the calculated center channels at each view (1 ~ 1080) on the screen or store them to MEAN FILE
(No. 1 ~ 16).
Enter 4 (ALIGNMENT) in the “SUPPORT” menu to display the following menu:
*** ALIGNMENT ***

1. GRAVITY SAG AMPLITUDE
2. ISO CENTER CHANNEL
3. FILTER CENTER CHANNEL
4. PHANTOM CENTERING
Select No.=
2–23 SYSTEM
REV 0 2228782
2-6 ALIGNMENT (Continued)

For this procedure, the gravity pin is attached to the X–ray tube collimator during axial scans. This program measures
fluctuations of the projection of the pin onto the Detector to check for abnormalities of the rotating mechanism (bend,
vibrations, etc.).
Perform two off–line scans (see Section 2-3, Off Line Scan), following the instructions described below:
1. Air File
Remove the bow–tie filter from the collimator, and scan air. Record the series No.
2. POC File (Pin on Collimator)

Remove the bow–tie filter (same as for Air File). Attach the SAG alignment pin to the collimator. Scan the pin,
and record the series No.
3. Select 1 (GRAVITY SAG AMPLITUDE) from the “ALIGNMENT” menu.
4. Enter the ID numbers of the Air and POC Files. (ID No. = Series No. )
*** GRAVITY SAG AMPLITUDE ***

RAW DATA FILE (AIR)
Enter ID No.=1
RAW DATA FILE (POC)
Enter ID No.=2
Note
If the raw data files are not stored, the following message is displayed;
** FILE NOTHING
The computer starts calculations, and then displays the following results:
** START
CENTER CH. = aaa.aaa
AVERAGE CH. = XXX.XXX
aaa.aaa : 1/2 x (Maximum center channel No. in all views + Minimum center channel No. in all views)
AVERAGE CH. : Average of center channel numbers at each view
5. You can display the center channels at each view or store them in the “DISPLAY/FILING” menu.
2–24 SYSTEM
REV 0 2228782

The ISO CENTER CHANNEL program determines the center channel of the Detector which receives the projection
of a pin placed in the reconstruction area. The system determines the center channel at each view, then calculates
the average center channel and displays it along with instructions to shift the X–ray tube into proper alignment. Shift
the X–ray tube tangentially to the rotation circle.
The correct iso center channel is 406.75 Ch. (For Xe Type Detector System); or, 458.75 Ch.(For SS Type Detector
System).
The adjustment tolerance is ±0.02 Ch. Perform four off–line scans (see Section 2-3, Off Line Scan), following the
instructions described below:
1. Air File
Remove the bow–tie filter from the collimator, and scan air (with Large Focus and Small Focus). Record the
series Nos.
2. Pin File
Remove the bow–tie filter (same as for Air File). Place a steel pin (6 mm in diameter) about 5 cm off the center
of reconstruction area. Scan the pin (with Large Focus and Small Focus), and record the series Nos.
3. Select 2 (ISO CENTER CHANNEL) from the “ALIGNMENT” menu.
4. Enter the ID numbers of the Air and Pin Files. (ID No. = Series No. )
*** ISO CENTER CHANNEL ***

RAW DATA FILE (AIR/SMALL)
Enter ID No.=3
RAW DATA FILE (AIR/LARGE)
Enter ID No.=4
RAW DATA FILE (PIN/SMALL)
Enter ID No.=5
RAW DATA FILE (PIN/LARGE)
Enter ID No.=6
Note
If the raw data files are not stored, the following message is displayed;
** FILE NOTHING
2–25 SYSTEM
REV 0 2228782

The computer starts calculations, and then displays the following results (in the case of Xe Type Detector Sys-
tem):
** START
ISO AVERAGE CH. SMALL = XXX.XXX
LARGE = XXX.XXX
MEAN = XXX.XXX (406.75 + 0.02)
MOVE TUBE C.CCC MM RIGHT
ISO AVERAGE CH. MEAN : (ISO AVERAGE CH. SMALL + ISO AVERAGE CH. LARGE)/2
5. With the tube at the Gantry12 o’clock position, move the tube right or left, viewed from the Table for C.CCC mm,
according to the instructions. Repeat the procedure until the iso–center channel equals 406.75 ±0.02Ch. (For
SS Type Detector System: 458.75 ±0.02Ch.)
6. You can display the center channels at each view or store them in the “DISPLAY/FILING” menu.
2–26 SYSTEM
REV 0 2228782

The FILTER CENTER CHANNEL program measures the center channel receiving the projection of the filter onto the
Detector. The software measures the center channel for each view, then calculates and displays the average center
channel along with instructions to shift the filter into proper alignment. The correct filter center channel equals the
iso–center channel: 406.75 Ch. (For SS Type Detector System: 458.75 Ch.) The adjustment tolerance is + 0.3 Ch.
Shift the filter tangentially to the rotation circle.
Perform two off–line scans (see Section 2-3, Off Line Scan), following the instructions below.
1. Air File
Remove the bow–tie filter from the collimator, and scan air. Record the series No.
2. Filter File
Install the bow–tie filter, and scan air. Record the series No.
3. Select 3 (FILTER CENTER CHANNEL) from the “ALIGNMENT” menu.
4. Enter the ID numbers of the Air and Filter Files. (ID No. = series No. )
*** FILTER CENTER CHANNEL ***

RAW DATA FILE (AIR)
Enter ID No.=3
RAW DATA FILE (FILTER)
Enter ID No.=5
The computer starts calculations, and then displays the following results (e.g. Xe Type Detector System):
** START
FILTER AVERAGE CH. = XXX.XXX (406.75 + 0.30)
MOVE FILTER d.ddd MM RIGHT
FILTER AVERAGE CH. : Average of center channels for each view.
5. With the tube at the Gantry12 o’clock position, move the filter right or left, if viewed from the Table (according
to the instructions) for d.ddd mm. Repeat the procedures until the filter center channel equals 406.75 +0.02Ch.
(For SS Type Detector System: 458.75 +0.02Ch. )
6. You can display the center channel for each view or store them at the “DISPLAY/FILING” menu.
2–27 SYSTEM
REV 0 2228782
The PHANTOM CENTERING program centers the phantoms on the scan plane. After calculating the actual phantom
position, software instructs you to shift the phantom to center it. Shift the phantom right or left and up or down (viewed
from the Table).
Perform two off–line scans (see Section 2-3, Off Line Scan), following the instructions below.
1. Air File
Bow–tie filter installed. Scan air and record the series No.
2. Phantom File
Bow–tie filter installed. Scan the phantom and record the series No.
3. Select 4 (PHANTOM CENTERING) from the “ALIGNMENT” menu.
4. Enter the ID numbers of the Air and Phantom Files. (ID No. = series No. )
** PHANTOM CENTERING **
RAW DATA FILE (AIR [CW])
Enter ID No.=6
RAW DATA FILE (PHANTOM [CW])
Enter ID No.=7
The computer starts calculation, and then displays the following results.
** START
MOVE DOWN e.ee MM (±0.15)
MOVE RIGHT f.ff MM (±0.15)
*** ALIGNMENT ***
Select No.=_
5. Move the phantom up or down (according to the instruction) for e.ee mm and left or right (viewed from the Table)
for f.ff mm. Repeat the procedure until instructed to move the phantom 0.0 (±0.15 mm).
2–28 SYSTEM
REV 0 2228782
DISPLAY/FILING
The DISPLAY/FILING menu displays or stores the center channels at each view calculated in the GRAVITY SAG
AMPLITUDE, ISO CENTER CHANNEL, or FILTER CENTER CHANNEL programs to MEAN FILE (No. 1 ~ 16).
The following menu appears after the calculations.

1. DISPLAY
2. STORE FILE
Select No.=_
An example for DISPLAY and STORE FILE:

1. DISPLAY
2. STORE FILE
Select No.=1
Select VIEW No. (1)=_
Enter a view No.

1. DISPLAY
2. STORE FILE
Select No.=2
*** STORE FILE ***
Enter MEAN FILE No. <1-16>=1
Enter COMMENT = CENTER CH OF ISO
** STORE END
2–29 SYSTEM
REV 0 2228782
2-7 CALCULATION WITH MEAN FILE

This program performs algebraic operations (addition, subtraction, multiplication, division) between Mean files, or ap-
plies some filters to a Mean file. Create Mean files with OFFSET AVERAGE (2–3–5 (1), FAN (2–3–5 (3), except for
1. ORIGINAL), and ALIGNMENT (except for 4. PHANTOM CENTERING) programs. The ALIGNMENT Mean file
consists of each view’s channel number, so calculations may not be performed between the ALIGNMENT file and
the ordinary Mean file. The program also displays Mean file data, the calculation results, and stores the calculation
results to Mean file.
Enter 5 (CALCULATION WITH MEAN FILE) in the “SUPPORT” menu.

The following menu appears.
** CALCULATION WITH MEAN FILE **

1. FILE 1 + FILE 2
2. FILE 1 – FILE 2
3. FILE 1 * FILE 2
4. FILE 1 / FILE 2
5. DIFFERENTIAL FILTER
6. LOW PASS FILTER
7. HIGH PASS FILTER
8. DISPLAY
Select No.=_
Example: Choose 1 (FILE1 + FILE2) and software performs the following calculation:
Ac = Ec + Fc, where
Ec: Data of Ch. C in Mean file 1
Fc: Data of Ch. C in Mean file 2
Ac: Data of Ch. C in the calculated file
C: Ch. No. Refer to the table below.

Menu No. 1, 2, 3, 4
1. Enter Mean file Nos.
*** MEAN FILE SELECTION ***

SELECT MEAN FILE No. <1-16> AS FILE 1
Enter MEAN FILE No.=1 ‘CR’
SELECT MEAN FILE No. <1-16> AS FILE 2
Enter MEAN FILE No.=2 ‘CR’
2. The computer starts the calculation, and then displays the “DISPLAY/FILING” menu .
2–30 SYSTEM
REV 0 2228782
2-7 CALCULATION WITH MEAN FILE (Continued)
Menu No. 5, 6, 7
When you select 5 (DIFFERENTIAL FILTER), the system performs the following calculation:
Dc = EC+1 – EC, where

Ec : Data of Ch. C in the selected Mean file
Dc : Data of Ch. C in the calculated file
C : Ch. No.
Menu No. 6, 7: These are used in the YMS Manufacturing only.
1. Enter a Mean file No.
*** MEAN FILE SELECTION ***

Enter MEAN FILE No. <1–16>_
2. The computer starts the calculation, and then displays the “DISPLAY/FILING” menu .
DISPLAY/FILING
DISPLAY : Displays most recent calculations, or any mean file data.
FILING : Stores the calculations to a mean file.

1. DISPLAY
2. STORE FILE
Select No.=_
2–31 SYSTEM
REV 0 2228782
2-8 CALCULATION WITH RAW DATA

This program performs algebraic operations (addition, subtraction, multiplication, or division) between a mean file and
a raw data file. Up to three raw rata files (numbered 1, 2, 3) can be stored in the Support program.
1. Select 6 (CALCULATION WITH RAW DATA) from the “SUPPORT” menu.

*** CALCULATION WITH RAW DATA ***

1. RAW + FILE
2. RAW – FILE
3. FILE – RAW
4. RAW * FILE
5. RAW / FILE
6. FILE / RAW
For example, RAW + FILE (1.) is selected, calculations illustrated below are performed.
CHANNEL CHANNEL
C C
V R(V, C) CALCULATION V E(V, C)
VIEW VIEW
RAW DATA FILE CALCULATED FILE
E(V, C) = R(V, C) + M(C)

M(C) MEAN FILE
FILE FORMATS
ILLUSTRATION 2–4
2–32 SYSTEM
REV 0 2228782
2-8 CALCULATION WITH RAW DATA (Continued)

2. Select a kind of operation and enter MEAN FILE No. and RAW DATA FILE No.
Select No.=1
Enter RAW DATA FILE No. <1-3>_
Enter MEAN FILE No. <1-16>_
The following data are shown after calculation;
The maximum, minimum, and averaged data of S.D. (Standard deviation) of each channel.
See the Illustration 2–5.
CH CH CHANNEL
1 2
VIEW 65
ACTIVE VIEWS DD D
RAW DATA
VIEW 1144
MAX * *
MIN * *
MEAN * * D D D
S.D. * *
MAX, MIN, MEAN, AND S.D. FOR ACTIVE VIEWS

ILLUSTRATION 2–5
Then, “KIND OF DATA” menu appears.
** KIND OF DATA **
1. ORIGINAL
2. MAX
3. MIN
4. MEAN
5. S.D.
Select No.=_
3. For the subsequent procedures, refer to “KIND OF DATA” in Section 2-5, 3. FAN. This menu displays the calcu-
lated file or saves it to a RAW FILE or MEAN FILE.
2–33 SYSTEM
REV 0 2228782
2-9 RAW DATA DIRECTORY

This menu displays a raw data file directory. Each raw data file is displayed with scan parameter information, STUDY
No., SERIES No., ACQUISITION No, and DATE and TIME. Raw data files are listed in chronological order, with the
most recently scanned file at the top of the list.
1. Select 7 (RAW DATA DIRECTORY) from the “SUPPORT” menu.
STUDY SER ACQ HF TYPE STM AZM TBL THK FOV
00000 03 01 H CW 2.7 000 00 10 25
Study No. Series No. Acquisition No. Head/Feet Scan type Scan time 0 Value of 10 25
First CW 1.5 5 Table 5 35
2.0 : Movement 3 42
3.0 355 (mm) 2
5.0 1
KV MA DATE & TIME
120 040 1992/07/01 15:22:05
80 160 Date and Time of Scanning

120 130 year/month/day hour/minute/second
100
80
60
2. Press <RTN> to continue.

Or press <END> to end.
2–34 SYSTEM
REV 0 2228782
2-10 MEAN FILE DIRECTORY

1. Select 8 (MEAN FILE DIRECTORY) to display the directory of mean files and warm–up work files.
MEAN FILE
No COMMENT DATE & TIME
1 1994/09/10 16:55:44
2 1994/09/10 15:02:54
3 1994/09/05 18:51:25
4 MAX DATA OF CHANNEL 1994/09/09 20:55:12
5 WITHOUT FILTER. WITH OFFSET CORR. 1994/09/29 21:23:42
6 001 CAL 1994/09/28 11:14:12
7 WARM UP SD 1994/09/14 12:58:36
8 1994/09/06 13:37:10
WARM UP WORK FILE
No DATE & TIME
1 1994/10/09 10:10:10
2 1994/10/09 10:30:33
Press<END> to END_
You can store up to 16 mean files in the SUPPORT program, numbered 1 to 16.
2–35 SYSTEM
REV 0 2228782
2-11 FD DUMP/LOAD
This menu dumps raw data files from the hard DISK to FD, or loads a raw data file from FD to the hard disk.
Insert a floppy disk in the FD unit (It takes two floppy disks to store one raw data file).
Select 9 (FD DUMP/LOAD) from the “SUPPORT” menu. Enter the ID No.
** RAW DATA DUMP/LOAD (FD) **

1. DUMP (DISK –> FD)
2. LOAD (FD –> DISK)
Select No. =
1. DUMP (FROM DISK TO FD)

Note
Verify that the floppy disk to be used is write–enabled before starting to dump.
The example below shows a raw data file of ID No. 20. 1. 4 (STUDY#: 20, SER#: 1, ACQ#: 4) is dumped to two floppy
disks.
** RAW DATA DUMP/LOAD (FD) **

1. DUMP (DISK –> FD)
2. LOAD (FD –> DISK)
Select No. = 1
PRESS <END> TO END
Enter ID No.=20.1.4
** DUMP START
1. After you enter the ID No., software initializes the floppy disk with VOLUME name “FRAW” and USER No. 0,
and then starts the dump procedure with File name FRAW: 0..RAW DATA n. VR (n = 0, 1, 2,...).
Note
If the FD is protected for write, the following message is displayed;
** FD NOT READY
After Inserting FD, Press<ENTR>_
After Inserting Another FD, Press <ENTR> (Insert the second floppy disk.)
** DUMP START
** DUMP COMPLETE
2. When the floppy disk becomes full, the CRT displays, “After Inserting Another FD, press <ENTR>.”
Continue to Dump?<0:Yes, 1:No>_
3. If you want to continue the dump procedure, enter 0 (YES).
After Inserting Another FD, Press <ENTR>_
4. Replace the current floppy disk with another one, or the current floppy disk will be overwritten.
2–36 SYSTEM
REV 0 2228782
2-11 FD DUMP/LOAD (Continued)
2. LOAD (FROM FD TO DISK)

The example below shows that a raw data file occupying two floppy disks is loaded to Series No. 44 (STUDY#: 0,
SER#: 44, ACQ#: 1, IMAGE#: 1).
1. Insert the raw data floppy disk into the FD unit.
2. Enter Series No. (STATION#: 0, STUDY#: 0, ACQ#: 1, IMAGE#: 1) (The raw data file is contained on two floppy
disks.)
*** RAW DATA LOAD FROM FD ***

PRESS <END> TO END
Enter SERIES No.=44
** LOAD START
After Inserting Another FD, Press <ENTR>

** LOAD START
** LOAD COMPLETE
Continue to Load?<0:Yes, 1:No>_
Note
If the current floppy disk does not have VOLUME name “FRAW,” the following message appears:
** ILLEGAL FD VOLUME ID = XXXX

If the File name in the floppy disk is not right, the message below appears:
** ILLEGAL FILE NAME

2–37 SYSTEM
REV 0 2228782
2-12 MT DUMP/LOAD
This menu dumps raw data files from DISK to MT, or loads raw data files from MT to DISK.
Select 10 (MT DUMP/LOAD) from the “SUPPORT” menu.

** RAW DATA DUMP/LOAD (MT) **

1.DUMP ( DISK!MT )
2.LOAD ( MT!DISK )
Select No.=_
1. DUMP (FROM DISK TO MT)

Note
Verify that the MT unit is ON LINE (READY) and TAPE is not protected.
1. Select 1 (DUMP). The following menu appears.
*** DUMP (FROM DISK TO MT) ***

1. APPEND
2. REWRITE
2. Select 1. APPEND or 2. REWRITE.
APPEND: Writes data after the existing data on Mag tape (does not write over existing data)
REWRITE: Writes data from the beginning of Mag tape (writes over existing data on Mag tape)
3. The example below shows:

A raw data file of ID No. 3 (SER#: 3) on DISK is dumped to FILE No. 0 on MT.
(MT file numbers can not be arbitrarily assigned; they should be 0, 1, 2, ... from the beginning of Mag tape.)
4. Enter ID No. (SER#).
Select No.=2
** FILE No.=0
Enter ID No.=3
** FILE No.=1
Enter ID No.= (<END>)
Dump start OK? <0:OK, 1:No>0
** DUMPED FILE No.=0
** FILE No.=1
Enter ID No.=_
2–38 SYSTEM
REV 0 2228782
2-12 MT DUMP/LOAD (Continued)
2. LOAD (FROM MT TO DISK)

Note
Verify that the MT unit is ON LINE (READY).
1. Select 2 (LOAD).
2. Select MT START FILE No.
3. The example below shows:

A FILE No. 0 on MT is loaded to Series No. 30 (STATION#: 0, STUDY#: 0, SER#: 30, ACQ#: 1, IMAGE#:1).
The software waits for the input of a Series No. (destination) for the next File No. 1 on MT.
Note
The File No. displayed thereafter automatically increases by 1 every time a new file is loaded.
*** LOAD (FROM MT TO DISK) ***

Enter MT START FILE No.=0
** FILE No.=0
Enter SERIES No.=30
** FILE No.=1
Enter SERIES No.=(<END>)
Load start OK? <0:OK, 1:NO>0
** LOADED SERIES No.=30
** FILE No.=1
Enter SERIES No.=_
2–39 SYSTEM
REV 0 2228782
2-13 MOD DUMP/LOAD

This function dumps raw data files from DISK to MOD, or loads raw data files from MOD to DISK.
Insert a magnetic optical disk in the MOD unit.
Select 11 (MOD DUMP/LOAD) from the “SUPPORT” menu.
** RAW DATA DUMP/LOAD (MOD) **

1. DUMP (DISK –> MOD)
2. LOAD (MOD –> DISK)
3. DIRECTORY
4. INITIALIZE
Select No. =
1. DUMP (FROM DISK TO MOD)

Note
Verify that the magnetic optical disk is–write enabled.
1. Select 1 (DUMP). The volume name of the magnetic optical disk is displayed.
*** DUMP (FROM DISK TO MOD) ***

Volume Name = XXXX
The file Nos. (0, 1, 2, ...) on the MOD are displayed, where raw data files will be dumped.
** RAW DATA FILE SELECT **

** FILE No. = XX
Enter ID No. [00:00000.01.01;01] =_
2. Enter the ID No. of the raw data file, and then the file No. is updated, waiting for another file ID No. By pressing
<END>, the dump procedure starts with the following message.
Dump Start OK? <0:OK, 1: NO>0

** DUMP START
** DUMPED FILE No.= XX
** DUMPED FILE No.= XX
.
.
** XX Files dumped **
Software starts the dump procedure with File name ORAW:0..RAWn.VR (n = 0, 1, 2,... = FILE No.).
2–40 SYSTEM
REV 0 2228782
2-13 MOD DUMP/LOAD (Continued)
2. LOAD (FROM MOD TO DISK)

1. Insert the magnetic optical disk into the MOD unit.
2. Select 2 (LOAD). The volume name of the magnetic optical disk is displayed.
*** LOAD (FROM MOD TO DISK) ***

Volume Name = XXXX
3. Enter the file Nos. (0, 1, 2, ...) within the MOD, from which the raw data will be loaded onto the hard disk.
Enter MOD START FILE NO.=_

** RAW DATA FILE SELECT **
** FILE No. = XX
Enter SERIES No. =_
4. Enter the Series No. of the raw data file (the ID Nos. of the raw data files which will be loaded onto the disk are
0:0.XX.1;1 (STA:STD.SER.ACQ;IMG, i.e., other than the Series No. are fixed)). The file No. is updated, waiting
for another file Series No. By pressing <END>, the load procedure starts with the following message.
Load Start OK? <0:OK, 1: NO>0

** LOAD START
** LOADED SERIES No.= XX
** LOADED SERIES No.= XX
.
.
** XX Files loaded **
2–41 SYSTEM
REV 0 2228782
2-13 MOD DUMP/LOAD (Continued)
3. DIRECTORY
1. To displays the raw data file directory on the MOD, select 3 (DIRECTORY).
** RAW DATA FILE DIRECTORY **
FILE# STUDY SER AQ HF STM AZM TBL THK FOV KV MA FCS DATE & TIME
0 12345 01 01 H 2.7 000 +0 10 25 120 60 1992/07/01 12:34:56
1 12345 02 01 H 2.7 000 +0 10 25 120 60 1992/07/01 12:44:56
2 12345 03 01 H 2.7 000 +0 10 25 120 60 1992/07/01 12:54:56
. .
. .
4. INITIALIZE
1. To initialize a MOD, select 4 (INITIALIZE). The volume name of the present MOD is displayed.
** MOD INITIALIZE (RAW DATA ONLY) **

Volume Name = XXXX
Initialize OK? <0:Yes, 1:No>_
Note
The MOD is initialized with volume name “ORAW”.
2–42 SYSTEM
REV 0 2228782
2-14 WARM UP ERROR ANALYSIS

This program performs the same scan and data checks as the Warm–up scan sequence. The parameter ranges
described below are checked:
1. Enter 12 (WARM UP ERROR ANALYSIS) in the “SUPPORT” menu to display the (Warm–up) scan parameters
shown below:
*** WARM UP ERROR ANALYSIS ***

–– AXIAL SCAN ––
SCAN TIME 5.0 sec

THICKNESS 10 mm
XG, ROTOR XG ON
KV 120 KV
MA 60 mA
NO. OF SCAN 1
2. Press the guide lamps (“SET” and “START”) to perform the scan.
The results of data checks are shown as below:
REF CH. XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX

XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX
XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX (MIN=9000)
XXXX XXXX (MAX=50000)
RATIO MAX X.XXXXX XXX ch
MIN X.XXXXX XXX ch (MIN=0.95)
AVE X.XXXXX (MAX=1.05)
HIGHPASS MAX X.XXXXX XXX ch
MIN X.XXXXX XXX ch (MIN=–0.01)
AVE X.XXXXX (MAX=+0.01)
S.D. MAX X.XXXXX XXX ch

MIN X.XXXXX XXX ch (MIN=0.00)
AVE X.XXXXX (MAX=0.02)
The values in parentheses are the tolerances. If some channels give the same MAX or MIN values, the smallest
channel number is shown.
The values shown above are examples only; they differ according to system models.
Ref Ch.:
Mean data of reference channels.
Ratio:
S(i)/c(i) ; where,
S(i): Air mean data collected in this scan
C(i): Air mean data collected in the last warm–up scan
i: Channel No.
Both the S(i) and C(i) are corrected by the offset file and reference channel data.
Highpass:
S’(i)/C(i) ; where,
S’(i): Highpass–filtered data of S(i)
S.D.:
SD(i): Standard deviation data collected in this scan
2–43 SYSTEM
REV 0 2228782
2-14 WARM UP ERROR ANALYSIS (Continued)

3. You can examine each channel’s calculated data (RATIO, HIGHPASS, and S.D.) displayed on the screen, and
store the data to a mean file. Select a type of calculated data you want to examine.
** KIND OF DATA **
1.RATIO
2.HIGHPASS
3.S.D.
Select No.=1
1.DISPLAY
2.STORE FILE
Select No.=_
a. DISPLAY
This selection shows each channel’s calculated data on the screen. Select 2 (DISPLAY) from the “DISPLAY/
FILING” menu.
1.DISPLAY
2.STORE FILE
Select No.=1
Select CHANNEL No.(1)=_
Press “RTN” to see data of the first 104 channels (Ch.1 to Ch.104). To see subsequent channel data, enter a
channel number, and that channel’s data is shown in the first line of the table, followed by data of the following
channels. The number in parentheses is the default number.
CHANNEL RATIO
0001 +0.9991 +0.9994 +1.0003 +0.9989
0005 +1.0001 +1.0000 +1.0000 +0.9991
.
.
0097 +1.0000 +1.0000 +1.0004 +1.0000
0101 +1.0001 +0.9999 +1.0001 +1.0001
2–44 SYSTEM
REV 0 2228782
2-14 WARM UP ERROR ANALYSIS (Continued)

b. STORE FILE
This selection stores the calculated data to a mean file. Enter a file No. (1 ~ 16) and a comment (40 characters
maximum).
1.DISPLAY
2.STORE FILE
Select No.=2
** STORE FILE **
Enter MEAN FILE No.<1–16>=1

Enter COMMENT = WARM UP RATIO
** STORE END
1.DISPLAY
2.STORE FILE
Select No.=_
2–45 SYSTEM
REV 0 2228782
2-15 GENERATOR/TUBE
This program performs the tube calibration (mA calibration), diagnostic tests for the X–ray Generator, or a heat soak/
seasoning procedure.
1. Enter 13 (GENERATOR/TUBE) in the “SUPPORT” menu.
*** GENERATOR/TUBE ***

1. TUBE CALIBRATION
2. GENERATOR TEST
3. HEAT SOAK/SEASONING
Select No.=_
1. TUBE CALIBRATION
1. Enter 1 (TUBE CALIBRATION) in the “GENERATOR/TUBE” menu.
** TUBE CALIBRATION **
1. CHANGE PARAMETER
2. RESET PARAMETER
Select No.=_
2. Select 1 (CHANGE PARAMETER) to perform the calibration. The following kV–mA stations for calibration are
shown.
** CHANGE PARAMETER **
<SELECT SCAN KV, MA, FOCUS>
80 kV 120 kV 140 kV
1: 60 mA 7: 60 mA 13: 60 mA
LARGE 2: 160 mA 8: 160 mA 14: 130 mA
3: 350 mA 9: 350 mA 15: 300 mA
4: 60 mA 10: 60 mA 16: 60 mA
SMALL 5: 130 mA 11: 130 mA 17: 100 mA
6: 250 mA 12: 200 mA 18: 160 mA
< x >
< x–y >
< x, y, z >
< kV >
< L > or < S >
Select No. <Enter to All>=_
2–46 SYSTEM
REV 0 2228782
2-15 GENERATOR/TUBE (continued)

3. You have six ways to select kV–mA stations to be calibrated:
Select a particular station by entering a number (any from 1 through 18), or
Select a range by entering numbers (< x–y >), or
Select any three stations (< x, y, z >), or
Select a kV value (80, 120, or 140); each selecting 1 ~ 6, 7 ~ 12, or 13 ~ 18, or
Select a Focus size (L or S); each selecting all the calibration stations for Large Focus or for Small Focus, or
Enter <Enter> to select all the stations listed.
The calibration scan(s) will start after selecting the station(s).
** CHANGE PARAMETER **
<AXIAL SCAN>
THICKNESS 1.0 mm
SCAN TIME 2.0 sec
KV 80 kV
MA 60 mA
FOCUS LARGE
8 SCAN REMAINING
PRESS <SET> AND <START> TO SCAN
After all the selected scans are performed, the calibrated data starts to be stored to EEPROM, with the following
message:
** PARAMETER STORE IN PROGRESS **
The calibration data stored on EEPROM can revert to the original data (stored on ROM) by executing 2 (RESET
PARAMETER).
** RESET PARAMETER **
PARAMETER RESET IN PROGRESS
2–47 SYSTEM
REV 0 2228782
2-15 GENERATOR/TUBE (continued)
2. GENERATOR TEST
1. Select 2 (GENERATOR TEST) to perform diagnostic tests for the X–ray Generator.
*** GENERATOR TEST ***

< : EXPCMD ON
> : EXPCMD OFF
( : SAFETY LOOP CLOSE
) : SAFETY LOOP OPEN
PRESS [END] TO END GENERATOR TEST
TO GENERATOR FROM GENERATOR

TO:_ FROM:
Test Commands
Enter a generator test command at the “TO:” prompt. The command is sent to the x–ray generator. Responses from
the x–ray generator are displayed at the “FROM:” prompt.
3. HEAT SOAK/SEASONING
This menu performs the heat soak procedure for the X–ray tube anode and housing, or the high voltage seasoning
procedure.
** HEAT SOAK/SEASONING **
1. HEAT SOAK
2. SEASONING
Select No.=_
Note
This function is not yet available under the current system software.
2–48 SYSTEM
REV 0 2228782
2-16 MTF SURVEY

The MTF SURVEY menu calculates MTF data from an image of a wire embedded in the QA phantom. In this menu,
store the calculated data to a mean file, and analyze it using the Support Display.
Before entering this menu, scan a wire in the QA phantom, reconstruct using an appropriate algorithm you wish to
examine, view the image, and use “Report Cursor” to note the wire center values.
1. Enter the image ID No.
** MTF SURVEY **
Enter IMAGE ID <XX:XXXXXX.XX.XX;XX>=_
If there is not an image of the ID entered, the following message is displayed;
** IMAGE NOTHING
2. Enter the wire center values. The values should have been noted with using the “Report Cursor” function.
WIRE CENTER X (Pixel)=_

WIRE CENTER Y (Pixel)=_
3. Enter the area size (default: 32).
AREA SIZE <8/16/32/64/128 (pixel)> (32)=_
Use “Set Cursor“ to confirm that the designated area does not overlay phantom edges. If the entered value is
not to the second power, the following message appears.
** INVALID ENTRY
If the designated area (the center of it is the wire centers) cannot be contained within the image, the following
message appears.
** AREA TOO LARGE
4. Enter the edge width (for calculating CT # of water used for offset correction) (default: 4).
EDGE (Pixel)(4)=_
When the entered value is less than half the designated area, the following message is displayed.
** JUST A MOMENT PLEASE **
If the value is more than half the designated area, the following message is displayed.
** EDGE TOO LARGE **
2–49 SYSTEM
REV 0 2228782
2-16 MTF SURVEY (Continued)

5. Enter a graph type (default: 3).
SELECT GRAPH TYPE (1:STND/2:BONY/3:MANUAL)=_
When you select 1 (STND), the maximum value of the horizontal axis (frequency axis) is 8 LP/cm.
When you select 2 (BONY), the maximum value of the horizontal axis (frequency axis) is 16 LP/cm.
When you select 3 (MANUAL), enter a maximum value of the horizontal axis (frequency axis) (default: 12).
Enter MAX FREQUENCY (LP/cm)=_
6. Store the file to graphically view using Support Display.
** STORE FILE **
Enter MEAN FILE No.<1–16>=_
Enter COMMENT=_
** START
** STORE END
2–50 SYSTEM
REV 0 2228782
2-17 DAS DATA TRANSFER TEST

In this test the system instructs the DAS to transfer the pattern data to the the operator console and verifies that the
data is correctly transferred. This test is the same as the DAS TEST 2: TEST PATTERN included in the Off–Line
scan. Refer to Section 2-3, Off Line Scan. In this test, however, the test can be repeated 1 ~ 1000 times.
1. Select 15 (DAS DATA TRANSFER TEST) from the “SUPPORT” menu.

** DAS DATA TRANSFER TEST **

TEST BIT BY BIT TEST
GANTRY STATIONARY
SCAN TIME 3.0sec
No. OF SCAN 10
No. OF TEST 10
1.EXECUTE TEST
2.EDIT TEST MODE
Select No._
2. Select 2 to modify the scan parameters or the number of tests.
Select No.2
TEST <BIT BY BIT TEST>
(1)
GANTRY <1:STATIONARY, 2:ROTATE>
(1)
SCAN TIME <1:0.7sec, 2:1.0sec, 3:1.5sec, 4:2.0sec, 5:3.0sec>
(5)
No. OF SCAN <1–30>
(10)
No. OF TEST <1–1000>
(10)
2–51 SYSTEM
REV 0 2228782
2-17 DAS DATA TRANSFER TEST (continued)

3. Select 1 to perform the test.
Select No.1
After all the scans are performed the times (No. OF SCAN), the data verification starts.
Now COMPARING DATA

Press [END] to end _
After the data verification is successfully finished, the next scan series are performed.
This cycle repeats the times specified by No. OF TEST.

The total number of checks (No. of scans X No. of tests) that have detected no error is shown as below:
PASS n (n: total number)
If an error is found, the test is ended at the time, with the following message:
** DATA COMPARE ERROR

PASS n
FIXED NUMBER
SCAN NO.
RAW DATA FILE 000000.01.0

5
DAS DATA VIEW No. 67
DAS DATA CHANNEL No. 125
The DAS data view No. and channel No. indicate that where (when) the first error occurred. The DAS channel
No. indicates the transfer order, not the real channel No.
This error information is also shown in the Status Screen as follows:
ER–170 Data Compare Error

F:00000.01.05 V:67 C:125
2–52 SYSTEM
REV 0 2228782

SUPPORT DISPLAY
3-1 FUNCTIONS OF SUPPORT DISPLAY

Use “SUPPORT DISPLAY” to analyze raw data files or mean files created in Support programs by displaying the
images (these are not back–projected images, but “channel–view” images) or graphs.
Select 2 (SUPPORT DISPLAY) from the Maintenance menu to display the following screen:
CHANNEL
START POSITION
FILE : SUPRAW 1
VIEW 1 START
CHANNEL = 1
VIEW =1
RANGE INFORMATION
MIN = 0
MAX = 1000
MAGNIFY =1
DISPLAY SUPPORT
1. FILE SELECTION
2. START POSITION
3. RANGE
4. ROI
5. MAGNIFY
6. PROFILE (H)
7. PROFILE (V) MENU
8. HISTOGRAM
9. NUMERICAL
10. WHERE
11. SET CURSOR
12. ERASE
13. GRID
14.
15.
Select No. = 1
Enter FILE NAME
VIEW 512 = SUPRAW 1 MESSAGE
IMAGE FIELD (CHANNEL–VIEW IMAGE)
SUPPORT DISPLAY SCREEN

ILLUSTRATION 3–1
The “image field” (see Illustration 3–1) comprises a 512 x 512 matrix. The horizontal axis in the image field indicates
channels, and the vertical axis indicates views, as shown. Since a raw data file contains data of beyond Ch. 512 and
View 512, the image filed can not show all the data of a raw data file. Use START POSITION (2) to change the Channel
and View start positions.
3–1 SYSTEM
REV 0 2228782
3-1 FUNCTIONS OF SUPPORT DISPLAY (Continued)

A raw data file can be illustrated as below. A raw data file is a two–dimensional type file; a channel has data at each
view. Data is shown as a height of pillars in the illustration. On the other hand, a mean file is one–dimensional; a
channel has one data.
DATA
DATA
4
3
4 4 3
3 2
2 1 VIEW 2
1
1
CHANNEL CHANNEL
RAW DATA FILE MEAN FILE
RAW DATA FILE AND MEAN FILE (Xe TYPE DETECTOR SYSTEM)
ILLUSTRATION 3–2
The followings are the menus provided.
1. FILE SELECTION
Choose one of four files (three raw data files plus one file that contains up to 16 mean files) created in Support
programs.
2. START POSITION
You may assign any channel No. and view No. to the Start Position location. (upper left corner of the image field.)
3. RANGE
You can specify a range within the data range (–1000000 ~ 1000000), and only the data falling within this specified
range are gray–shaded on the image field.
3–2 SYSTEM
REV 0 2228782
3-1 FUNCTIONS OF SUPPORT DISPLAY (Continued)

4. ROI
Move the square cursor over a region of interest and the software calculates and displays its Mean, S.D. (Standard
Deviation), Maximum, and Minimum data.
5. MAGNIFY
Position the cursor over a region of interest and then select a Mag factor from x2 to x10 to magnify the channel–view
image area surrounding the cursor.
Or, select a Reduction factor from x1/2 to x1/10 to reduce the channel–view image; in this function you specify the
channel and view numbers for the upper left corner of the reduced image.
6. PROFILE (H)
Position the cursor over a view of interest and software superimposes a graph of data of each channel over the image.
The specified Minimum and Maximum data values determine axis graduation.
7. PROFILE (V)
Position the cursor over a channel of interest and software superimposes a graph of data at each view over the image.
The specified Minimum and Maximum data values determine axis graduation.
8. HISTOGRAM
Position the square cursor over an area of interest and software superimposes a histogram on the image. You can
vary the histogram’s data range by changing the Minimum and Maximum data values.
9. NUMERICAL
Position the cursor over an area of interest and software superimposes a numerical display of the data for the cursor
position and area surrounding it (9 locations in all) on the image area.
10. WHERE
Displays the channel No. and view No. indicated by the cursor position.
11. SET CURSOR
Enter a channel No. and view No. via the keyboard, and software moves the cursor to the position on the image screen.
12. ERASE
Erases any graphs, lines, or numeric data, produced by programs described above from the image.
13. GRID
Software graduates the channel and view axes, or it also draws grid lines on the image field according to the
graduations.
3–3 SYSTEM
REV 0 2228782
3-2 HOW TO USE SUPPORT DISPLAY

1. Select 2 (SUPPORT DISPLAY) from the Maintenance menu.
The “SUPPORT DISPLAY” screen appears on the image monitor. The right side of the screen displays Support
Display menus. Software automatically selects FILE SELECTION (1) when you first enter Support Display.
Note
First select a file in the FILE SELECTION menu before using other Support Display menus; other
menus can not be used if a file is not selected.
2. Press RETURN and enter the file name.

Software refuses to accept any other menu selection until you select a file. After you enter the file name, you
can choose any of the following programs:
1. FILE SELECTION
2. START POSITION
3. RANGE
4. ROI
5. MAGNIFY
6. PROFILE (H)
7. PROFILE (V)
8. HISTOGRAM
9. NUMERICAL
10. WHERE
11. SET CURSOR
12. ERASE
13. GRID
14.
15.
Select No.=_
Note
D Press the END key to end the current program and make another selection from the menu.
Press END at the menu level to end Support Display and return to the Maintenance menu.
D When you make an unacceptable entry, the following message appears:
** INVALID ENTRY
D The following message is displayed when a system error occurs. Software control shifts one level higher,
waiting for a selection from the Display Support menu or the Maintenance menu.
** ERROR XXXXXXXX
(ERROR CODE)
D If the entered parameters exceed the specified range, the following message is displayed, and software
waits for entry of appropriate parameters.
** RANGE ERROR
3–4 SYSTEM
REV 0 2228782
3-2 HOW TO USE SUPPORT DISPLAY (Continued)
General Procedure
(1) FILE SELECTION NOTE: FIRST DO THE FILE SELECTION BEFORE

USING OTHER SUPPORT DISPLAY FUNCTION.
(2) START POSITION (Defaults: Channel No.: 1, View No.: 1)
(3) RANGE (Defaults: MIN: 0, MAX: 1000)
MEAN FILE DISPLAY RAW DATA FILE DISPLAY
(6) PROFILE (H) (6) (7) PROFILE (H) (V)

(9) NUMERICAL (4) ROI (5) MAGNIFY
(10) WHERE (8) HISTOGRAM
(11) SET CURSOR (9) NUMERICAL
(12) ERASE (10) WHERE
(13) GRID (11) SET CURSOR
(12) ERASE
(13) GRID
3–5 SYSTEM
REV 0 2228782
3-3 ARTIFACT IMAGE EXAMPLES

The following examples of images (channel–view images) show how raw data looks when the reconstructed images
from these raw data files contain typical artifacts Ring, Shower, and Streak, respectively.
Ring Artifact
One channel consistently gives abnormal data at every view.
FILE : SUPRAW 1
RING START
CHANNEL = 1
ARTIFACT VIEW =1
RANGE
MIN = 0
MAX = 1000
MAGNIFY =1
DISPLAY SUPPORT
1. FILE SELECTION
2. START POSITION
3. RANGE
4. ROI
5. MAGNIFY
6. PROFILE (H)
7. PROFILE (V)
8. HISTOGRAM
9. NUMERICAL
10. WHERE
11. SET CURSOR
12. ERASE
13. GRID
14.
15.
Select No. = 1
Enter FILE NAME
= SUPRAW 1
RING ARTIFACT
ILLUSTRATION 3–3
3–6 SYSTEM
REV 0 2228782
3-3 ARTIFACT IMAGE EXAMPLES (Continued)
Shower Artifact
FILE : SUPRAW 1
START
CHANNEL = 1
VIEW =1
RANGE
MIN = 0
MAX = 1000
MAGNIFY =1
SHOWER DISPLAY SUPPORT

ARTIFACT 1. FILE SELECTION
2. START POSITION
3. RANGE
4. ROI
5. MAGNIFY
6. PROFILE (H)
7. PROFILE (V)
8. HISTOGRAM
9. NUMERICAL
10. WHERE
11. SET CURSOR
12. ERASE
13. GRID
14.
15.
Select No. = 1
Enter FILE NAME
= SUPRAW 1
SHOWER ARTIFACT
ILLUSTRATION 3–4
Streak Artifact
One channel gives abnormal data at one view.
FILE : SUPRAW 1
START
CHANNEL = 1
VIEW =1
RANGE
MIN = 0
MAX = 1000
MAGNIFY =1
STREAK DISPLAY SUPPORT

ARTIFACT
1. FILE SELECTION
2. START POSITION
3. RANGE
4. ROI
5. MAGNIFY
6. PROFILE (H)
7. PROFILE (V)
8. HISTOGRAM
9. NUMERICAL
10. WHERE
11. SET CURSOR
12. ERASE
13. GRID
14.
15.
Select No. = 1
Enter FILE NAME
= SUPRAW 1
STREAK ARTIFACT
ILLUSTRATION 3–5
3–7 SYSTEM
REV 0 2228782
3-4 FILE SELECTION

1. Select menu 1 (FILE SELECTION) from the Display Support menu.
2. Enter a file name.
Note
D For a file name, see the following ‘Files Viewed by Support Display.’
D If you enter an incorrect file name, the following message appears even though the file exists:
** INVALID FILE
D If you enter the name of a non–existent file, the following message appears:
** FILE NOTHING
3. Enter MIN and MAX values for RANGE.

The following screen appears.
The entered file name appears in the upper right corner of the screen. See Illustration 3–6.
If the system selects this menu automatically (immediately after you enter Support Display), then you must speci-
fy the data range; refer to Section 3-6, Range.
FILE : SUPRAW 1
START
CHANNEL = 1
VIEW =1 DISPLAYED
RANGE
MIN = 0 ITEMS
MAX = 1000
MAGNIFY =1
DISPLAY SUPPORT
1. FILE SELECTION
2. START POSITION
3. RANGE
4. ROI
5. MAGNIFY
6. PROFILE (H)
7. PROFILE (V)
8. HISTOGRAM
9. NUMERICAL
10. WHERE
11. SET CURSOR
12. ERASE
13. GRID
14.
15.
Select No. = 1
Enter FILE NAME
= SUPRAW 1
RANGE STEP 2
MIN =
MAX= 1000
0
STEP 3
FILE SELECTION
ILLUSTRATION 3–6
3–8 SYSTEM
REV 0 2228782
3-4 FILE SELECTION (Continued)
Files Viewed by Support Display
MAINTENANCE
SUPPORT
MEAN FILE DIRECTORY OFF LINE SCAN RAW DATA FILE DIRECTORY
MEAN FILE No.
FILE ID No.
STATISTICS
OFFSET AVERAGE FAN

MEAN FILE
No.
MAX, MIN
MEAN, S.D. ORIGINAL CALCULATION WITH RAW DATA
MEAN FILE No. RAW DATA FILE No.

MAX, MIN
CALCULATION WITH MEAN FILE ORIGINAL MEAN, S.D.
MEAN FILE No. RAW DATA FILE No. MEAN FILE No.
MAINTENANCE
SUPPORT DISPLAY
CREATION OF MEAN AND RAW DATA FILES

ILLUSTRATION 3–7
3–9 SYSTEM
REV 0 2228782
3-4 FILE SELECTION (Continued)

The Support Display can display the following files created in Support programs.
Raw data files No. 1 ∼ 3
Mean files No. 1 ∼ 16
See Illustration 3–7.
Support Display can be used for any raw data files listed in RAW DATA FILE DIRECTORY (Support program) or any
files stored in OFF LINE SCAN; For this, these raw data files should be stored in STATISTICS. In STATISTICS, a
raw data file can be stored to any of No. 1 ∼ 3.
Support Display can also be used for any mean files listed in MEAN FILE DIRECTORY, or stored in STATISTICS,
CALCULATION WITH MEAN FILE, or CALCULATION WITH RAW DATA.
For example of storing a raw data file;
a. Enter the STATISTICS program.
b. Select ORIGINAL in the FAN menu.
c. Store the raw data file to any of No. 1 ∼ 3.
In Support Display, use the following file names for FILE SELECTION.
All the mean files are stored in a file named SUPMEAN, since a mean file only takes storage space for one view.
File name Raw data file, Mean file

SUPRAW 1 Raw data file No. 1
SUPMEAN View 1 Mean file No. 1

View 2 Mean file No. 2
View 16 Mean file No. 16
Note
You can shorten the file names as below:
SUPRAW 1 R1
SUPRAW 2 R2
SUPRAW 3 R3
SUPMEAN M
3–10 SYSTEM
REV 0 2228782
3-5 START POSITION

The upper left corner of the image field is the location for the first channel No. and view No. (start position) of the
displayed image. By default, Channel 1 and View 1 are assigned to the start position, but a different start position
channel and/or view can be entered using this menu
1. Select 2 (START POSITION).
2. Enter the channel No. and view No. as a start position.

The entered parameters are displayed in the upper right corner of the CRT.
Note
D The following inquiry appears for a raw data file:
CHANNEL =
VIEW =
D The following appears for the SUPMEAN file. Enter 1 ∼ 16 for DATA. (The SUPMEAN file contains 16
mean files in View 1 ∼ 16.)
CHANNEL =
DATA =
START CHANNEL
POSITION
FILE : SUPRAW 1
START DISPLAYED
CHANNEL = 250
VIEW = 10 ITEMS
RANGE Default: Ch 1
MIN = 0 View 1
MAX = 1000
MAGNIFY =1
VIEW
DISPLAY SUPPORT
1. FILE SELECTION
2. START POSITION
3. RANGE
4. ROI
5. MAGNIFY
6. PROFILE (H)
7. PROFILE (V)
8. HISTOGRAM
9. NUMERICAL
10. WHERE
11. SET CURSOR
12. ERASE
13. GRID
14.
15.
Select No. = 2
CHANNEL =
STEP 1
250
VIEW = 10 STEP 2
START POSITION
ILLUSTRATION 3–8
3–11 SYSTEM
REV 0 2228782
3-6 RANGE
Data at each point on the image field are depicted as shades of gray. The data range of a raw data file is between
–1000000 and 1000000, and a specified range within the data range translates into between –1000 and 3000 gray
levels, which are then displayed on the image field; that is, after you specify the MIN and MAX values, the specified
range is expanded (or reduced) to the –1000 ∼ 3000 range. See Illustration 3–9.
ÉÉÉÉÉÉ
RANGE
ÉÉÉÉÉÉ
–1000000 MIN MAX 1000000
ÉÉÉÉÉÉ
RAW DATA
GRAY LEVEL
–1000 3000
RANGE AND GRAY LEVEL

ILLUSTRATION 3–9
1. Select 3 (RANGE).
2. Enter MIN and MAX values. The following screen appears.
Note
Software accepts any MIN and MAX values between –1000000 to +1000000, as long as the MIN
value is less than the MAX value. The MIN and MAX values are displayed in the upper right quadrant
of the screen. For example, enter MIN=0 and MAX=1000.
Because the default range is relatively narrow and the levels are low, the typical image has offset
views like Illustration 3–10, with the rest of the image being (evenly) bright white.
FILE : SUPRAW 1
START
OFFSET VIEWS CHANNEL = 250
VIEW = 1
RANGE DISPLAYED
MIN = 0
MAX = 1000 ITEMS
MAGNIFY = 1
DISPLAY SUPPORT
1. FILE SELECTION
2. START POSITION
3. RANGE
4. ROI
5. MAGNIFY
6. PROFILE (H)
7. PROFILE (V)
8. HISTOGRAM
9. NUMERICAL
10. WHERE
11. SET CURSOR
12. ERASE
13. GRID
14.
15.
Select No. = 3
MIN = 0
STEP 1
MAX = 1000
STEP 2
RANGE
ILLUSTRATION 3–10
3–12 SYSTEM
REV 0 2228782
3-7 ROI
Use this menu to calculate the statistical information of an area enclosed by a square cursor.
1. Display the square cursor on the screen by pressing the <Crsr> key and <f/j> key. Use the trackball to size
and position the cursor over a region of interest.
Note
Position first the cursor before commanding ROI and also do not position the cursor out of range,
otherwise, the following message appears.
** INVALID CURSOR
2. Select menu 4. (ROI).

The software calculates and displays the statistical data (MEAN, S.D., MAX, and MIN) in the lower right quadrant
of the image field.
The cursor’s size and position are displayed in the upper right quadrant of the screen.
STEP 1
FILE : SUPRAW 1
START
CHANNEL = 1
VIEW =1
RANGE
MIN = 0
MAX = 3000
MAGNIFY =1
CURSOR
CHANNEL = 360 DISPLAYED
VIEW = 292
SIZE X = 52 ITEMS
SIZE Y = 42
DISPLAY SUPPORT
1. FILE SELECTION
2. START POSITION
3. RANGE
4. ROI
5. MAGNIFY
6. PROFILE (H)
7. PROFILE (V)
8. HISTOGRAM
9. NUMERICAL
10. WHERE
11. SET CURSOR
12. ERASE
MEAN : 6.034418E + 02 13. GRID
S.D. : 2.436565E + 01 14.
MAX : 6.635000E + 02 15.
MIN : 5.385000E + 02
Select No. = 4 STEP 2
ROI
ILLUSTRATION 3–11
3–13 SYSTEM
REV 0 2228782
3-8 MAGNIFY
Use this menu to magnify the image up to 10 times (x1 to x10).
1. Position the crosshair over a region of interest.
Note
Position first the cursor before commanding MAGNIFY and also do not position the cursor out of
range, otherwise, the following message appears.
** INVALID CURSOR
2. Select 5 (MAGNIFY) to enlarge the area surrounding the + cursor.
FILE : SUPRAW 1
STEP 1
START
CHANNEL = 1
VIEW =1
RANGE
MIN = 0
MAX = 3000 DISPLAYED
MAGNIFY =2
ITEM
DISPLAY SUPPORT
1. FILE SELECTION
+ 2. START POSITION
3. RANGE
4. ROI
5. MAGNIFY
6. PROFILE (H)
7. PROFILE (V)
8. HISTOGRAM
9. NUMERICAL
10. WHERE
11. SET CURSOR
12. ERASE
13. GRID
14.
15.
MAG<1–10>
</2–/10> =2 STEP 3
MAGNIFY
ILLUSTRATION 3–12
3–14 SYSTEM
REV 0 2228782
3-8 MAGNIFY (continued)

3. Enter a magnification factor.
The magnification factor is displayed in the upper right quadrant of the screen.
Note
D You can also reduce the image within the range of x1/2 to x1/10 to view the entire image. If you reduce
the image by a 1/8 factor, for example, enter:
/8 (RTN)
Then specify the channel No and view No, which determines the position of the upper left corner of the
reduced image. The channel No and view No selectable depend on the reduction factor. If you selected
1/8 for the reduction factor, for example, then the following range is shown:
SAMPLING ORIGIN
CHANNEL <1–8>=_
VIEW <1–8>=_
You can reduce a mean file only in the horizontal direction.
D You can only magnify an image once (You cannot magnify an already magnified image).
4. To return to a normal size display, select menu 1 (FILE SELECTION) or specify a magnification factor of 1; you
do not need a cursor for either execution.
3–15 SYSTEM
REV 0 2228782
3-9 PROFILE(H)
Use this menu to display a graph of data of channels at a specified view. If a channel gave abnormal data during a
scan, the graph will show a significant deviation at this channel. Use this menu to track down ring artifacts.
1. Position the cursor over a view of interest using the trackball (the horizontal position (channel) is irrelevant).
Note
Position first the cursor before commanding PROFILE (H) and also do not position the cursor out of
** INVALID CURSOR
2. Select menu item 6 (PROFILE H).
3. Enter the MIN and MAX values, which decide the amplitude range of the plot. (Data out of this range is not
plotted. See Illustration 3–13)
Software displays the specified MIN and MAX values in scientific notation form above the Display Support menu.
É
É
MAX
É
DATA
É
MIN
CHANNEL
DATA RANGE FOR PROFILE (H)

ILLUSTRATION 3–13
3–16 SYSTEM
REV 0 2228782
3-9 PROFILE(H) (Continued)
FILE : SUPRAW 1
STEP 1
START
RANGE CHANNEL = 1
VIEW =1
RANGE
MIN = 0
MAX = 3000
MAGNIFY =1
CURSOR DISPLAYED
CHANNEL = 353 ITEM
VIEW = 92
DATA MIN
0.000000e + 00
DATA MAX VIEW 92 IS SELECTED
1.000000e + 04
DISPLAY SUPPORT
1. FILE SELECTION
2. START POSITION
3. RANGE
4. ROI
STEP 5
5. MAGNIFY
6. PROFILE (H)
7. PROFILE (V)
8. HISTOGRAM
9. NUMERICAL
10. WHERE
11. SET CURSOR
12. ERASE
13. GRID
14.
15.
Select No. = 6
DATA MIN
STEP 2
= 0.000000e + 00
DATA MAX
= 1000
STEP 3,4
CHANNEL
PROFILE (H)
ILLUSTRATION 3–14
4. Adjust the MIN and MAX values (by narrowing or widening the range or shifting the level of the range) to display
a more descriptive curve in the following way:
a. Press the <End> key to end the Profile program.
b. Enter 12 (ERASE) to clear the screen graph.
c. Repeat steps 2 and 3.
5. Change the START POSITION (2) to draw a graph for other channels, since the program only graphs 512 chan-
nels at a time.
3–17 SYSTEM
REV 0 2228782
3-10 PROFILE(V)
Use this menu to display a graph of data of a specified channel. If a channel gave abnormal data during one or more
views, the graph will show a significant deviation at these views. Use this menu to troubleshoot streak artifacts.
1. Position the cursor over a channel of interest using the trackball (the vertical position (view) is irrelevant).
Note
Position first the cursor before commanding PROFILE (V) and also do not position the cursor out of
** INVALID CURSOR
2. Select menu item 7 (PROFILE V).
3. Enter the MIN and MAX values, which decide the amplitude range of the plot. (Data out of this range is not
plotted. See Illustration 3–15)
Software displays the specified MIN and MAX values in scientific notation form above the Display Support menu.
ÉÉÉÉÉ
DATA
ÉÉÉÉÉ
MIN MAX
VIEW
DATA RANGE FOR PROFILE (V)

ILLUSTRATION 3–15
3–18 SYSTEM
REV 0 2228782
3-10 PROFILE(V) (Continued)
FILE : SUPRAW 1
STEP 1
START
CHANNEL = 1
VIEW =1
RANGE
MIN = 0
MAX = 3000
MAGNIFY =1 DISPLAYED
CURSOR
CHANNEL = 433 ITEM
VIEW = 96
DATA MIN CHANNEL 433
4.000000e + 02 IS SELECTED
DATA MAX
8.000000e + 02
DISPLAY SUPPORT
1. FILE SELECTION
2. START POSITION
3. RANGE
4. ROI
STEP 5
5. MAGNIFY
6. PROFILE (H)
7. PROFILE (V)
8. HISTOGRAM
9. NUMERICAL
10. WHERE
11. SET CURSOR
12. ERASE
13. GRID
14.
15.
VIEW
Select No. = 7
DATA MIN
= 4.000000e + 02
STEP 2 STEP 3, 4
DATA MAX
= 800
RANGE
PROFILE (V)
ILLUSTRATION 3–16
4. Adjust the MIN and MAX values (by narrowing or widening the range or shifting the level of the range) to display
a more descriptive curve in the following manner:
a. Press the <End> key to end the Profile program.
b. Enter 12 (ERASE) to clear the screen graph.
c. Repeat steps 2 and 3.
5. Change the START POSITION (2) to draw a graph for other views, since the program only graphs 512 views
at a time.
3–19 SYSTEM
REV 0 2228782
3-11 HISTOGRAM
This program draws a histogram on an area enclosed by the box cursor. The histogram shows a frequency distribution
of data within your specified MIN and MAX range.
1. Position the box cursor over an area of interest using the trackball.
Note
Position first the cursor before commanding HISTOGRAM and also do not position the cursor out
of range, otherwise, the following message appears.
** INVALID CURSOR
2. Change the box size using the <Size> key.
3. Select menu item 8 (HISTOGRAM).
4. Enter the MIN and MAX values, which decide the data range for the histogram.
The histogram is drawn automatically. The size and the center location of the square cursor are displayed in the
upper right quadrant of the screen. (The box cursor remains on the image field.)
FILE : SUPRAW 1
STEP 1,2
START
CHANNEL = 1
VIEW =1
RANGE
MIN = 0
MAX = 3000
MAGNIFY =1 DISPLAYED
CURSOR
CHANNEL = 426 ITEM
VIEW = 125
SIZE X = 52
SIZE Y = 42
DATA MIN
4.000000e + 02
DATA MAX
8.000000e + 02
DISPLAY SUPPORT
1. FILE SELECTION
2. START POSITION
3. RANGE
4. ROI
5. MAGNIFY
6. PROFILE (H)
7. PROFILE (V)
8. HISTOGRAM
9. NUMERICAL
10. WHERE
11. SET CURSOR
12. ERASE
13. GRID
14.
15.
MIN
= 4.000000e + 02
MAX
STEP 4
= 800
RANGE
HISTOGRAM
ILLUSTRATION 3–17
3–20 SYSTEM
REV 0 2228782
3-12 NUMERICAL
This menu numerically displays data of a location of the cursor and its surrounding locations (nine locations in all) as
illustrated below. This function may be used to determine proper MIN and MAX values for PROFILE (H) and PROFILE
(V).
CURSOR POSITION
This menu automatically clears the image field (but leaves the image) before displaying the numerical values, and
highlights the center position.
1. Position the cursor over a location of interest using the trackball.
2. Select menu item 9 (NUMERICAL).

The cursor location (Channel No. and View No.) is displayed above the Display Support menu.
STEP 1
FILE : SUPRAW 1
START
CHANNEL = 1
VIEW =1
RANGE
MIN = 0
MAX = 3000
MAGNIFY =1
CURSOR DISPLAYED
CHANNEL = 315
VIEW = 126 ITEM
6.639999e + 02 6.644999e + 02 6.710000e + 02

DISPLAY SUPPORT
6.605000e + 02 6.630000e + 02 6.695000e + 02
1. FILE SELECTION
6.675000e + 02 6.590000e + 02 6.755000e + 02 2. START POSITION
3. RANGE
4. ROI
5. MAGNIFY
6. PROFILE (H)
7. PROFILE (V)
8. HISTOGRAM
9. NUMERICAL
10. WHERE
11. SET CURSOR
12. ERASE
13. GRID
14.
15.

NUMERICAL
ILLUSTRATION 3–18
Note
If you fail to correctly position the cursor, the following message appears:
** INVALID CURSOR
3–21 SYSTEM
REV 0 2228782
3-13 WHERE
This menu displays the location information (channel No. and view No.) of the cursor which you position.
1. Position the cursor.
2. Select menu item 10 (WHERE).

The channel No. and view No. of the cursor location are displayed above the Display Support menu.
STEP 1
FILE : SUPRAW 1
START
CHANNEL = 1
VIEW =1
RANGE
MIN = 0
MAX = 1000
+ MAGNIFY =1
CURSOR DISPLAYED
CHANNEL = 314
VIEW = 142 ITEM
DISPLAY SUPPORT
1. FILE SELECTION
2. START POSITION
3. RANGE
4. ROI
5. MAGNIFY
6. PROFILE (H)
7. PROFILE (V)
8. HISTOGRAM
9. NUMERICAL
10. WHERE
11. SET CURSOR
12. ERASE
13. GRID
14.
15.

WHERE
ILLUSTRATION 3–19
Note
If you fail to correctly position the cursor, the following message appears:
** INVALID CURSOR
3–22 SYSTEM
REV 0 2228782
3-14 SET CURSOR

This menu sets the cursor to the specified location (view No. and channel No. or data No.).
1. Enter 11 (SET CURSOR).
2. Enter the channel No. and view No. (or data No.) where you want to display the cursor.
The cursor will be displayed at the location.
Note
For a raw data file, enter the following:
CHANNEL=
VIEW =
For a mean file, enter the following (enter 1 ∼ 16 for DATA, which corresponds to mean files No. 1
∼ No. 16.):
CHANNEL=
DATA =
DISPLAYED
CURSOR
FILE : SUPRAW 1
START
CHANNEL
=1
VIEW =1
RANGE
MIN = 0
+ MAX = 1000
MAGNIFY =1
DISPLAY SUPPORT
1. FILE SELECTION
2. START POSITION
3. RANGE
4. ROI
5. MAGNIFY
6. PROFILE (H)
7. PROFILE (V)
8. HISTOGRAM
9. NUMERICAL
10. WHERE
11. SET CURSOR
12. ERASE
13. GRID
14.
15.
Select No. = 11
STEP 1 STEP 2
CHANNEL =
350
VIEW = 100
SET CURSOR
ILLUSTRATION 3–20
3–23 SYSTEM
REV 0 2228782
3-15 ERASE
This menu removes graphs, numeric data, or histograms superimposed on the image. Normally, the graphics remain
until a new function clears them, or replaces them with other graphics, or you select ERASE. This menu does not
erase the cursor.
1. Select menu item 12 (ERASE).
3–24 SYSTEM
REV 0 2228782
3-16 GRID
This menu graduates the channel and view axes and/or draws grid lines according to the graduations on the image
field.
Note
When displaying the different grid of graduations, first erase the displayed grid using the erase func-
tion (menu item 12), then perform the following. If not erased, a new grid is superimposed on the
old one.
1. Select menu item 13 (GRID).
2. Enter the graduations for CHANNEL and VIEW axes.
Note
For a raw data file, enter both channel and view graduations.
For a mean file, enter only channel graduation.
If the values below are entered, for example, both axes will be graduated at intervals of 50 values.
( If you magnify the image so that multiple pixels depict each channel and view, the program uses
the center pixel.)
CHANNEL =50
VIEW =50
3. Select Grid Type or Axis Type; see below.
Select ‘0:Yes’ in response to LINE?, if displaying grid type of graduation.

Select ‘1:No’ in response to LINE?, if displaying axis type of graduation.
GRID TYPE (LINE? 0:YES) AXIS TYPE (LINE? 1:NO)
Note
The graduations start from Channel=0, View=0.
Therefore, if the start position is set to Channel=101, View=101 and the graduations are set to Chan-
nel=50, View=50, for example, the graduations are displayed from Channel=150, View=150.
3–25 SYSTEM
REV 0 2228782
3-16 GRID (Continued)
FILE : SUPRAW 1
START
CHANNEL = 1
VIEW =1
RANGE
MIN = 0
MAX = 1000
MAGNIFY =1
DISPLAYED
GRID
DISPLAY SUPPORT
1. FILE SELECTION
2. START POSITION
3. RANGE
4. ROI
5. MAGNIFY
6. PROFILE (H)
7. PROFILE (V)
8. HISTOGRAM
9. NUMERICAL
10. WHERE
11. SET CURSOR
12. ERASE
13. GRID
14.
15.
Select No. = 13
CHANNEL = 50
STEP 1 STEP 2
VIEW = 50
LINE?<0:Yes, 1:No> 0 STEP 3
GRID
ILLUSTRATION 3–21
3–26 SYSTEM
REV 0 2228782

OTHERS
4-1 OFF–LINE CALIBRATION

This program makes a calibration file from raw data files acquired in off–line or on–line scans. You need the following
raw data:
AIR DATA (L) , AIR DATA (S), PHANTOM DATA (L), PHANTOM DATA (S)
(L: Large Focus, S: Small Focus)
Note
To terminate this program during execution, press the <Cancel> key to return to the Maintenance
menu.
1. This program changes the existing calibration file. Save these files to a floppy diskette before you start this pro-
gram.
2. Perform the air scans.
3. Perform the 25 cm water scans. This step should be performed after step 2.
4. Select 3 (OFF–LINE CALIBRATION).
4–1 SYSTEM
REV 0 2228782
4-1 OFF–LINE CALIBRATION (continued)

5. An example is shown below:
** OFF–LINE CALIBRATION **
-- RAW DATA FILE MENU --
AIR (L) ID No.= 00:1.1.1;1’CR’ (L: Large Focus, S: Small Focus)
AIR (S) ID No.= 00:1.1.2;1’CR’
PHANTOM (L) ID No.= 00:1.1.3;1’CR’
PHANTOM (S) ID No.= 00:1.1.4;1’CR’
PRESS <END> AFTER ENTRY

-- AIR (L/S) --
<CALIBRATION FILE MENU>
80 kV 120 kV 140 kV
FOV TH FOV TH FOV TH
1. 25 cm 10 mm
2. 25 cm 5 mm
3. 25 cm 3 mm ......
4. 25 cm 1 mm
5. 35 cm 10 mm
6. 35 cm 5 mm
7. 35 cm 3 mm
8. 35 cm 1 mm
.
.
<xx>
<xx–yy>
Select No. <xx,yy,zz>=1–4 ’CR’ (Selects the CAL files 1, 2, 3, and 4.)
4–2 SYSTEM
REV 0 2228782
4-1 OFF–LINE CALIBRATION (continued)

-- PHANTOM (L/S) --
<CALIBRATION FILE MENU>
80 kV 120 kV 140 kV
FOV TH FOV TH FOV TH
1. 25 cm 10 mm
2. 25 cm 5 mm
3. 25 cm 3 mm ......
4. 25 cm 1 mm
5. 35 cm 10 mm
6. 35 cm 5 mm
7. 35 cm 3 mm
8. 35 cm 1 mm
.
.
<xx>
<xx–yy>
Select No. <xx,yy,zz>=1–4 ’CR’
Note
If incorrect inputs were made, one of the following messages is displayed:
** INVALID ENTRY
** INVALID RAW DATA (SCOUT)
** RAW DATA NOTHING
** INVALID SCAN ROTATION
4–3 SYSTEM
REV 0 2228782
4-2 CT NUMBER ADJUST

“CT Number Adjustment” means to change a part of the CAL files with conversion coefficients called b and g so that
water and air images have CT Numbers 0 and –1000, respectively. The coefficients b and g are calculated from
scanned images of water and air.
See Section 6–6, CT Number Adjustment, of System of the Functional Check / Adjustment manual, for details.
4–4 SYSTEM
REV 0 2228782
4-3 POST RECON

This program reconstructs an image from the specified raw data on the hard disk.
1. Select 7 (POST RECON).
2. An example is shown below:
** POST RECON **
(DEFAULT=00:00000.02.01;01)
Enter Raw Data ID No.=0.1.1 ’CR’ Enter Raw Data ID No. (STUDY#.SER#.ACQ#)
to be reconstructed.
STUDY SER AQ HF TYPE STM AZM TBL THK FOV KV MA FCS DATE & TIME
0000 03 01 H CW 5.0 000 +0 10 25 120 60 1992/07/01 12:34:56
-- SCAN & RECON PARAMETER --
NO. OF IMAGE = 1
RECON MODE = STND
RECON CENTER-X = 0.0 (mm)
RECON CENTER-Y = 0.0 (mm)
RECON FOV = 25.0 (cm)
MOTION CORRECTION = OFF
WINDOW WIDTH = 0
WINDOW LEVEL = 0
ENHANCE = OFF
HF/FF = H
ORIENTATION = SP
ANATOMY = HEAD
SCAN FOV = 25.0 (cm)
THICKNESS = 10.0 (mm)
KV = 120 (kv)
Parameter OK ?<0:Yes, 1:No>0 ’CR’ Change Scan & Recon Parameters if necessary.
(DEFAULT=00000.01.01;01)
Enter Image ID No.=0.1.1;2 ‘CR’ Enter Image ID No. (STUDY#.SER#.ACQ#;IMAGE#)
Note
D The ‘NO. OF IMAGE’ parameter specifies how many images are reconstructed with the same parameters.
These reconstructed images are used to test the recon related hardware by performing subtraction to
them.
D The Image ID No. must be a new number. When the image No. already exists, Post Recon can not pro-
ceed.
During Post Reconstruction, ‘Que xx(xx)’ is displayed on the upper corner of the touch panel.
4–5 SYSTEM
REV 0 2228782
4-3 POST RECON (Continued)

3. Press the “END” key to exit.
4. To display the reconstructed image, enter the image ID No. in the Patient List Menu.
Note
When “Auto View” function is set to ON (the indication ‘V’ is displayed on the lower right corner of
the image area), the image will be automatically displayed after Post Recon is executed.
4–6 SYSTEM
REV 0 2228782
4-4 MT RECOVERY
This menu recovers MT Images which can not be retrieved due to a tape Parity Error or corrupted directory. This
program only copies MT images to the disk. To store the Images back on a magnetic tape, enter Image File
Management after finishing the MT Recovery.
Select 7 (MT RECOVERY).
*** MT RECOVERY ***

1. PARITY MT RECOVERY
2. MISS INITIALIZED MT RECOVERY
3. FILE No. ENTRY RECOVERY
1. PARITY MT RECOVERY
This menu recovers tapes with corrupted MT directories.
1. Select 1 (PARITY MT RECOVERY).

The recovery procedure is started.
Select No.=1 ’CR’

RECOVERED IMAGE ID = 00:00009.01.05:01
.
.
2. MISS INITIALIZED MT RECOVERY

Use this menu to recover an incorrectly initialized tape or the images stored after mis–initialization occurred.
In the later case, not all the images can be recovered since Image Files in the first part of MT might have been
destroyed.
1. Select 2 (MISS INITIALIZED MT RECOVERY).

The recovery procedure is started.

.
.
4–7 SYSTEM
REV 0 2228782
4-4 MT RECOVERY (Continued)
3. FILE No. ENTRY RECOVERY

This menu lets you select the images to recover.
1. Select 3 (FILE NO. ENTRY RECOVERY).
2. Input File No. to recover.

File No. 7 <XXX-XXX> 17-18 ’CR’ FILE No. : File serial No. from the head of Tape.
TOTAL RECOVERY IMAGE No.=002
File No. Input Format:
a. File No. XXX to be recovered:

File No. ? <XXX–XXX> XXX ’CR’
b. File No. 0 ~ XXX to be recovered:

File No. ? <XXX–XXX> –XXX ’CR’
c. File No. XXX ~ Last file to be recovered:

File No. ? <XXX–XXX> XXX– ’CR’
d. File No. XXX ~ YYY to be recovered:

File No. ?<XXX ~ XXX> XXX–YYY ’CR’
e. File No. 0 ~ Last file to be recovered:

File No. ? <XXX ~ XXX> - ’CR’
4–8 SYSTEM
REV 0 2228782
4-5 OD SWEEPER
Use this menu when the system displays the following messages:
D ER–440 OD Study inf. Nothing

ER–441 OD Image inf. Nothing
ER–442 OD Study inf. Incorrect
You may see these messages when someone turned OFF the system during OD operation . In this case, certain OD
information may be corrupted. The OD sweeper function tries to recover the OD from the inadvertent shut–down.
Note
D The OD sweeper function continues processing data, even if system errors occur; the OD
SWEEPER tries to recover as much data as possible.
D It is impossible to manage OD information while OD SWEEPER is operating.
D It is impossible to dismount the OD cartridge while OD SWEEPER is operating.
1. Select 8 (OD SWEEPER).

OD SWEEPER program starts and displays the following messages. OD information might be recovered auto-
matically.
** OD COHERENCE CHECK START **

** STUDY INF DELETE XX:XXXXX
** IMAGE INF DELETE XX:XXXXX,XX.XX;XX
** FILE DELETE $DMP:0. WRXXXXX.IXXXXX.VR
** STUDY INF REPAIR XX:XXXXX
** OD COHERENCE CHECK END **
4–9 SYSTEM
REV 0 2228782
4-6 OD STUDY RECOVERY

This menu can be used for restoring the Study Information destroyed by a power–down during storing images onto
the optical disk. (However, not all information can be recovered.)
Hospital Name, Patient ID and Patient Personal Data need to be entered to rebuild the Study Information.
Note
D If the original images still exist on the hard disk, it’s the best way to store the images onto the optical disk
again after running the ”OD SWEEPER” menu.
D If the maximum number of images or acquisitions in one Study on the OD is larger than that of the system,
this recovery function can not be performed.
1. Insert the optical disk cartridge to be recovered into the drive.
2. Select 9 (OD STUDY RECOVERY).

First, the program checks the OD to be recovered.
Note
If there happens to be any problem, the following message will be displayed.
D **OD NOT READY**

OD status is ”Off–line” or ”On mounting”. After checking that it is ”Mounted” on the status display, retry.
D **ILLEGAL OD*
OD is not the system OD or the scratch OD which can be recognized on this system.
D **PROTECTED OD**
OD is protected. After removing a protect label, retry.
Then the Model Number(lower 2 digits), the Machine Number and the Study Number of the Study to be recovered
is displayed.
3. Enter the complete model number (4 digits) by referring to the displayed Model No. list.
** OD STUDY RECOVERY **
Model : **0C
Machine : 1234
Study : 00053
Enter Full Model No. (4Digit) = 010C’CR’
Model No. : Model Name
0101 : CT 8600
0102 : CT 8800
.
.
.
4–10 SYSTEM
REV 0 2228782
4-6 OD STUDY RECOVERY (Continued)

4. It displays the specified Study Information. See below.
Enter the data into the blank column.
Note
Some columns have been recovered automatically by referring to the Image Information. They can
also be modified. However, It is not recommended to change the Study Number, Number of Images
and Scan Date.
5. After completing the Study Information, press the <End> key.
Study Information
Station:Study = 00:00053
Number of Images = 017
Enhance = NO C
Scan Date = 1989/10/31
Patient ID = 0425855150
Patient Name = Michael
Patient Birthday = 1962/02/05
Patient Sex = M
Patient Age = 27;08
Patient Weight = 55.0
Model Name = CT SYTEC/PROSPEED SERIES
Hospital Name = HINO HOSPITAL
OK to Recovery ? <0:Yes, 1:No> 0’CR’
6. Select ‘0:Yes’ in response to ‘OK to Recovery?’.

The OD study recovery is started and It takes several minutes to finish.
Note
If there happens to be any problem or interruption, the following message will be displayed.
D ** STUDY INF. FULL**

Study Information Area on OD is full. The study can not be recovered any longer.
D ** OD STUDY RECOVERY ERROR END**

Any error occurs during the recovery operation.
D ** OD STUDY RECOVERY CANCELLED**

The CANCEL key is pressed during the recovery operation to cancel.
7. If there is any other Study to be recovered on the same OD, it will return to Step 3.
8. When all Studies have been recovered, it will finish with the following message.
** OD STUDY RECOVERY END **
9. Now the OD is ”Off–line”. Therefore, eject the cartridge once and re–insert it to the drive to read out images from
the recovered OD.
4–11 SYSTEM
REV 0 2228782
4-7 TEMPERATURE INITIALIZE

This function sets the parameter that simulates the temperature of the x–ray tube anode and its case to the maximum
value allowed.
During (off–line) manual exposures, the service person should wait the recommended minimum time between
exposures. The CPU keeps a running tally of manual exposures, but does not calculate or impose any delays, nor
does it measure the actual heat generated in the x–ray tube.
Use this TEMPERATURE INITIALIZE function after performing off–line exposures if sufficient cooling time for the next
scans is desired.
1. Select 10 (TEMPERATURE INITIALIZE).
2. Select 0 (Yes) to set the Anode and Case Temperature to the maximum value.
** TEMPERATURE INITIALIZE **
This program will set the Anode and Case Temperature maximum.
OK? <0:Yes, 1:No>0 ’CR’
4–12 SYSTEM
REV 0 2228782
4-8 SERVICE MODE

This menu can be used to set/reset a flag for special service purposes. Currently it sets the following:
D ROI value display
– display to one decimal place (flag: OFF)
– display to two decimal places (flag: ON)
1. Select 11 (SERVICE MODE).
2. Enter 1 to set a flag or enter 0 to reset a flag.
** SERVICE MODE **
Service Mode = 0 <0: OFF, 1: ON>

New Data = _
4–13 SYSTEM
REV 0 2228782
4-9 SYSTEM PARAMETER DUMP/LOAD

This menu stores the system parameters to a floppy disk or loads them from the floppy disk to the hard disk. The
system has the following parameters:
Station Number Information
Patients Information
Series Description
Scan Parameters
...
Note
When loading system parameters to the hard disk, be sure that the parameters on the floppy disk
are of the same system, since the system parameters are unique to each system.
1. Select 12 (SYSTEM PARAMETER DUMP & LOAD).
*** SYSTEM PARAMETER DUMP & LOAD **

1. Parameter Dump to FD
2. Parameter Load from FD
0. End
Select No. = _
1. Parameter Dump to FD
1. Follow the instructions displayed on the screen:
** INSERT ’BOOT’ FD
Press <ENTR> To Continue
If you Want To Change The FD, Change Now. (Remove the BOOT floppy and
insert a floppy disk for dump.)
2. Parameter Load from FD

1. Follow the instructions displayed on the screen:
** INSERT ’BOOT’ FD
If you Want To Change The FD, Change Now. (Remove the BOOT floppy and
insert the floppy disk containing
system parameters.)
4–14 SYSTEM
REV 2 2228782
SECTION 5 – MESSAGE AND ERROR CODE LISTS
5-1 MESSAGE LIST
5-1-1 General
Display of Message
Any unusual occurrence in the system is reported to the OC Message screen. When an error occurs during normal
operation, the console [Status] key LED flashes and a ”beep” tone sounds. Press the [Status] key to view the Message
screen. The flashing LED stays steadily lit while the Message screen displays. The most recent error is listed last on
the screen. Press [Status] a second time to return to the normal display screen. (The LED turns OFF until the next
error starts it flashing –or– you press the [Status] key.)
You can press the [Status] key at any time to view the message screen. The LED stays lit until you press [Status] a
second time to toggle back to the normal display screen.
The system can store 80 lines of error messages.
5–1 SYSTEM
REV 2 2228782
5-1-1 General (continued)
Format for Message Display
*** ER–XXX HH:MM Message (32 characters) LCP=XX TN=XXXX ADD=XXXXXXXX

*1 *2 *3 *5 *6 *7
Data (56 characters)
*4
*** MS–XXX HH:MM Message (32 characters)
*1 *2 *3
Data (56 characters)
*4
*1) Error (Message) No.
*2) The time of Error (Message) generation.

(time:minute) (The actual time the Error (Message) is displayed on the screen.)
*3) Caption Message. Brief explanation of the error (Message) No.
*4) Data (Error Code, etc.)
*5) Logical CPU No. of CPU which received the Error information.
LCP NO 1 = FMP (File Processor)
3 = DMP (Scan/Display Processor)
*6) Task name associated with the Error.
*7) Address that generated the Error.
5–2 SYSTEM
REV 2 2228782
5-1-1 General (continued)
Message No. Groups

000 ~ 099 – – – Common Errors (TRAP Error, common function, etc.)
100 ~ 199 – – – Scan
200 ~ 299 – – – Reconstruction
300 ~ 399 – – – Display
400 ~ 499 – – – Image File Management
500 ~ 599 – – – Communication (Network)
600 ~ 699 – – – Multiformat Camera
700 ~ 799 – – – (reserved)
800 ~ 899 – – – (same as Message 000 ~ 099)
900 ~ 999 – – – Utility
Format for Message Lists

The following format is used to list message and error message lists in Sections
*1 *2
ER–001 System Error
XXYYZZWW *3
.
.
. *4 (Example)
.
*1) Classification of Error/Message and Message No.
*2) Caption Message
*3) Data (40 characters of upper line and 16 characters of lower line are considered as continuous.)
*4) Description
5–3 SYSTEM
REV 2 2228782
5-1-2 Message List
MS–000 Abort Button on
Abort Button has been pressed
MS–001 Start Timeout
Scan Start Timeout (Didn’t press the [Start] button in time)
MS–002 Insert KEY–FD
“Key” floppy diskette is not inserted

(Can not proceed to Maintenance Program)
MS–003 X–Ray Over Range Detect
X–Ray DATA (DAS Data) overrange
MS–004 FPU Busy
FPU is busy
MS–005 Tube Warm up End
Tube Warm up Routine has completed
MS–006 Tube Warm up Canceled
Tube Warm up routine was canceled
5–4 SYSTEM
REV 2 2228782
5-1-2 Message List (continued)
MS–007 Reconstruction’s Queue Full
Number of Queue request for priority Recon is full
MS–008 Recon Completion

XXXXX.XX.XX:XX
D Reconstruction Completed
(Informs when Auto Display mode is not selected)
D XXXXX.XX.XX:XX : Shows Image I.D
MS–009 Calibration End
Calibration Program has completed
MS–010 Calibration Canceled
Calibration routine was canceled
MS–011 Warm up Scan Set Timeout
Scan set wait for Warm up Scan Timeout (Didn’t push [Scan Set] in time)
MS–012 Data Compare Error

F:00000.01.xx V:yyyy C:zzz
Discrepancy between a transferred data and expected data during the DAS Data Transfer Test.
xx: Acquisition Number
yyyy: View Number (four digits maximum)
zzz: Channel Number (three digits maximum)
5–5 SYSTEM
REV 2 2228782
5-1-2 Message List (continued)
MS–060 Display Busy
The requested program is canceled because Display is in use.
MS–070 Image Data Full (Delete & Reset)
Reconstructed Data can not be store in Disk, for Disk is full of Image Data.
Countermeasure : Delete or Archive Image Data, and then pull Reset SW.
MS–071 Image inf. Full in Study

Study No. = XXXXX (Delete & Reset)
Reconstruction is impossible because Image Inf. of study is full.
Countermeasure : Delete unnecessary image data in study XXXXX and then pull Reset SW.
MS–072 Next Scan Preparation Time Out

Just a moment (Max. = 30 sec)
In Dynamic Scan, Scan is not completed within specified delay time.
Countermeasure : Proceed to Scan with no special operation. Push “Abort” button to stop scanning.
MS–073 Pleas delete images in Disk!

Image space in disk is less than 100 Images. We recommend you to delete Images before scan.
(Vacant Images: xxx)–(Recon Queue: yyy)=xx
The current number of vacant images (available space for new images) is less than 100. This message
appears when the “New Patient” key is pressed, if a number of vacant images (number in recon queue)
is less than 100.
MS–099 On Dynamic Scan
The current function stops for Dynamic Scan.

The function restarts after Dynamic Scan completes.
5–6 SYSTEM
REV 2 2228782
5-1-3 Error Message List
ER–001 System Error

YYXXXXXX
System failure
Error of Directive/System Subroutine etc.
YYXXXXXX : System Error Code – Section 5-2-1, For Error Message ER–001 (YY=08, 10, 18, 20, 58)
INFCTL/IMGCTL Error Code – Section 5-2-2 (YY=80, 88)
DMA Error Code – Sections 5-2-5, 5-2-6 (YY=28, A0)
DISPLAY Error Code – Section 5-2-6 (YY=30, 38, 40, 98)
(Refer to Section 5-2, Error Code List, about these Error Codes.)
ER–002 Undefined Event Received

XXXXXXXX
There was a failure in the Event Data (Communication message).
XXXXXXXX : The head 4 bytes of Event Data
(This error is a software problem indicator used by design engineering.)
ER–003 Abnormal Termination Detected

XXXXXXXX AAAA
Task was terminated abnormally.
XXXXXXXX
Refer to Section 5-2-1, For Error Messages ER–003 & 004.
AAAA : Task name which was aborted.
5–7 SYSTEM
REV 2 2228782
5-1-3 Error Message List (continued)
ER–004 Task Termination

BY BBBB XXXXXXXX
TN = AAAA CODE = YY
EDSP detected the termination of Task. This output occurs during normal or abnormal operation because
the software is written that way.
AAAA : Task name which terminated.

BBBB : Task name which terminated Task AAAA.
XXXXXXXX
Refer to Section 5-2-1, For Error Messages ER–003 & 004.
Note
The format of TN CODE is different from other formats.
YY : 01 : Normal Termination (In case of normal termination, there is another error message).
02 : Abnormal Termination.
EDSP : Error Display Task Name.
ER–099 TREND Task Error

XXXXXXXX
This Error occurred when the Error Message was about to register to Disk at TREND Task. (If the “Error”
function is called by its normal Error No., the Error could make a permanent loop and bypass the normal
path from EDSP to TREND.)
XXXXXXXX : Return Code (This code is used by design engineering.)
TREND : Trend File of Message
5–8 SYSTEM
REV 2 2228782
ER–100 Aperture Error

X
Error Code X =
1: Aperture Request Command Error

Received an undefined communication command. Check the firmware revisions on the DMP4,
OC INTF3, TGP, and OGP boards.
2: Aperture 1 mm Set Error
Check that the position of the optical switch is correct, that the spring to retract the aperture
works normally, and that nothing hinders the moving mechanism. Also check the cable
connectors for the sensors and the motor.
Check the items described above.
ER–101 Scan Error

000000XX
Error Code 0X (Helical Scan Error detected by TGP) =
1: Cradle Out of Limit

2: Cradle Unlatch
3: Cradle Slip
4: Table Stop
5: Cradle Start Position Error
6: Interval Position Error (

7: Cradle Move Timeout
9: SCINITREQ Not Come in 3 sec after Cmd Xmt at MP
A: OGP Com Not Ready in 1 sec at MP
B: TP Com Not Ready in 1 sec at MP
C: Scan Stop Req Not Come in 500 msec after Scan SW off at MP
5–9 SYSTEM
REV 2 2228782

Error Code 3X (Scout Scan Error detected by TGP) =

2: Cradle Unlatch
3: Cradle Slip
4: Fail Safe Error
5: Cradle Start Position Error
A: OGP Com Not Ready in 1 sec at MP
B: TP Com Not Ready in 1 sec at MP
C: Offset Timeout at MP
D: Scout Init Req Timeout at MP
E: Scan Timeout at MP
Error Code 4X (Helical Scan Error detected by OGP) =
1: Scan Req Command Error

2: Offset Scan Timeout
3: X–ray ON Response Timeout
4: X–ray OFF Response Timeout
5: XG Ready Response Timeout
6: DAS Trig Less or Short Width
7: DAS Trig Many or Long Width
8: Aperture Error
9: Not Gantry Initialized
A: EXPCMD ON Back Up Timer Error
B: EXPCMD Unstable
C: Scan Start Timeout
Error Code 5X (Axial Scan Error detected by OGP) =

6: DAS Trig Less or Short Width
7: DAS Trig Many or Long Width
8: Aperture Error
9: Not Gantry Initialized
B: EXPCMD Unstable
5–10 SYSTEM
REV 2 2228782

Error Code 6X (Stationary Scan Error detected by OGP) =

6: DAS Trig Short Width
7: DAS Trig Long Width
8: Aperture Error
B: EXPCMD Unstable
Error Code 7X (Scout Scan Error detected by OGP) =

6: DAS Trig Short Width
7: DAS Trig Long Width
8: Aperture Error
9: Scan Initialize Error
B: EXPCMD Unstable
5–11 SYSTEM
REV 2 2228782
ER–102 Gantry Error

0000000X
Error Code X =
1: Gantry Request Command Error

2: Gantry Set Timeout in 20 sec
3: Servo Motor Overheat
4: Servo Amp Alarm
5: Gantry is not in System Mode
6: Gantry Rotation Not Response
7: Gantry Rotation Overspeed
8: Gantry Rotation Underspeed
9: Safety Switch Open
A: Dynamic Brake ON
B: Gantry Initialize Error or Position Error
F: GNTINITREQ Timeout
ER–103 XG Processor Communication Error

0000000X
Error Code X =
1: Nack Detection or Timeout occurred three times

3: Receive Error occurred three times
4: Check Sum Error occurred three times
ER–104 OGP Event Error

0000000X
Error Code X =
1: Tube Rotor ON/OFF Timeout

2: Received no DAS Trigger at the Start of Gantry Rotation, or Received Abnormal DAS Triggers
during a scan
3: Received no GPLS2
4: System Mismatch
5–12 SYSTEM
REV 2 2228782
ER–105 Gantry Processor Communication Error

0000000X
Error Code X =
1: Nack Detected
2: Ack/Nack Timeout
ER–106 Tilt Error

0000000X
Error Code X =
1: Out of Tilt Range
ER–107 Table Error
ER–108 TGP not System
The Gantry rotation switch on the TGP board is not in the “System” position.
5–13 SYSTEM
REV 2 2228782
ER–109 Cradle Error

0000000X
Error Code X =

2: Cradle Unlatch
3: Cradle Slip Error
4: Fail Safe Error
5: Out of Scannable Range
ER–110 Scan Processor Communication Error

0000000X
Error Code X =
1: Nack Detected
2: Ack/Nack Timeout
ER–111 Table Processor Communication Error

0000000X
Error Code X =
1: Nack Detected
2: Ack/Nack Timeout
ER–112 TGP Task Time Out

000000XX
Error Code XX =
bit 0: Scan Timeout

bit 1: XG Timeout
bit 2: Aperture Timeout
bit 3: Gantry Drive Timeout
bit 4: Cradle Drive Timeout
bit 5: Tilt Mode Timeout
bit 6: Test Mode Timeout
BIT
6 5 4 3 2 1 0
5–14 X X SYSTEM
DO NOT CARE
REV 2 2228782
ER–114 Cradle is not latched
(No Error Code)
The cradle is unlatched. In other words, the latch switch is in OFF.
ER–115 TGE Response Timeout

XX
Error Code XX =
1: TGE ready wait Timeout

2: TGE new patient wait Timeout
3: TGE H/F first wait Timeout
4: TGE bui (Scan Position) wait Timeout
5: TGE scout/axial wait Timeout
6: TGE scan set wait Timeout
7: TGE scan end wait Timeout
8: TGE scan cradle stop wait Timeout
12:TGE cradle stop wait Timeout
13:TGE warm up wait Timeout
14:TGE off–line wait Timeout
15:TGE cradle stop wait Timeout
16:TGE move gantry wait Timeout
17:TGE off–line scan wait Timeout
19:TGE Scan Stop (Abort) Wait Code
20:TGE Next Scan Set OK Wait Code
21:Cradle Initialize Wait Code
(Request of acquisition of the cradle position at the time of the system power–on or reset)
22:Cradle Stop Wait Code
(Cradle Stop when the cradle is moving idly.)
5–15 SYSTEM
REV 2 2228782
ER–117 XG Error
00000XYY
Error Code X =
0: Test Mode
1: Stand–by
2: Preparation Acting
3: Generator Ready
5: Exposure
7: Transition Step to Stand–by
Error Code YY =
01:No 550 VDC

02:15V_Safe Error
03:Over Volt Capacitor
11: Rotor Controller Error
12:Rotor Acceleration Error
013: Rotor Feedback Test
014: Rotor Fault Detect Test
16:Low Current Error
18:Unbalance Error
21:Filament Overcurrent
021: Feedback Test (X=0)
22:No Filament Current
022: Fault Detection Test (X=0)
23:Bad Relay Return
023: Small Focus Test (X=0)
24:No Filament Voltage
024: Large Focus Test (X=0)
25:Filament Control Error
526: MA Measurement Error (X=5)
031: Feedback Test (X=0)
032: Fault Detection Test (X=0)
033: Close Loop Test
531: MA Accuracy Error
532: KV Accuracy Error (X=5)
533: Spit Error (X=5)
534: Exposure Backup Timer Error (X=5)
535: Anode Over mA (X=5)
536: Cathode Over mA (X=5)
537: Anode Over kV (X=5)
538: Cathode Over kV (X=5)
539: Anode Shoot–through (X=5)
5–16 SYSTEM
REV 2 2228782
540: Cathode Shoot–through (X=5)

541: Anode Overcurrent (X=5)
542: Cathode Overcurrent (X=5)
43:HV ON with No EXPCMD
544: KV Unbalanced Error (X=5)
48:Generator Safety Loop Open
49:System Safety Loop Open
50:EPRAM Test Failure
51:RAM Test Failure
052: EPRAM Write Failure
053: EEPROM Sum Error
60:Communication Error
561: No “?” Request within 150 msec during Exposure
70:Undefined Message
71:Parameters out of Range
72:Modification of Parameters is not allowed.
73:Phase Change is not allowed.
74:EXPCMD Active before receiving “X”.
81:550 VDC Timeout Error
82:EXPCMD Timeout Error
83:HV ON Timeout Error
84:HV OFF Timeout Error
5–17 SYSTEM
REV 2 2228782
ER–118 SCNCTL Sequence Error

X
(Scan Control Sequence Error)
If Error Address is:
0XXXXXXX: HV ON/OFF Sequence Error

Scan End status is received before receiving
HV ON/OFF status during scan
4XXXXXXX: Sequence Error of Sequential Scan
8XXXXXXX: Scan Sequence Error generated by Scan Task Program
ER–119 Study No. Error
(No Error Code)
The study No. is not the ASCII numeric data.
The memory might be faulty, or some program might have destroyed the data. Inspect the memory (Com-
mon memory) by the diagnostic program. If the memory is found to be normal, replace the system soft-
ware.
ER–120 Cooling Wait Too Long
(No Error Code)
The cooling wait time has elapsed for a longer time than the specified one. (when off–line scans are per-
formed)
Retry the scan with the less heavy scan technique, or retry the scan after some time (pretty long) has
passed.
ER–121 Next Scan Preparation Time Out
The Scan task did not return the SCAN COMPLETION or the next SCAN SET OK by the next scan start
time.
5–18 SYSTEM
REV 2 2228782
ER–122 X–Ray Zero Detect
(No Error Code)
Detected the zero DAS data.
The Detector might be faulty. Investigate it with the Support program.
ER–130 Comm. Write Reg. Ans. Net. Wait
(No Error Code)
Received the WRITE REGISTER ANSWER INTERRUPT back, without having requested it.
ER–131 Comm. Receive Buffer Over

X
(No Error Code)
Communication Receive Buffer over flow
ER–132 Comm. Transmit Buffer Over
(No Error Code)
Communication Transmit Buffer over flow
ER–133 Comm. Write Reg. Ans. Timeout
(No Error Code)
Communication Write Register Answer Timeout Error
Note
Communication Buffer hardware is located on OC INTERFACE Board.
5–19 SYSTEM
REV 2 2228782
ER–135 PNLCTL Sequence Error

XXXXX XXX XXX
XXXXX XXX XXX

Show Error Code Show Wait Code
(Not used)
Note
PNLCTL : PANEL CONTROL
Error Code =
1: System ready Sequence Error

2: New patient OK/NG Sequence Error
3: H/F First OK/NG Sequence Error
4: Scan Position OK/NG Sequence Error
5: Scout/Axial NG Sequence Error
6: Scan OK Sequence Error
7: Scan NG Sequence Error
8: Scan Set OK/NG Sequence Error
9: Start NG Sequence Error
10:Next Scan OK Sequence Error
11: Scan and Sequence Error
12:Scan Sequence Error
13:Scout/Axial F–on req. Sequence Error (F–On req. : Push Button Flashing Request)
16:On–line Request Sequence Error
17:Off–line Scan reg. Sequence Error
18:Warm up and Sequence Error
19:Scan abort enable OK Sequence Error
ER–136 IP Error
XX
IP: Interface Processor (on OC INTF3 board)
Error of the IP, IP’s peripheral devices, or X–ray exposure time
Error Code XX =
1: ROM Checksum Error

2: IP Internal RAM Error
3: IP External RAM Error
4: Watchdog Timer Timeout
10:Timeout of X–ray Exposure Monitor Timer
. . : Accompanying the above error (10). Time between Scan End and HV Off, expressed in eight bit
format (10.9 ms.bit).
5–20 SYSTEM
REV 2 2228782
ER–137 Audio Communication Error

XX
Autovoice function error
Error Code XX =
1: Undefined Command Code

2: The busy bit of the 6388 (Audio Processor) was expected to be “L”, but it is “H”.
3: The RP_MNT bit of the 6388 is “H”; it should be “L”.
4: The RP_MNT bit of the 6388 is “L”; it should be “H”.
5: The 6388 is in the manual control mode. (Set the CPU control mode by setting SW4–1 to OFF.)
6: The start address of the autovoice data is greater than the stop address.
7: After Dumping is complete, one or more of the 6388 status bits are “H”.
8: After Loading is complete, one or more of the 6388 status bits are “H”.
9: The LENGTH of a command is wrong.
A: Address Error during Loading or Dumping
B: An interrupt for Load or Dump request is received during other than Loading or Dumping.
C: Undefined Block No.
ER–138 TGP Communication Error

XX
Communication Error between MP (on TGP) and IP (on OC INTF3)
Error Code XX =
2: time limit expired for RCV request response of the test mode
3: wrong LENGTH value for the TGP ! IP communication data
4: wrong LENGTH value for the IP ! TGP communication data
5: wrong head information for the TGP ! IP communication data
6: received NAC, or the 100 ms time limit was exceeded three times. (Verify that J3–1 and J3–2 on
the ON INTF3 board are set to “NML”, and check the connecting cables between the TGP and
OC INTF3 boards.)
7: wrong checksum value of the TGP ! IP communication data for three successive times
10:receive error
11: full of the TGP status buffer
20:wrong checksum of the TGP ! IP communication data
5–21 SYSTEM
REV 2 2228782
ER–139 DMP4 – IP Communication Error

XX
Communication Error between DMP4 and IP (on OC INTF3)
Error Code XX =
1: received NAC or, the 100 ms time limit was exceeded three times, during the TG status
communication.
2: wrong checksum value for three successive times
3: wrong LENGTH value for the TG command
4: wrong LENGTH value for the Audio command
5: received NAC or, the 100 ms time limit was exceeded three times, during the Audio status
communication.
6: wrong mode for the Audio command
7: wrong event code for the Audio command
8: During a test the INTR3 interrupt is DISABLE or BUSY.
9: full of the TG command buffer
A: wrong scan mode in the Scan command
10:The INTR3 interrupt was not cleared within 200 ms since it was issued.
11: invalid set value of the time limit for the X–ray exposure monitor
20:IP did not receive ACK within 200 ms for the TG status communication.
21:Ip did not receive ACK within 200 ms for the MAKV status communication.
22:Ip did not receive ACK within 200 ms for the Audio status communication.
ER–140 Anode Temperatures Over

XXXX.XX
XXXX.XX : Shows Anode Temperature (Computer Simulated Value) in floating point data.
Tube Anode Temperature (Software Calculated) reached to excess value.
Note
To exit this error, retry scan sequence. (Need time). This may be caused by software Bug. The
software will be corrected in future revision.
ER–141 Case Temperature Over

XX.XXX
XXXX.XX : Shows Case Temperature (Computer Simulated Value) in floating point data
Tube Case Temperature (Software Calculated) reached to excess value.
Note
Refer to Note of ERR–140.
5–22 SYSTEM
REV 2 2228782
ER–151 Scan Timeout

XXXXXX
XXXXXX : Shows DAS DATA DMA Count in Decimal

(Shows Number of Collected data including offset data)
Shortage of DAS DATA
ER–152 Warm up Error

Please check and clean up Gantry Aperture
REF : Reference Data Error

RATE : Rate Error
HPF : High Frequency Component Error
SD: Standard Deviation Error
Aperture: Raw Data Error (Foreign matter may be present in the aperture.)
D REF
3000.0 ≤ Average of Means of Reference Channels (Ref. Ch. 1 ~ 14) ≤ 16000.0
D RATE
Mean of each channel

0.95 ≤ ≤ 1.05
Mean of each channel (acquired at last Warm up)
Mean: Ref. Ch. corrected
D HPF
HPF Mean of each channel

–0.01 ≤ ≤ 0.01
Mean of each channel (acquired at last Warm up)
Mean: Ref. Ch. corrected

HPF: High–Pass–Filtered
D SD
0 ≤ SD/Mean of each channel ≤ 0.03 SD, Mean: Ref. Ch. corrected
D Aperture
Values of each channel at quarter intervals of a scan

0.95 ≤ ≤ 1.05
Mean of each channel
Quarter interval: 270 views
5–23 SYSTEM
REV 2 2228782
ER–153 Initialize Air Data Error

XX.XXX
XXXX. : Shows kind of Error
REF : Refer to ER–152

SD: Refer to ER–152
ER–154 DBM Full
The DBM memory is full with raw data. In this case resume scan after the reconstruction is completed.
ER–160 Event Sequence Error
Error in Event Sequence of Up data, OK/NO Good, etc. by off–Line End Demand or Soft Key.
5–24 SYSTEM
REV 2 2228782
ER–160 PDC Error (For Zj–Adv, Zj only)

Code XXX, Address YYYY, Command ZZZZZZZZ
Errors related to the PDC board (Plazma Display, Touch Panel, etc.)
Error Code XXX =
100: Sequence Error at PDC

101: AGDC Preprocessor Error
102: AGDC Drawing Processor Error
103: AGDC Response Timeout
104: Illegal Filling Size at PDC
105: TPC Response Timeout
106: TPC Queuing Buffer Over
107: TPC Communication Error
108: TPC Initialize Error
109: DMP Response Timeout at PDC
110: DMP Queuing Buffer Over at PDC
111: Font Load Memory Full
112: Illegal Request Flag at PDC
113: Illegal Display Mode at PDC
114: Illegal Split Size at PDC
115: Illegal Event Length at PDC
116: Illegal Pattern No. at PDC
117: Illegal Display Code at PDC
118: Window Full at PDC
119: Illegal Display Position at PDC
120” Pattern Full at PDC
121: Split Full at PDC
122: Illegal Pattern Size at PDC
123: Illegal Pattern Position at PDC
124: Illegal Font Code at PDC
125: Illegal Plane at PDC
126: Illegal Plane No. at PDC
127: Illegal Calculation Code at PDC
128: Illegal Filling Position at PDC
129: Illegal Line Position at PDC
130: Illegal Circle Position at PDC
131: Illegal Circle Radius at PDC
132: Illegal Copy Size at PDC
133: Illegal Copy Position at PDC
134: Illegal Put Size at PDC
135: Illegal Character Position at PDC
136: Illegal Position Accessed at PDC
137: Illegal Address Accessed at PDC
138: Waveform Full at PDC
5–25 SYSTEM
REV 2 2228782

139: Illegal Cursor at PDC
140: PSC Queuing Buffer Over at PDC
141: PSC Communication Error at PDC
142: (Reserved)
143: (Reserved)
144: (Reserved)
ER–170 Data Compare Error

F:00000.01.xx V:yyyy C:zzz
Error in Test Pattern Data in DAS Data Transfer Test.

xx: Acquisition No yyyy: View No zzz: Channel No
ER–201 Recon Timeout

PPPP.SS.AA:II
PPPPP.SS.AA:II
Shows Image I.D. Number Reconstruction Timeout
ER–202 Invalid Parameter

SSSSSSSS
SSSSSSSS : Shows invalid parameter Invalid Parameter for Reconstruction
This error shows that conversion error occurs during conversation between Operator and
CPU. Suspect hardware.
5–26 SYSTEM
REV 2 2228782
ER–203 View Data Corrected

Image = xxxxx.xx.xx;xx Raw = yyyyy.yy.yy (zzzz Views)
This error shows that a DAS data transfer error (view error) is detected when reconstructing the
“xxxxx.xx.xx;xx” image from the “yyyyy.yy.yy” raw data, and that these error views (the number of
these views are shown as “zzzz” Views) are corrected.
ER–204 View Data Error Not Corrected

Image = xxxxx.xx.xx;xx Raw = yyyyy.yy.yy (zzzz Views)
This error shows that a DAS data transfer error (view error) is detected when reconstructing the
“xxxxx.xx.xx;xx” image from the “yyyyy.yy.yy” raw data, and that these error views (the number of
these views are shown as “zzzz” Views) can not be corrected.
If a raw data contains both two groups of error views; ones which can be corrected and the others can
not be corrected, the ER–204 only is displayed.
If this error occurs, usually a bad image is displayed; however, an almost good image might
be displayed, depending on the raw data.
ER–400 Duplicate Study ID Deleted

STDPTR MODNO = XXXXX MACNO = XXXXX STDNO – XXXXX
There were duplicate STUDY IDs in a STUDY POINTER area, therefore the latter study is deleted.
ER–401 No Study Inf. ID Deleted

STDPTER MODNO = XXXXX MACNO = XXXXX STDNO = XXXXX
The designated STUDY POINTER is deleted because there is no STUDY INF. corresponding to the
STUDY POINTER.
5–27 SYSTEM
REV 2 2228782
ER–402 Illegal Study Eye Catcher

STDPTR MODNO = XXXXX MACNO = XXXXX STDNO = XXXXX
The designated STUDY POINTER is deleted because EYE CATCHER of STUDY INF. differs.
ER–403 Illegal Study ID Deleted

STDPTER MODNO = XXXXX MACNO = XXXXX STDNO = XXXXX
STDPINF MODNO = XXXXX MACNO = XXXXX STDNO = XXXXX
STUDY ID of STUDY INF which is chained from STUDY POINTER was different from the STUDY POINT-
ER contents, therefore, STUDY POINTER deleted.
ER–404 Study in Old Area Deleted

STDINF MODNO = XXXXX MACNO = XXXXX STDNO = XXXXX
There was a STUDY POINTER which was chained to new STUDY INF in the old area, the designated
STUDY POINTER was deleted.
ER–405 Old Study Inf. Study Deleted

There was STUDY POINTER which was chained to old STUDY INF in the new area, therefore the desig-
nated STUDY POINTER was deleted.
ER–406 Same Area Inf. Study Deleted

STUDY POINTER which had same area was found in STUDY INF., therefore, the designated STUDY
POINTER was deleted.
ER–407 No Buffer for Image Inf.

Buffer to read IMGINF is not found.
5–28 SYSTEM
REV 2 2228782
ER–408 Image Inf. Size Over

IMGINF which should be read in Buffer is over the Buffer size.
ER–409 Illegal Image Inf Eye Catcher

EYE CATCHER of IMGINF differs, therefore the designated IMGINF was deleted.
ER–410 Illegal Study No Image Deleted

IMGINF MODNO = XXXXX MACNO = XXXXX STDNO = XXXXX
IMGINF SERNO = XX ACQNO = XX IMGNO = XX
STUDY NOs between STUDY INF and IMAGE INF differ, therefore the designated INGINF was deleted.
ER–411 Duplicate Image Inf Deleted

The Duplicate IMAGE IDs are found in IMGINF, therefore the latter was deleted.
ER–412 No Image Data Image Inf Deleted

IMAGE DATA is not found, therefore, IMGINF was deleted.
ER–413 Illegal Study ID Image Deleted

IMGPTR MODNO = XXXXX MACNO = XXXXX STDNO = XXXXX
IMGPTR SERNO = XX ACQNO = XX IMGNO = XX
IMGINF was deleted because it is different in STUDY ID of IMAGE POINTER.
5–29 SYSTEM
REV 2 2228782
ER–414 Illegal Study ID Image Deleted

IMGINF SERNO= XX ACQNO = XX IMGNO = XX
IMGINF deleted so that it is different in IMAGE ID of IMAGE POINTER.
ER–415 Same Area Image Inf. Deleted

IMGPTR SERNO = XX ACQNO = XX LMGNO = XX
Same AREA is used in IMAGE DATA therefore, the later INGINF was deleted.
ER–416 Image Data Area Size Over

The required IMAGE DATA area is larger than the available area.
ER–417 Duplicate Image Pointer Deleted

IMGINF which is means same area was found, therefore, the latter IMGINF was deleted.
ER–418 Image Pointer Area Size Over

The required IMAGE POINTER area is larger than the available area.
ER–419 Same Area Image Inf Deleted

Two IMGINF were found in the same area, therefore, the latter was deleted.
5–30 SYSTEM
REV 2 2228782
ER–420 Image Inf Area Size Over

The required IMGINF area is larger than the available area.
ER–421 No Image Inf Study Inf Deleted

STDINF which does not have IMGINF was found, therefore, the designated STDINF was deleted.
ER–422 Study Inf Area Size Over

The required STDINF area is larger than the available area. Suspect that disk is full.
ER–430 Event Code Error

XXXXXXXX
The illegal Event was received as the status of the IMAGE FILE MANAGEMENT PROCESSOR.
XX .... X: The top 4 Bytes of Event.
ER–431 Event Sequence Error

XXXXXXXX YY
The Event was received with illegal timing as the status of IMAGE FILE MANAGEMENT.
XX...X : The top 4 Bytes of Event.

YY : SEQUENCE
00 Wait status for start from DIMCTL
01 Wait status for FD CHECK
02 Wait status for FD FORMAT
03 Wait status for MT CHECK
04 Wait status for MT FORMAT
05 Wait status for temporary halt response
5–31 SYSTEM
REV 2 2228782
ER–432 Logical Error
Logic Error occurred as the status of IMAGE FILE MANAGEMENT.
ER–433 Image Already Stored

ID=XX:XXXXX.XX.XX:XX
This Image already stored on MT. or FD. (Discovered while trying to store this image)
ER–434 Image Already Exist

ID = XX:XXXXX.XX.XX:XX
This Image already exists. (Discovered while trying to retrieve this image)
ER–435 Image Not Found

Couldn’t find this image during store or retrieve to requested Disk or Device.
ER–436 Image in Scan Study, No Load

Cannot retrieve this Image Study # because the current scanning Study has the same number.
ER–437 OD Study Incorrect, No Store

Either only Study Inf. or only Image Inf. exists in the Study when storing to OD. So, impossible to store.
Q:No image data exists for this Study or Image – only information???
Countermeasure : Perform OD sweeper in Maintenance Program.
5–32 SYSTEM
REV 2 2228782
ER–438 ID Max Over
(No Error Code)
The Image is NOT stored because the ID, listed–up in store, exceeds maximum value of acquisition num-
bers of the media.
ER–439 Image Number Max Over
(No Error Code)
This message appears when number of images in one study exceed the capacity of the system or MOD.
ER–440 OD Study Inf Nothing

MODNO = XXXXX MACNO = XXXXX STDNO = XXXXX
Image inf. File of the study exists, but the OD cannot find corresponding image data, so it cannot retrieve
the data.
ER–441 OD Image Inf. Nothing

The Study exists in OD, but the Image Inf. File of the Study does not exist in OD. So, impossible to access
the Study.
ER–442 OD Study Inf. Incorrect

NO. OF IMAGES IN STUDY INF = XXX
NO. OF IMAGES IN IMAGE INF. FILE = XXX
The Number of Images in Study Inf. differs from the actual number of Inf. in Image Inf. File in OD. It is
possible to display, but impossible to write.
5–33 SYSTEM
REV 2 2228782
5-2 ERROR CODE LIST
Format for Error Code
XX : Request directive number

X X Y Y Z Z YY : Target CPU Number 01: FMP
03: DMP
04: DC
ZZ : Error Code
00001000 : DIRECTIVE ERROR 08XXYYZZ

01011000 : DIRECTIVE ERROR 58XXYYZZ
Refer to Section 5-2-1, System Error Code, Abort Code
00010000 : IOS ERROR 100000ZZ
00011000 : FHS ERROR 180000ZZ
00101000 : DMA ERROR 280000ZZ – Refer to Section 5-2-5, DMA Error Code
10000000 : INFCTL ERROR 800000ZZ
Refer to Section 5-2-2, INFCTL/IMGCTL Error Code.
10001000 : IMGCTL ERROR 880000ZZ
5–34 SYSTEM
REV 2 2228782
5-2-1 System Error Code, Abort Code
For Error Message ER–001
***************************************************************************
* SYSTEM ERROR CODE (GENERATED BY OS) *
* *
***************************************************************************
08XX00ZZ
08010003 NONEXISTENT TARGET TASK

08010005 SEGMENT TABLE FULL
08010006 DUPLICATE SEGMENT NAME
08010008 INSUFFICIENT MEMORY
0801000A NON–DORMANT TARGET TASK
0801000B LOGICAL ADDRESS CONFLICT
08020003 NONEXISTENT TARGET TASK
08020007 NONEXISTENT SEGMENT NAME
0802000A NON–DORMANT TARGET TASK
08040005 SEGMENT TABLE FULL
08040006 DUPLICATE SEGMENT NAME
08040007 NONEXISTENT SEGMENT NAME
0804000B LOGICAL ADDRESS CONFLICT
08060003 SOURCE TASK NOT FOUND
08060007 DESTINATION TASK NOT FOUND
08060009 USER TO SYSTEM TASK NOT ALLOWED
0806000B ADDRESSES DIFFERENT EVEN/ODD BOUNDARY
08090003 TARGET TASK NOT FOUND
080B0006 DUPLICATE TASK NAME
080B0008 INSUFFICIENT MEMORY
080D0003 TASK DOES NOT EXIST
080D0023 TASK DOES NOT EXIST
080D000A TASK NOT DORMANT
08100003 TARGET TASK DOES NOT EXIST
08100006 TARGET TASK ALREADY IN TERMINATION
08100009 USER TASK CAN NOT TERMINATE SYSTEM TASK OR SELF
0817000A TASK IS TERMINATING
08190006 TARGET TASK ALREADY STOPPED
08190009 USER TASK CAN NOT STOP SYSTEM TASK
5–35 SYSTEM
REV 2 2228782
5-2-1 System Error Code, Abort Code (continued)
***************************************************************************
* *
***************************************************************************
08XX00ZZ
083A0001 UNDEFINED XI/O

083A0002 UNIMPLEMENTED I/O
083A0003 TASK NOT–EXISTED
083A0008 UNDEFINED I/O
083A0009 MULTIPLE ASSIGN
083AFF81 CLOSE ERROR
083AFF82 ALLOCATE ERROR
***************************************************************************
* *
***************************************************************************
100000ZZ
1000000C INSUFFICIENT SYSTEM SPACE

10000020 CFMS CPU TIME OUT
10000021 CFMS CPU FAIL
10000022 CFMS LU SPACE FULL
10000082 INVALID FUNCTION
10000083 INVALID LOGICAL UNIT
10000084 INVALID DATA BUFFER
10000085 INVALID RANDOM RECORD
10000086 INVALID PARAM BLOCK ADDRESS
10000087 PROTECT CODE ERROR
100000C1 BUFFER OVERFLOW
100000C2 END OF FILE
100000C3 END OF VOLUME
100000C4 INVALID OR EMPTY FAB
100000C5 INVALID TRANSFER FOR DEVICE
100000C6 BREAK CONDITION
100000C7 INTERNAL IO ERROR
100000C8 FAB/DATA BLOCK CONFLICT
100000C9 RECORD DOES NOT EXIST
100000CA RECORD ALREADY EXISTS
100000CB RECORD OVERFLOW/TOO MANY RECORDS IN DATA BLOCK
100000CC KEY ERROR, FAB KEY CONFLICT
100000CD DISK SPACE FULL
100000D1 UNRECOVERABLE DEVICE ERROR
100000D2 DATA COMPARE ERROR
100000D3 SECTOR PROTECT ERROR
5–36 SYSTEM
REV 2 2228782
***************************************************************************
* *
***************************************************************************
100000ZZ
100000E1 DEVICE NOT READY

100000E2 DEVICE BUSY
100000E3 DATA CRC ERROR
100000E4 WRITE PROTECTED DEVICE
100000E5 DELETED DATA MARK DETECTED
100000E6 TIMEOUT
100000E7 INVALID SECTOR ADDRESS
100000E8 CHECKSUM ERROR
100000E9 DISK RESTORE ERROR
100000EA DATA OVERRUN
100000EB DEVICE STATUS CHANGED
100000EC TRACK/SECTOR ID NOT FOUND
100000ED ADDRESS MARK CRC ERROR
100000EE SEEK ERROR
100000EF BAD SECTOR
100000F1 CHANNEL BUSY
100000F2 CHANNEL DMA ERROR
100000F3 CHANNEL UNRECOVERABLE CHANNEL ERROR
100000F4 CONTROLLER ERROR
100000F5 DEVICE CONFIGURATION ERROR
100000F6 DMA BUS ERROR
100000F7 DMA MAPPING ERROR
100000F8 DMA CONTROLLER ERROR
For MT
10000088 INVALID BLOCK LENGTH
10000091 TAPE MISMATCH (800/1600 BPI)
10000092 FILE NOT FOUND (MT)
10000093 REJECTED BY MT
10000094 DATA SHORT 0 (MT BLOCK READ)
10000095 LOST DATA 0
10000096 ERROR CORRECTED (MT WRITE)
10000097 I/O ERROR (MT DIRECTIVE)
10000098 I/O ERROR (MT PACKET)
10000099 INCONSISTENCY OF WRITING TYPE (MT)
1000009A FILE MARK ERROR (MT)
100000C6 INTERNAL ERROR
100000C9 BLOCK DOESN’T EXIST
100000CD INSUFFICIENT TAPE SPACE
5–37 SYSTEM
REV 2 2228782
***************************************************************************
* *
***************************************************************************
For OD
100000A0 INVALID COMMAND
100000A1 PBN NOT FOUND
100000A2 UNWRITTEN (READ)
100000A3 DELETED (READ)
100000A4 OVER WRITE (WRITE)
100000A5 ALTERNATE TRACK FULL (WRITE)
100000A7 DON’T SEARCH UNWRITTEN
100000A8 BUS ERROR
100000A9 BUS TIME OUT
100000AA DVC TIME OUT
100000AB GPIB COMMUNICATION ERROR
100000AC DISK PERMANENT ERROR (READ)
100000AD DISK PERMANENT ERROR (WRITE)
100000AE DRIVE ERROR
100000AF ODC ERROR
180000ZZ
18000002 INVALID COMMAND

18000003 INVALID LOGICAL UNIT
18000004 INVALID OR NONEXISTENT VOLUME
18000005 DUPLICATE FILE NAME
18000006 FILE DESCRIPTOR ERROR
18000007 PROTECT CODE ERROR
18000008 RECORD LENGTH ERROR
18000009 SHARED SEGMENT ERROR
1800000A INSUFFICIENT DIRECTORY SPACE
1800000B ACCESS PERMISSION ERROR
1800000C INSUFFICIENT SYSTEM SPACE
1800000D ASSIGNMENT ERROR
1800000E INVALID DEVICE DEVICE TYPE
1800000F BUFFER OVERFLOW
18000010 INVALID TASK NAME
18000011 INVALID BUFFER ADDRESS
18000012 INVALID FILE TYPE
18000013 INTERNAL FHS ERROR
18000014 INVALID PARAM BLOCK ADDRESS
18000015 DATA BLOCK LENGTH ERROR
18000016 SIZE ERROR
18000017 NONEXISTENT FILE NAME
18000019 KEY LENGTH ERROR
1800001A FAB LENGTH ERROR
5–38 SYSTEM
REV 2 2228782
***************************************************************************
* *
***************************************************************************
180000ZZ
1800001B DEFAULT VOLUME NOT DEFINED

1800001C INVALID STATE FOR COMMAND
1800001D USER NOT OWNER OR ADMINISTRATOR
18000020 CFMS CPU TIME OUT
18000021 CFMS CPU FAIL
18000022 CFMS LU SPACE FULL
180000CD DISK SPACE FULL
180000D1 UNRECOVERABLE DEVICE ERROR
180000D2 DATA COMPARE ERROR
180000D3 SECTOR PROTECT ERROR
180000E1 DEVICE NOT READY
180000E2 DEVICE BUSY
180000E3 DATA CRC ERROR
180000E4 WRITE PROTECTED DEVICE
180000E5 DELETED DATA MARK DETECTED
180000E6 TIMEOUT
180000E7 INVALID SECTOR ADDRESS
180000E8 CHECKSUM ERROR
180000E9 DISK RESTORE ERROR
180000EA DATA OVERRUN
180000EB DEVICE STATUS CHANGED
180000EC TRACK/SECTOR ID NOT FOUND
180000ED ADDRESS MARK CRC ERROR
180000EE SEEK ERROR
180000EF BAD SECTOR
180000F1 CHANNEL BUSY
180000F2 CHANNEL DMA ERROR
180000F3 UNRECOVERABLE CHANNEL ERROR
180000F4 CONTROLLER ERROR
180000F5 DEVICE CONFIGURATION ERROR
180000F6 DMA BUS ERROR
180000F7 DMA MAPPING ERROR
180000F8 DMA CONTROLLER ERROR
200000ZZ
20000001 UNDEFINED DIRECTIVE

20000012 OUT OF SEGMENT AREA
20000013 FILE IS NOT A LOAD FILE
5–39 SYSTEM
REV 2 2228782
***************************************************************************
* *
***************************************************************************
53XXYYZZ
5314YY30 TARGET CPU HALT

5314YY31 TARGET CPU NONEXISTENT
5323YY30 TARGET CPU HALT
5323YY31 TARGET CPU NONEXISTENT
(FILE PROCESSOR)
YY : LOGICAL CPU NO. 01: FMP
03: DMP (SCAN /DISPLAY PROCESSOR)
04: DC (DISPLAY PROCESSOR)
For Error Messages ER–003 & ER–004
***************************************************************************
* TERMINATION CODE (GENERATED BY EXEC) *
* *
***************************************************************************
XXXX = 8010 BUS ERROR

8011 ADDRESS ERROR
8012 ILLEGAL INSTRUCTION
8013 ZERO DIVIDE
8014 CHK INSTRUCTION
8015 TRAP INSTRUCTION
8016 PRIVILEGE INSTRUCTION
8017 UNIMPLEMENTED INSTRUCTION (‘1010’)
8018 UNIMPLEMENTED INSTRUCTION (‘1010’)
5–40 SYSTEM
REV 2 2228782
5-2-2 INFCTL/IMGCTL Error Code
TABLE 5–1
SCGTADSZ ERROR
CODE (ZZ) DESCRIPTION
A1 Error of GETADC or GETADA
A2 The number of arrangements of STUDY INFORMATION is less than the number in SYSTEM
CONSTANT. (DISK)
A3 The number of arrangements of IMAGE INFORMATION is less than the number in SYSTEM
CONSTANT.
A4 The number of arrangements of IMAGE INFORMATION is 0.
A5 The number of IMAGE DATA FILE BLOCK is less that the number in SYSTEM WORK.
A6 IMAGE INFORMATION BUFFER is smaller than all IMAGE INFORMATION SIZE in 1 STUDY.
A7 The number of arrangements of STUDY INFORMATION is less than the number in SYSTEM
CONSTANT. (OD)
5–41 SYSTEM
REV 2 2228782
5-2-2 INFCTL/IMGCTL Error Code (continued)
TABLE 5–2
INFCTL/IMGCTL ERROR CODE – ALLOCATE
00 The designated Study was already registered.
01 The designated Study does not exist.
02 The designated Image was already registered.
03 Image No. Deciding Error.
04 Study Area full.
05 Image INF Block full.
06 The Area in Image File full.
07 Image File full.
08 There is no space in Image INF BUFFER.
09 The size of Image INF is too big.
0A Study INF Initial Value Error.
0B Image INF Initial Value Error.
0C The designated Image doesn’t exist.
0D Number Full (SER, ACQ, IMG)
0E N/A
0F N/A
10 OD Off line
11 OD Protected
12 Impossible to Allocate for Illegal Form of STUDY, IMAGE INF.
5–42 SYSTEM
REV 2 2228782
TABLE 5–3
INFCTL/IMGCTL ERROR CODE – DELETE
20 The designated Study does not exist.
21 There is no specified Study. It is not deleted.
22 There was not enough in the specified Study.
23 There is no specified Image. It is not deleted.
24 There was not enough in specified Image.
26 The reading size of Image INF is too big.
27 N/A
28 Impossible to delete for all of the appointed study are protected from Delete.
29 Impossible to delete for some of the appointed study are protected from Delete.
2A Impossible to delete for the study of the appointed Image is protected from delete.
2B N/A
2C N/A
2D N/A
2E N/A
2F N/A
30 OD Off line
31 OD Protected
32 Impossible to delete for Illegal Form of STUDY, IMAGE INF.
5–43 SYSTEM
REV 2 2228782
TABLE 5–4
INFCTL/IMGCTL ERROR CODE – GET/PUT
40 There is no designated Study.
41 There is no pertinent Image.
43 The reading size of Image INF is too big.
44 Access is out of Image Area.
45
46
47
48
49
4A
4B
4C
4D
4E
4F
50 OD Off line
51 OD Protected
52 Impossible to read/write for Illegal Form of OD STUDY, IMAGE INF.
5–44 SYSTEM
REV 2 2228782
TABLE 5–5
INFCTL/IMGCTL ERROR CODE – PARAMETER ERROR
C0 Function No. Error
C1 Station No. Error (It is impossible to change to Model/Machine No.)
C2 Study No. Error (except for the numeric data)
C3 Series No. Error (except for the numeric data)
C4 ACQ No. Error (except for the numeric data)
C5 IMG No. Error (except for the numeric data)
C6 There is no STD in STD INF which is ready.
C7 There is no IMG in IMG INF which is ready.
C8 The number of Image INF Block is except for 1 or 2.
C9 The number of Image INF Block is less than 0.
CA The number of List is less than 0.
CB Completion Type Error.
CC Flag Error (Mode etc.)
CD It is not Old in spite of the other machine.
CE Search Mode is 0 and Model/Machine No. is 1.
CF Image size is 0.
5–45 SYSTEM
REV 2 2228782
TABLE 5–6
INFCTL/IMGCTL ERROR CODE – LOGIC ERROR OF INFCTL/IMGCTL
E0 Event Code Error
E1 Sub Code Error
E2 This was already registered during Study INF Allocate.
E3 This was already registered during Allocate in Image INF File.
E4
E5 LOWER ORDER is not deleted during Study Pointer Delete.
E6 LOWER ORDER is not deleted during Study INF Delete.
E7 LOWER ORDER is not deleted during Image INF Delete.
E8 SCBITOPR Error during Study INF Delete.
E9 SCBITOPR Error during Delete in Image INF File.
EA SCBITOPR Error during Image PTR/File Delete.
EB The area in Image INF File full.
EC This was already registered during Image INF Allocate.
ED Scan or Load is different from the position in File during Image INF Allocate.
EE
EF
5–46 SYSTEM
REV 2 2228782
5-2-3 Display Error Code

980000XX (User/Prime Display Function)
30YY00XX (PLNCTL)
38YY00XX (KBDRV)
40YY00XX (DPDRV)
100000XX (Connected with WTTY)
**YY00XX (Basic Graphic)
TABLE 5–7
DISPLAY ERROR CODE
xx DESCRIPTION TASK NAME
50 Directive No. Error

51 Odd Parameter Address
52
53 Invalid Request
54
55
56 Invalid Parameter (W/L Control)
57 Invalid Parameter (Frame Setting)
58 Invalid Parameter (Frame Data)
59 Invalid Parameter (W/L)
5A Invalid Parameter (Identify)
5B Invalid Parameter ()
5C Invalid Parameter (Image Display)
5D Invalid Parameter (Image Data Read)
5E
5F
DPDRV
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68 Time Out (Image Display)
69 Time Out (Graphic Cursor)
6A Time Out (W/L Processing)
6B
6C
6D
6E
6F Graphic Sequence Error
(Continued)
5–47 SYSTEM
REV 2 2228782
5-2-3 Display Error Code (continued)
TABLE 5–7 (continued)

DISPLAY ERROR CODE

71 Odd Parameter Address
72 Device No. Error
73 Invalid Request
74
75
76 Invalid Parameter (Erase Processing)
77 Invalid Parameter (Graphic DMA)
78 Invalid Parameter (Screen Save)
79 Invalid Parameter (Overlay Display)
7A Invalid Parameter (Graphic Cursor)
7B Invalid Parameter ( Report Cursor)
7C Invalid Parameter (LED/Buzzer)
7D
7E
7F
80 Time Out (Erase Processing) PLNCTL
81 Time Out (Graphic DMA)
82 Time Out (Screen Save–overlay)
83 Time Out (Screen Save–Image)
84 Time Out (Graphic Cursor)
85
86
87
88
89
8A
8B
8C
8D
8E ACRTC Command Error
8F Graphic Sequence Error
91 Invalid Parameter Block Address
92 Invalid Parameter
93 Invalid Request
94 Can’t requested Command
95 Invalid No. of Characters
96
97 KBDRY
98 Key Board not allocated
99 Channel Busy
9A Response Time Out
9B
9C Hardware Error
9D
9E
9F
(Continued)
5–48 SYSTEM
REV 2 2228782

DISPLAY ERROR CODE
A1 Invalid Parameter
A2 Not Defined Area
A3 Duplicate Define
A4 Value Not Defined
A5 Invalid Area Position
A6 Invalid Area Size
A7 User/Prime
A8 Display Func
A9
AA DCB Graphic Flag Double Assigned
AB
AC
AD
AE
AF
B0
B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6
B7 Read Event Flag Error WTTY
B8 Event Status Error
B9 Event Busy Error
BA Not Enable Mag. Character Error
BB Cancel Flag Error
BC Over Split Over Error
BD Not Split Device Error
BE Over line Error
BF Invalid Parameter Error
C0 Write FIFO Empty Time Out Error
C1 Write FIFO Ready Time Out Error
C2 Read FIFO Ready Time Out Error
C3 Read FIFO Empty Time Out Error
C4
C5 Command End Time Out Error
C6
C7 Basic
C8 Command Error Graphic
C9
CA
CB
CC
CD
CE
CF
(Continued)
5–49 SYSTEM
REV 2 2228782

DISPLAY ERROR CODE
D0
D1 Configuration Error
D2 Operation Timing Error
D3
D4 Address Error
D5
D6
D7
D8 Bus Error
D9
DA
DB
DC Count Error
DD
DE
DF
E0 Abort
E1 Software Abort
E2
E3
E4
E5
E6
E7
E8 DMAC Ready Time Out Error Basic
E9 Graphic
EA
EB
EC
ED
EE
EF
F0 Time Out Error
F1
F2 Can’t Display During Horizontal Blanking
F3
F4 Can’t Refresh DRAM During Horizontal Blanking
F5
F6
F7
F8
F9
FA
FB
FC
FD
FE
FF Invalid Parameter Error
5–50 SYSTEM
REV 2 2228782
TABLE 5–8
DISPLAY ERROR CODE – 48YY00XX (IMAGE DATA UNPACK)
xx DESCRIPTION

02 Odd parameter Address
03 Unpack Task is Busy
04 Unpack Task is not Busy
10 Odd Information Block Address
11 Invalid parameter
20 Not Same Task
(Different Task from Request one confirms completion of Unpack.)
TABLE 5–9
DISPLAY ERROR CODE – 5000XXXX (IMAGE INFORMATION)
xx DESCRIPTION
00F0 Image Type is not Supported

00F1 Display Task is Busy
00F2 Invalid file Name
80YY Task abort (Refer to System Error Code)
TABLE 5–10
DISPLAY ERROR CODE – A8000XXX (SPECIAL ERROR)
xxx DESCRIPTION
001 Internal logic error ( IFM Display Error)

002 GETS error ( IMF Display Error)
003 Internal logic error ( IMF Display Error)
201 OD error ( OD Error)
202 Bit map oversize ( OD Error)
300 Not initialized ( OD Error)
301 Different volume name ( OD Error)
302 Not initialized ( OD Error)
303 Different family name ( OD Error)
010 No station space ( INFCTL Error)
100 System sequence error ( INFCTL Error)
5–51 SYSTEM
REV 2 2228782
5-2-4 FPU (FPJOIN) Error Code

00000000 Normal Completion
08UUYYZZ Trap 1 ERROR
90000001 PINT (FPU ” CPU Interrupt)
90000002 RESET
90000003 INVALID PARAMETER
90000004 TIME OUT
90000005 BUSY (FPU RUNNING)
90000006 BUSY (FPU INITIALIZING)
90000007 ILLEGAL (Error Occurred in FPU)
90000008
90000009 RESET ERROR (CAN NOT RESET)
9000000A
9000000B INTERRUPT OVER (Interrupt Buffer Overflow)
9000000C The IPU is not idling.
9000000D
9000000E
9000000F
900000FF A non–Qj function was cancelled.
5–52 SYSTEM
REV 2 2228782
5-2-5 DMA Error Code
TABLE 5–11
DMA ERROR CODE
00000000 Normal Completion
28XX0001 Directive No. remains undecided
28XX0002 Invalid Parameter Block Address
28XX0003 Invalid direction Code
28XX0004 Invalid memory address
28XX0005 Invalid Data Size
28XX0006 Invalid CPU number
28XX0080 Channel Busy
28XX0081 Configuration Error
28XX0082 Operation Timing Error
28XX0083 Reserved
28XX0084 Address Error
28XX0088 Bus Error
28XX0089 Bus Error
28XX008A Bus Error
28XX008B Bus Error
28XX008C Count Error
28XX008D Count Error
28XX008E Count Error
28XX008F Count Error
28XX0090 External Compulsory Stop
28XX0091 Soft ware Compulsory Stop
28XX00A0 Time Out
Note: XX is Directive number.
5–53 SYSTEM
REV 2 2228782
5-2-6 RAWCTL Error Code

00000000 No Error
A0000001 I. D No. Error
A0000002 Not Valid
A0000003 Transfer Byte Error
A0000004 Sub Code Error
A0000005 Size Error
A0000006 Can not Reserve
5–54 SYSTEM
REV 2 2228782
5-2-7 Ethernet Error Code
The following error codes are displayed for systems with the ETC board.
TABLE 5–12
ETHERNET ERROR CODE – I
Code Description
0001 Task ID error.
0002 Can not keep TCB (Task control block).
0003 Can not keep memory.
0004 Memory block does not exist.
0005 Mail box is in use.
0006 Can not send designated message.
0007 Buffer full.
0008 Abnormal waiting for character entry.
0009 Abnormal system call
000A Time out.
000B Message is not received.
000C Queue ID error.
000D Queue full.
000E Non–existent designated memory partition.
000F Fatal initialized error occurred.
0010 Character is not entered.
0011 Abnormal configuration parameter OS.
0012 Abnormal parameter when creating or expanding memory
partition.
0020 Component vector is not assigned.
0021 Undecided component assigned.
0022 Undecided operation code assigned.
0030 Control block does not exist.
0031 Event flag or semaphore ID error.
0032 Task is waiting for event flag or semaphore
0033 Event flag or semaphore deleted.
0034 Event flag or semaphore doubled.
5–55 SYSTEM
REV 2 2228782
5-2-7 Ethernet Error Code (continued)

Code Description
0A01 Abnormal owner.
0A03 Designated process does not exist.
0A06 Designated device or address does not exist.
0A0D Abnormal access mode.
0A11 File is already existed.
0A16 Abnormal parameter.
0A18 Too many files opened.
0A20 Connection destroyed.
0A23 Designated operation blocked.
0A24 Designated operation is now run.
0A25 Designated operation is already run.
0A26 Socket operation is run.
0A27 Destination address does not exist.
0A28 Too long message.
0A29 Abnormal protocol for socket.
0A2A Invalid designated protocol.
0A2B Designated protocol is not supported.
0A2D Designated operation is not supported in socket.
0A2F Designated address family is not supported.
0A30 Designated address is busy.
0A31 Can not assign designated address.
0A32 Network is down.
0A33 Can not connect network due to abnormal AUI cable and ETC.
0A35 Software disconnects network.
0A36 Connection is reset.
0A37 No buffer space.
0A38 Designated socket is busy.
0A39 Designated socket is not connected.
0A3C Connection time out.
0A3D Connection rejected.
5–56 SYSTEM
REV 2 2228782

Code Description
0A40 Satellite down.
0A41 No satellite connection.
0A50 Abnormal configuration parameter.
0A51 Insufficient local memory space.
0A52 Can not keep ARP table.
0A53 Designated satellite is not registered.
0A54 Abnormal internet address.
0A55 Abnormal network setting for internet address.
0A56 Insufficient global memory space.
0A57 Abnormal configuration parameter.
0A58 Faulty Lock
0A59 No CDT
0A5A PANIC (in – in_control)
0A5B PANIC (icmp – icmp_error)
0A5C PANIC (icmp – length)
0A5D PANIC (ip – init)
0A5E PANIC (raw – user req)
0A5F PANIC (route – free)
5–57 SYSTEM
REV 2 2228782

Code Description
0A60 PANIC (tcp – pull oob)
0A61 PANIC (tcp – output)
0A62 PANIC (tcp – output REXMT)
0A63 PANIC (tcp – user req)
0A64 PANIC (udp – user req)
0A65 PANIC (m_get)
0A66 PANIC (m_free)
0A67 PANIC (m_copy)
0A68 PANIC (m_copy)
0A69 PANIC (m_copy)
0A6A PANIC (sofree)
0A6B PANIC (soclose)
0A6C PANIC (soaccept)
0A6D PANIC (sorecv)
0A6E PANIC (sorecv)
0A6F PANIC (sorecv)
0A70 PANIC (sorecv)
0A71 PANIC (soisconnected)
0A72 PANIC (sbappendrights)
0A73 PANIC (sbflush)
0A74 PANIC (sbflush)
0A75 PANIC (sbdrop)
0A76 PANIC (accept)
0A77 PANIC (arp – no free entry)
5–58 SYSTEM
REV 2 2228782

The following table lists the error codes generated by the ethernet board driver.
Error Code General Form
XXYZ
Y: Operation Code
XX: Task ID Z: Error Code
F0: System Bus Driver

F1: Ethernet Driver
F2: Modem Driver
F9: Interface Manager on CPU board
FA: Interface Manager on Ethernet board
FB: Program Loader (not defined)
TABLE 5–13
ETHERNET ERROR CODE – II
Code Description
F001 (Memory Space) Table full
F002 (Memory Space) Busy
F003 (Memory Space) Abnormal pattern
F004 (Memory Space) Over range
F006 (Memory Space) Request doubled
F007 (Memory Space) Abnormal designated address
F008 (Memory Space) Not found
F00C (Memory Space) Retry counts over specifications
F00D (Memory Space) Failed
F00E (Memory Space) Not supported
F00F (Memory Space) Not ready
F011 (Packet transmission) Table full
F012 (Packet transmission) Busy
F013 (Packet transmission) Abnormal pattern
F014 (Packet transmission) Over range
F016 (Packet transmission) Request doubled
F017 (Packet transmission) Abnormal designated address
F018 (Packet transmission) Not found
F01C (Packet transmission) Retry counts over specifications
F01D (Packet transmission) Failed
F01E (Packet transmission) Not supported
5–59 SYSTEM
REV 2 2228782

Code Description
F01F (Packet transmission) Not ready
F021 (Packet reception) Table full
F022 (Packet reception) Busy
F023 (Packet reception) Abnormal pattern
F024 (Packet reception) Over range
F026 (Packet reception) Request doubled
F027 (Packet reception) Abnormal designated address
F028 (Packet reception) Not found
F02C (Packet reception) Retry counts over specifications
F02D (Packet reception) Failed
F02E (Packet reception) Not supported
F02F (Packet reception) Not ready
F041 (CPU Board) Table full
F042 (CPU Board) Busy
F043 (CPU Board) Abnormal pattern
F044 (CPU Board) Over range
F046 (CPU Board) Request doubled
F047 (CPU Board) Abnormal designated address
F048 (CPU Board) Not found
F04C (CPU Board) Retry counts over specifications
F04D (CPU Board) Failed
F04E (CPU Board) Not supported
F04F (CPU Board) Not ready
F051 (Packet switching itself) Table full
F052 (Packet switching itself) Busy
F053 (Packet switching itself) Abnormal pattern
F054 (Packet switching itself) Over range
F056 (Packet switching itself) Request doubled
F057 (Packet switching itself) Abnormal designated address
F058 (Packet switching itself) Not found
F05C (Packet switching itself) Retry counts over specifications
F05D (Packet switching itself) Failed
F05E (Packet switching itself) Not supported
F05F (Packet switching itself) Not ready
5–60 SYSTEM
REV 2 2228782

Code Description
F101 (Initialization) Table full
F102 (Initialization) Busy
F103 (Initialization) Abnormal pattern
F104 (Initialization) Over range
F106 (Initialization) Request doubled
F107 (Initialization) Abnormal designated address
F108 (Initialization) Not found
F10C (Initialization) Retry counts over specifications
F10D (Initialization) Failed
F10E (Initialization) Not supported
F10F (Initialization) Not ready
F111 (Transmission) Table full
F112 (Transmission) Busy
F113 (Transmission) Abnormal pattern
F114 (Transmission) Over range
F116 (Transmission) Request doubled
F117 (Transmission) Abnormal designated address
F118 (Transmission) Not found
F11C (Transmission) Retry counts over specifications
F11D (Transmission) Failed
F11E (Transmission) Not supported
F11F (Transmission) Not ready
F121 (Reception) Table full
F122 (Reception) Busy
F123 (Reception) Abnormal pattern
F124 (Reception) Over range
F126 (Reception) Request doubled
F127 (Reception) Abnormal designated address
F128 (Reception) Not found
F12C (Reception) Retry counts over specifications
F12D (Reception) Failed
F12E (Reception) Not supported
F12F (Reception) Not ready
5–61 SYSTEM
REV 2 2228782

Code Description
F201 (Initialization) Table full
F202 (Initialization) Busy
F203 (Initialization) Abnormal pattern
F204 (Initialization) Over range
F206 (Initialization) Request doubled
F207 (Initialization) Abnormal designated address
F208 (Initialization) Not found
F20C (Initialization) Retry counts over specifications
F20D (Initialization) Failed
F20E (Initialization) Not supported
F20F (Initialization) Not ready
F211 (Transmission) Table full
F212 (Transmission) Busy
F213 (Transmission) Abnormal pattern
F214 (Transmission) Over range
F216 (Transmission) Request doubled
F217 (Transmission) Abnormal designated address
F218 (Transmission) Not found
F21C (Transmission) Retry counts over specifications
F21D (Transmission) Failed
F21E (Transmission) Not supported
F21F (Transmission) Not ready
F221 (Reception) Table full
F222 (Reception) Busy
F223 (Reception) Abnormal pattern
F224 (Reception) Over range
F226 (Reception) Request doubled
F227 (Reception) Abnormal designated address
F228 (Reception) Not found
F22C (Reception) Retry counts over specifications
F22D (Reception) Failed
F22E (Reception) Not supported
F22F (Reception) Not ready
5–62 SYSTEM
REV 2 2228782

Code Description
F911 (Initialization of Ethernet board) Table full
F912 (Initialization of Ethernet board) Busy
F913 (Initialization of Ethernet board) Abnormal pattern
F914 (Initialization of Ethernet board) Over range
F916 (Initialization of Ethernet board) Request doubled
F917 (Initialization of Ethernet board) Abnormal designated address
F918 (Initialization of Ethernet board) Not found
F91C (Initialization of Ethernet board) Retry counts over specifications
F91D (Initialization of Ethernet board) Failed
F91E (Initialization of Ethernet board) Not supported
F91F (Initialization of Ethernet board) Not ready
F921 (Queue Transmission for Task of Ethernet board) Table full
F922 (Queue Transmission for Task of Ethernet board) Busy
F923 (Queue Transmission for Task of Ethernet board) Abnormal pattern
F924 (Queue Transmission for Task of Ethernet board) Over range
F926 (Queue Transmission for Task of Ethernet board) Request doubled
F927 (Queue Transmission for Task of Ethernet board) Abnormal designated address
F928 (Queue Transmission for Task of Ethernet board) Not found
F92C (Queue Transmission for Task of Ethernet board) Retry counts over specifica-
tions
F92D (Queue Transmission for Task of Ethernet board) Failed
F92D (Queue Transmission for Task of Ethernet board)
F92E (Queue Transmission for Task of Ethernet board) Not supported
F92F (Queue Transmission for Task of Ethernet board) Not ready
F931 (Mail transmission for Task of Ethernet board) Table full
F932 (Mail transmission for Task of Ethernet board) Busy
F933 (Mail transmission for Task of Ethernet board) Abnormal pattern
F934 (Mail transmission for Task of Ethernet board) Over range
F936 (Mail transmission for Task of Ethernet board) Request doubled
F937 (Mail transmission for Task of Ethernet board) Abnormal designated address
F938 (Mail transmission for Task of Ethernet board) Not found
F93C (Mail transmission for Task of Ethernet board) Retry counts over specifications
5–63 SYSTEM
REV 2 2228782

Code Description
F93D (Mail transmission for Task of Ethernet board) Failed
F93E (Mail transmission for Task of Ethernet board) Not supported
F93F (Mail transmission for Task of Ethernet board) Not ready
F941 (Temporary stop for Task of Ethernet board) Table full
F942 (Temporary stop for Task of Ethernet board) Busy
F943 (Temporary stop for Task of Ethernet board) Abnormal pattern
F944 (Temporary stop for Task of Ethernet board) Over range
F946 (Temporary stop for Task of Ethernet board) Request doubled
F947 (Temporary stop for Task of Ethernet board) Abnormal designated address
F948 (Temporary stop for Task of Ethernet board) Not found
F94C (Temporary stop for Task of Ethernet board) Retry counts over specifications
F94D (Temporary stop for Task of Ethernet board) Failed
F94E (Temporary stop for Task of Ethernet board) Not supported
F94F (Temporary stop for Task of Ethernet board) Not ready
F951 (Operation resumption for Task of Ethernet board) Table full
F952 (Operation resumption for Task of Ethernet board) Busy
F953 (Operation resumption for Task of Ethernet board) Abnormal pattern
F954 (Operation resumption for Task of Ethernet board) Over range
F956 (Operation resumption for Task of Ethernet board) Request doubled
F957 (Operation resumption for Task of Ethernet board)Abnormal designated address
F958 (Operation resumption for Task of Ethernet board) Not found
F958 (Operation resumption for Task of Ethernet board)
F95C (Operation resumption for Task of Ethernet board)Retry counts over specifica-
tions
F95D (Operation resumption for Task of Ethernet board) Failed
F95E (Operation resumption for Task of Ethernet board) Not supported
F95F (Operation resumption for Task of Ethernet board) Not ready
F961 (Task deletion of Ethernet board) Table full
F962 (Task deletion of Ethernet board) Busy
F963 (Task deletion of Ethernet board) Abnormal pattern
F964 (Task deletion of Ethernet board) Over range
F966 (Task deletion of Ethernet board) Request doubled
F967 (Task deletion of Ethernet board) Abnormal designated address
5–64 SYSTEM
REV 2 2228782

Code Description
F968 (Task deletion of Ethernet board) Not found
F96C (Task deletion of Ethernet board) Retry counts over specifications
F96D (Task deletion of Ethernet board) Failed
F96E (Task deletion of Ethernet board) Not supported
F96F (Task deletion of Ethernet board) Not ready
F971 (Task load start of Ethernet board) Table full
F972 (Task load start of Ethernet board) Busy
F973 (Task load start of Ethernet board) Abnormal pattern
F974 (Task load start of Ethernet board) Over range
F976 (Task load start of Ethernet board) Request doubled
F977 (Task load start of Ethernet board) Abnormal designated address
F978 (Task load start of Ethernet board) Not found
F97C (Task load start of Ethernet board) Retry counts over specifications
F97D (Task load start of Ethernet board) Failed
F97E (Task load start of Ethernet board) Not supported
F97F (Task load start of Ethernet board) Not ready
F981 (Next operation mode setting of Ethernet board) Table full
F982 (Next operation mode setting of Ethernet board) Busy
F983 (Next operation mode setting of Ethernet board) Abnormal pattern
F984 (Next operation mode setting of Ethernet board) Over range
F986 (Next operation mode setting of Ethernet board) Request doubled
F987 (Next operation mode setting of Ethernet board) Abnormal designated address
F988 (Next operation mode setting of Ethernet board) Not found
F98C (Next operation mode setting of Ethernet board) Retry counts over specifications
F98D (Next operation mode setting of Ethernet board) Failed
F98E (Next operation mode setting of Ethernet board) Not supported
F98F (Next operation mode setting of Ethernet board) Not ready
F991 (Memory access of Ethernet board) Table full
F992 (Memory access of Ethernet board) Busy
F993 (Memory access of Ethernet board) Abnormal pattern
F994 (Memory access of Ethernet board) Over range
F996 (Memory access of Ethernet board) Request doubled
5–65 SYSTEM
REV 2 2228782

Code Description
F997 (Memory access of Ethernet board) Abnormal designated address
F998 (Memory access of Ethernet board) Not found
F99C (Memory access of Ethernet board) Retry counts over specifications
F99D (Memory access of Ethernet board) Failed
F99E (Memory access of Ethernet board) Not supported
F99F (Memory access of Ethernet board) Not ready
FA71 (Task load start) Table full
FA72 (Task load start) Busy
FA73 (Task load start) Abnormal pattern
FA74 (Task load start) Over range
FA76 (Task load start) Request doubled
FA77 (Task load start) Abnormal designated address
FA78 (Task load start) Not found
FA7C (Task load start) Retry counts over specifications
FA7D (Task load start) Failed
FA7E (Task load start) Not supported
FA7F (Task load start) Not ready
FA91 (Memory access) Table full
FA92 (Memory access) Busy
FA93 (Memory access) Abnormal pattern
FA94 (Memory access) Over range
FA96 (Memory access) Request doubled
FA97 (Memory access) Abnormal designated address
FA98 (Memory access) Not found
FA9C (Memory access) Retry counts over specifications
FA9D (Memory access) Failed
FA9E (Memory access) Not supported
FA9F (Memory access) Not ready
5–66 SYSTEM
REV 0 2228782
APPENDIX A – HOW TO MAKE CRASH SAVE DISK
1. Insert the BOOT disk into the floppy disk drive.
2. Set SW2 and SW4 of the ‘BOOT’ switches on the CPW board (or FMP1 board) to the ON position, as follows;
1 2 3 4
ON
3. Pull the system reset switch.
4. Enter VINITS via the operator console keyboard. (For Qj, Qj–Base, Qj–Hlt, or Zj–Adv systems)
(For Zj systems, enter VINIT.)
5. Remove the BOOT disk and insert a scratch disk into the floppy disk drive. Don’t forget to set the write–protect
to off.
6. Enter as follows (underlined);
F> VINIT ’CR’

WHAT DEVICE (MAX 4 CHARA) ? FD00 ’CR’ -FD DEVICE NAME
FLEXIBLE DISK: 2–DENSITY 2–SIDED
** TOTAL sector: 3991 **
VOLUME NAME: FD00
DESCRIPTION:
DO YOU WANT TO FORMAT DISK (Y/N/Q) ? Y ’CR’
** FORMATTING! **
** FORMATTED OK! **
DO YOU WANT TO VALIDATE SECTORS (Y/N/Q) ? N ’CR’
DO YOU WANT TO INITIALIZE DISK (Y/N/Q) ? Y ’CR’ -FD INITIALIZE REQUEST
VOLUME NAME (MAX. 4 CHARA.) ? FDMP ’CR’ -VOLUME NAME
USER NUMBER ? 0 ’CR’ -USER NO.
DESCRIPTION (MAX. 20 CHARA.) ? CRASH SAVE AREA ’CR’
DO YOU WANT IPLT LOADING (Y/N/Q) ? N ’CR’
DO YOU WANT SYSTEM DUMP AREA (Y/N/Q) Y ’CR’ -DUMP FILE ALLOCATE
REQUEST
WHAT FILE NAME (MAX. 8 CHARA.) ? DUMP ’CR’ -DUMP FILE NAME
HOW MANY SECTORS (DECIMAL) ? 8 ’CR’
** INITIALIZING ! **
** INITIALIZED: OK ! **
**** VINIT DONE ****
VINIT: TERMINATED
F>
Note
‘>’ prompt is displayed, instead of ‘F>’ prompt, for Qj, Qj–Base, Qj–Hlt, Zj–Adv.
A–1 SYSTEM
blank 2228782
A–2 SYSTEM
REV 0 2228782
APPENDIX B – HOW TO MAKE FLOT DISK
1. Insert the BOOT disk into the floppy disk drive.
2. Set SW2 and SW4 of the ‘BOOT’ switches on the CPW board (or FMP1 board) to the ON position, as follows;
1 2 3 4
ON
3. Pull the system reset switch.
4. Enter VINIT via the operator console keyboard.
5. Remove the BOOT disk and insert a scratch disk into the floppy disk drive. Don’t forget to set the write–protect
to off.
6. Enter as follows;
F> VINIT ’CR’

WHAT DEVICE (MAX 4 CHARA) ? FD00 ’CR’ -FD DEVICE NAME
FLEXIBLE DISK: 2–DENSITY 2–SIDED
** TOTAL sector: 3991 **
VOLUME NAME: FD00
DESCRIPTION:
DO YOU WANT TO FORMAT DISK (Y/N/Q) ? Y ’CR’
** FORMATTING! **
** FORMATTED OK! **
DO YOU WANT TO VALIDATE SECTORS (Y/N/Q) ? N ’CR’
DO YOU WANT TO INITIALIZE DISK (Y/N/Q) ? Y ’CR’ -FD INITIALIZE REQUEST
VOLUME NAME (MAX. 4 CHARA.) ? FLOT ’CR’ -VOLUME NAME
USER NUMBER ? 0 ’CR’ -USER NO.
DESCRIPTION (MAX. 20 CHARA.) ? MEDIA DEFECT INFOR. ’CR’
DO YOU WANT IPLT LOADING (Y/N/Q) ? N ’CR’
DO YOU WANT SYSTEM DUMP AREA (Y/N/Q) Y ’CR’ -DUMP FILE ALLOCATE REQUEST
WHAT FILE NAME (MAX. 8 CHARA.) ? DUMP ’CR’ -DUMP FILE NAME
HOW MANY SECTORS (DECIMAL) ? 8 ’CR’
** INITIALIZING ! **
** INITIALIZED: OK ! **
**** VINIT DONE ****
VINIT: TERMINATED
F>
7. In the VINIT procedure save the LOT information on the hard disk to the floppy disk.
B–1 SYSTEM
blank 2228782
B–2 SYSTEM
REV 0 2228782
OPERATOR CONSOLE
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION PAGE
SECTION 2 – POWER–ON TEST (QJ, QJ–BASE, QJ–HLT, ZJ–ADV) . 2–1

2-1 OVERVIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–1
2-2 PREPARATION FOR TEST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–3
2-2-1 Switch Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–3
2-2-2 Hardware Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–4
2-3 TEST SEQUENCE AND TEST ITEMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–5
2-3-1 Test Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–5
2-3-2 Test Items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–7
2-4 ERROR CODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–16
2-5 CRASH SAVE AREA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–17
SECTION 3 – POWER–UP SEQUENCE (ZJ) 3–1

3-1 OVERVIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–1
3-2 OPERATIONAL DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–4
3-2-1 Required Hardware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–4
3-2-2 Start–up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–4
3-3 FILE PROCESSOR POWER–UP SEQUENCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–5
3-3-1 Power–up Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–5
3-3-2 Error Code Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–8
3-4 SCAN/DISPLAY PROCESSOR POWER–UP SEQUENCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–11
3-5 PLASMA DISPLAY CONTROL PROCESSOR (PDC) POWER–UP SEQUENCE . . . 3–20
3-6 CRASH SAVE AREA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–23
i OPERATOR CONSOLE
REV 0 2228782
TABLE OF CONTENTS (continued)
SECTION PAGE
SECTION 4 – LED DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–1

4-1 LED DESCRIPTION FOR QJ, QJ–BASE, QJ–HLT, ZJ–ADV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–1
4-1-1 CPW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–1
4-1-2 IPU2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–2
4-1-3 DISP (DISP2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–3
4-1-4 MISC2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–4
4-2 LED DESCRIPTION FOR ZJ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–5
4-2-1 MFC CTL3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–5
4-2-2 FMP1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–6
4-2-3 FMP2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–7
4-2-4 DMP4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–8
4-2-5 OVL2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–9
4-2-6 IFB2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–10
4-2-7 FCP2A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–11
4-2-8 FCP3B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–12
4-2-9 FMD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–13
4-2-10 BPU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–14
4-2-11 PDC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–15
4-2-12 FPA2 (Option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–16
4-3 LED DESCRIPTION FOR QJ, QJ–BASE, QJ–HLT, ZJ–ADV, ZJ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–17
4-3-1 SCSI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–17
4-3-2 ISC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–18
4-3-3 ODC2 (Option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–19
4-3-4 MTC (Option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–20
4-3-5 ETC (Option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–21
SECTION 5 – SCSI BOARD TEST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–1

5-1 TEST MODE SWITCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–1
5-1-1 Test Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–1
5-1-2 Terminal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–2
5-1-3 YMON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–2
5-1-4 Test No. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–2
5-2 TEST RESULTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–4
SECTION 6 – ETC BOARD TEST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–1

6-1 ETC POWER–ON TEST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–1
6-1-1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–1
6-1-2 Reading ETC Board LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–2
6-1-3 Running The Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–3
6-1-4 LED Indication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–5
6-2 ETHERNET ADDRESS VERIFICATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–9
APPENDIX A – EXTERNAL TERMINAL REQUIREMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A–1
ii OPERATOR CONSOLE
REV 0 2228782
The Operator Console tab contains the following sections:
Section No. – Title Product Description

2 – Power–on Test Qj, Qj–Base, Qj–Hlt, Describes the power–on test executed during the
Zj–Adv power–up sequence.
3 – Power–up Sequence Zj
4 – LED Description All Describes the information provided by board
LEDs.
5 – SCSI Board Test All Describes off–line test or power–on test provided
for option boards
boards.
6 – ETC Board Test All
1–1 OPERATOR CONSOLE

blank 2228782

REV 0 2228782
SECTION 2 – POWER–ON TEST

(Qj, Qj–Base, Qj–Hlt, Zj–Adv)
2-1 OVERVIEW
The Power–ON test program is used for OC self–diagnostics during the Power up sequence, and is resident in the
ROM on the CPW assy.
This test program has two categories; Power On Test 1 (P–ON 1) and Power On Test 2 (P–ON 2).
The P–ON Test 2 includes more detailed tests than P–ON Test 1, and takes longer to run.
P–ON Test 1 is normally selected during routine customer operation. P–ON Test 2 can be used by the field engineer
to perform a more detailed analysis in the event of an error occurring on the system.
During test execution, the test currently running, along with the description/name and status (pass/fail), are identified
in 2 or 3 ways depending on the test concerned as follows:
1. CPW LEDs (all tests)
2. CRT display monitor (all tests, except CPW Phase1, and DISP (DISP2) Phase 1 tests)
3. Terminal connected to CPW RS232C output (all tests)
See Section 2-2 for more details.
If at any point during the P ON Tests an error is encountered, the testing is halted and the failed test number/code
remains on the CPW LEDs. With the exception of CPW Phase 1 and DISP (DISP2) Phase 1 tests, the test name/des-
cription will also be displayed on the CRT monitor along with a brief error description.
Note
There normally no need to connect a CPW RS232C terminal , since no additional information other
than that on the LEDs and monitor can be obtained during P ON Tests. Connecting a terminal is only
necessary for the execution of the off line tests.
The total processing time is as follows;
TABLE 2–1
TEST PROCESSING TIME
TIME FROM TEST START,

TEST PROCESSING
TO SYSTEM READY
TIME
P–ON 1 TEST 4:00 minutes. 4:16 minutes.
P–ON 2 TEST 13:05 minutes. 13:21 minutes.

REV 0 2228782
2-1 OVERVIEW (continued)
Reading Hexa–decimal Numbers from LEDs

The hexa–decimal number in each rectangle herein represents the LED status displayed on the CPW board. Read
the LEDs from top to bottom (MSB to LSB). Decode the top four LEDs to create the most significant hex digit (the
leftmost digit) and the bottom four to create the least significant hex digit (the rightmost digit). All hexa–decimal codes
are displayed with the letter ”H”.
More detailed status and information is displayed on the CRT from CPW Phase 2 test, so it is normally not necessary
to decode the LEDs status.
Example:
8
7
6 bit 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 (LSB)
5
1 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 (90H)
4
3
2
1
” ” means ”Illuminated” and equals ”1”: ” ” equals ”0”. LEDs are set at the start of each routine. If any error occurs
during self–testing, the LEDs display the corresponding error code.

REV 0 2228782
2-2 PREPARATION FOR TEST
2-2-1 Switch Setting

Set the DIP switch on the CPW Assy (location 8A1) as required according to the following;
ON
ON : 1
OFF: 0
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
NORMALLY
OFF
7 8 COMMUNICATION
SPEED (UNIT: BAUD) The following parameters are set by
0 0 9600 default with each speed setting and
cannot be cancelled;–
0 1 1200
1. CHARACTER LENGTH = 8 BITS
1 0 2400 2. STOP BIT = 1 BIT
3. PARITY = NONE
1 1 19200
1 2 3 TEST MODE
SELECTION
1 X X TEST SKIP X : DON’T CARE.
0 1 X OFF LINE TEST
0 0 1 POWER ON TEST 2
0 0 0 POWER ON TEST 1
DIP SWITCH SETTING

ILLUSTRATION 2–1
The DIP SW setting information is read at the moment of system power up or reset. Changing the DIP switch setting
during test execution will have no effect on the test sequence. If you want to change the parameters, first set the DIP
SW accordingly, then press the OC reset switch to start the test.
Note
This test program does not write any data to the HD, but it does require a properly formatted HD.
i.e; The tests will run with a normal operational HD, but not with an unformatted replacement HD.

REV 0 2228782
2-2-2 Hardware Configuration

The following Illustration shows the minimum hardware configuration required to run the test program.
SYSTEM BUS
CPW ASSY
HDD#0 This test program supports one or two
HDD; they are selected by the SW setting
on the CPW. See the illustration below for
HDD#1 the proper setting.
IO BUS
IMPORTANT NOTE:
IPU2 ASSY The Current revision of the CPW board
does not support dual HDD use.
DISP
(DISP2)
ASSY CRT ON
ON : 1
OFF: 0
1 2 3 4
TPC ASSY
Normally all OFF.
MISC2 Always OFF.

ASSY
Number of HD
0 One HD.
Two HDs.
1
(Not available)
HARDWARE CONFIGURATION
ILLUSTRATION ILLUSTRATION 1–11

REV 0 2228782
2-3 TEST SEQUENCE AND TEST ITEMS
2-3-1 Test Sequence

The Illustration 2–2 is a flow chart showing the sequence of the Power On Test program and where the results are
displayed.

REV 0 2228782
SYSTEM POWER ON CPW LED DISPLAY MONITOR (CPW RS232C)

TEST PROGRAM ACTIVITY ACTIVITY ACTIVITY
START
(power on
or reset) CPW TEST
(PHASE 1) TEST NUMBER
$11–$18
STATUS
BLANK TEST NUMBER AND
OK PASS/FAIL STATUS
DISP (DISP2)
TEST NUMBER
TEST
$30–$38
(PHASE 1)
STATUS TEST NUMBER AND
BLANK
PASS/FAIL STATUS
OK
CPW TEST
(PHASE 2) TEST GROUP
STATUS $1F
TEST NUMBER AND TEST NUMBER AND
OK PASS/FAIL STATUS PASS/FAIL STATUS
IPU2 TEST
TEST NUM-
BER/GROUP
STATUS $40–4E TEST NUMBER AND TEST NUMBER AND
OK PASS/FAIL STATUS PASS/FAIL STATUS
DISP (DISP2)
TEST NUM-
TEST
BER/GROUP
(PHASE 2)
$39–3F TEST NUMBER AND TEST NUMBER AND
STATUS PASS/FAIL STATUS PASS/FAIL STATUS
OK
MISC2 TEST TEST NUM-
BER/GROUP
STATUS $2F–24 TEST NUMBER AND TEST NUMBER AND
END PASS/FAIL STATUS PASS/FAIL STATUS
OK
SYSTEM
PREPARA-
$80
TION SYSTEM SLOADER
$8F
PREPARATION THEN
$90
TERMINATED
TEST SEQUENCE FLOW CHART

ILLUSTRATION 2–2

REV 0 2228782
2-3-2 Test Items

Tables 2–2 to 2–7 list the associated parameters of each individual P ON Test. These tables all have the same
format and include the following information;
D Test number/code and name
D Test mode under which the test is selected

(Power On Test 1, Power On Test 2, or both)
D Hardware to be checked – most likely failed assy, in the event of an error occurring.
D Test sequence
The CPW LEDs display a unique test number/code for CPW Phase 1 and DISP (DISP2) Phase 2 tests. Following
these tests, some codes are duplicated. The CRT (on the Operator Console) displays the test program status from
CPW TEST (Phase 2) onwards.
A terminal connected to the CPW will display the test program status for all tests.
Note
shows what boards or devices which are thoroughly tested.

shows what boards or devices which are partly tested.
If an error occurs during P on test, the test and CPW LEDs stop to run. In addition, for the test after
CPW test (Phase 2), the error message can be displayed on the CRT monitor.

REV 0 2228782
TABLE 2–2
CPW TEST (PHASE 1)
TEST MODE HARDWARE TO BE CHECKED

TEST ITEMS LED
STATUS
DISP
1 2 CPW IPU2 MISC2 TPC OTHERS
(DISP2)
SRAM W/R/V TEST (1) $11
CPW (1) BUS ERROR $12

TEST (ROM)
CPW (2) ROM SUM $13

CHECK TEST
CPW (3) INTERRUPT $14

HANDLER W/R/V TEST
CPW (4) CONTROL/STA- $15

TUS REG W/R/V TEST
CPW (5) DMAC REG W/R/ $16

V TEST
CPW (6) BUS ERROR $17

TEST (IPU2 MD)
CPW (10) CPW–DRAM W/ $18

R/V TEST (1)
THERE IS A DISCREPANCY BETWEEN THE CONTENTS OF P–ON 1 TEST AND P–ON TEST 2.

REV 0 2228782
TABLE 2–3
DISP (DISP2) TEST (PHASE 1)

TEST ITEMS LED
STATUS
DISP
(DISP2)
DISP (DISP2) (1) ACRTC $31

INITIALIZE TEST
PATTERN RAM W/R/V TEST
DISP (DISP2) (3) INTER-

$33
RUPT TEST
DISP (DISP2) (4) OVL PLANE

$34
CONTROL REG. W TEST
DISP (DISP2) (5) DISP CON-

TROL REG. W/R/V TEST $35
DISP (DISP2) (6) INT. MASK

$36
CONTROL REG. W/R/V TEST
DISP (DISP2) (7) VSYNC

$37
INTERRUPT TEST
DISP (DISP2) (8) OVL PLANE

$38
MEMORY W/R/V TEST

DMA TEST

REV 0 2228782
TABLE 2–4
CPW TEST (PHASE 2)

TEST ITEMS LED
STATUS
DISP
(DISP2)
CPW (7) FDC REG W/R $1F

TEST
CPW (8) SCSIC REG W/R $1F

TEST
CPW (9) SRAM W/R/V
$1F
TEST (2)
CPW (10) CPW–DRAM W/ $1F

R/V TEST (2)
CPW (11) CALENDAR $1F

READ TEST
CPW (12) DMA (CPW– $1F

DRAM) TEST
CPW (13) DMA (IPU2 MD) $1F

TEST
CPW (14) HD READ TEST $1F HD

REV 0 2228782
TABLE 2–5
IPU2 TEST

TEST ITEMS LED
STATUS
DISP
(DISP2)
IPU2 (1) REGISTER AC-

$41
CESS TEST
IPU2 (2) EXTENDED MD
$41
ACCESS TEST
IPU2 (3) COMMAND AREA
$42
ACCESS TEST
IPU2 (4) CPU MD ACCESS
$43
TEST
IPU2 (5) CPU EXTENDED
MD ACCESS TEST $44
IPU2 (6) DMA TEST $45
IPU2 (7) VECTOR AREA

$46
FETCH TEST
IPU2 (8) i860 REGISTER
$47
ACCESS TEST
IPU2 (9) DRIVER AREA
$48
ACCESS TEST
IPU2 (10) INTERRUPT RE-
$49
QUEST TEST1 (IPU→CPU)

REV 0 2228782
TABLE 2–5
IPU2 TEST (Continued)

TEST ITEMS LED
STATUS
DISP
(DISP2)
IPU2 (11) INTERRUPT RE-

$4A
QUEST TEST 2 (CPU→IPU)
IPU2 (12) SIMULTA-
$4B
NEOUSLY ACCESS TEST
IPU2 (13) DRIVER TEST $4C
IPU2 (14) BUS ERROR

$4D
TEST
IPU2 (15) i860 MD AC-
CESS TEST $43
IPU2 (16) i860 EXTENDED

MD ACCESS TEST $44
IPU2 (17) CPU/i860 ACCESS

$4E
TEST (CPU BANK0/IPU BANK0)
IPU2 (18) CPU/i860 ACCESS
$4F
TEST (CPU BANK1/IPU BANK1)
IPU2 (19) J10~J25 $44

REV 0 2228782
TABLE 2–6
DISP (DISP2) TEST (PHASE 2)

TEST ITEMS LED
STATUS
DISP
(DISP2)
DISP (DISP2) (10) DISP $3A

IMG REG. W/R/V TEST
DISP (DISP2) (11) BUF $3B

COUNT REG. W/R/V TEST
DISP (DISP2) (12) BUF $3C

REG. W/R/V TEST
DISP (DISP2) (13) BUF $3D

SIZE REG. W/R/V TEST
DISP (DISP2) (14) VSYNC $37

INTERRUPT TEST
DISP (DISP2) (15) IFB
$3E
W/R/V TEST
DISP (DISP2) (16) DAS $3F

BUF W/R/V TEST

REV 0 2228782
TABLE 2–7
MISC2 TEST

TEST ITEMS LED
STATUS
DISP
(DISP2)
MISC2 (1) BANK MEMORY

$2F
W/R/V TEST
MISC2 (2) INTR STATUS R
$2F
TEST
MISC2 (3) SM BUZZER CTL
$2B
W TEST
MISC2 (4) SCAN KEY STA-
$2C
TUS R TEST
MISC2 (5) SCAN KEY LED SET,
$2C
SCAN KEY LED BLINK,
COOLING WAIT LED SET,
W/R/V TEST
MISC2 (6) OC I/F DUAL
$2E
PORT RAM W/R/V TEST
MISC2 (7) OC I/F DUAL
PORT RAM R TEST $2E
MISC2 (8) INT MASK CTL

$2F
W TEST

REV 0 2228782
TABLE 2–7
MISC2 TEST (Continued)

TEST ITEMS LED
STATUS
DISP
(DISP2)
MISC2 (9) KB KEY CODE REG,

KB KEY STATUS R TEST $29
MISC2 (10) KB LAMP REG

$29
W/R/V TEST
MISC2 (11) KB BEEP REG
$29
W TEST
MISC2 (12) TRACK BALL
$28
CNT R TEST
MISC2 (13) TPC I/F DUAL
$27
PORT RAM W/R/V TEST
MISC2 (14) MFC STATUS
$26
R TEST
MISC2 (15) MFC WRITE
$26
REG W TEST, MFC READ
REG R TEST

REV 0 2228782
2-4 ERROR CODE

Refer to the following Error Code Description when the CPW fails during the power–up sequence due to the Operating
system failure.
TABLE 2–8
ERROR CODE
LED STATUS CONDITION REMEDY
BUS ERROR DUE TO ACCESSING

D0
NONEXISTENT MEMORY ADDRESS SUSPECT MEMORY OR RELOAD
OR EXECUTING INADEQUATE SOFTWARE.
INSTRUCTION.
ADDRESS ERROR DUE TO WORD SUSPECT MEMORY OR RELOAD

D1
REFERENCE TO ODD ADDRESS. SOFTWARE.
EXCEPTION DUE TO
D2 ~ D8 SUSPECT MEMORY OR RELOAD
INCORRECT INSTRUCTION
SOFTWARE.
OR CORRUPTED MEMORY.
ABNORMAL TERMINATION DUE ERROR INFORMATION IS STORED

E0
TO ABORT OF OS RELATED TASK. IN CRASH SAVE AREA
ERROR INFORMATION IS STORED

E1 ABNORMAL OPERATION SYSTEM. IN CRASH SAVE AREA

REV 0 2228782
2-5 CRASH SAVE AREA

When abnormal termination is caused by any failure (Bus Error, Address Error, or OS task crash), error information
is stored into an area of Memory called the “Crash Save Area.” Each processor has a Crash Save Area.
The Crash Save Area contains the following information:
S Program Counter
S Status Register
at crash
S Other registers
S LED status
For details, see Illustration 2–3.
The Crash Save Area on each processor is saved onto the hard disk at power–on. You can also save this information
onto floppy diskette as shown in Illustration 2–4. Use the following procedure to transfer Crash Save Area information
to floppy diskette.
Under crash condition-:
1. Label a crash save floppy diskette and insert it into the floppy disk drive.
Note
The first time you use this diskette, initialize it for a crash save according to Appendix A, How to Make
Crash Save Disk, of the System tab.
2. Pull the system reset switch with the diskette in place to automatically transfer a copy of the crash save area
of each processor onto the diskette. The system reset switch is located beneath OC keyboard console exten-
sion.
3. Use the following procedure to read the contents of the diskette.
a. Insert the ”BOOT” diskette into the floppy disk drive.
b. Set the boot select SW on the CPW board to the following positions:
ON
BOOT SELECT SWITCH SETTING

ILLUSTRATION 2–3
c. Pull the system reset SW.
d. Make sure the “>” prompt appears on the CRT monitor, and then remove the “BOOT” diskette and insert the
crash save diskette.
e. The diskette contents should resemble Illustration 2–4.

REV 0 2228782
2-5 CRASH SAVE AREA (Continued)
CRASH SAVE AREA ADDRESS A00 (H) ~ AFF (H)

RELATIVE
ADDRESS
0 PROGRAM COUNTER (4 BYTE)
(SPARE)
6 STATUS REGISTER (2 BYTE)
8 REGISTER D0 (4 BYTE PER EACH)
D7
A0
A7
48 USER STACK POINTER (4 BYTE)
4C BUS ERROR VECTOR (4 BYTE)
50 FUNCTION (2 BYTE)
ACCESS ADDRESS WHEN BUS ERROR OR ADDRESS
52 ACCESS ADDRESS (4 BYTE)
ERROR HAS OCCURRED.
56 COMMAND REGISTER (2 BYTE) APPLICABLE FOR LED STATUS D0 (H) OR D1 (H) ONLY.
5A PROGRAM COUNTER (4 BYTE) PROGRAM ADDRESS CAUSING BUS ERROR/AD-

DRESS ERROR.
APPLICABLE FOR LED STATUS D0 (H) OR D1 (H) ONLY.
64 LED STATUS (1 BYTE) (SPARE)
70 DATE (4 BYTE)
FILE PROCESSOR ONLY.
74 TIME (4 BYTE)
(SPARE)
80 ERROR STATUS (1 BYTE) DMAC CER (1 BYTE)
82 DMA TRANSFER ADDRESS (4 BYTE)
86 RESERVED HDC COMMAND CODE
88 HD PHYSICAL SECTOR NUMBER (4 BYTE)
90 HDC COMMAND PARAMETER (16 BYTE)
A0 HDC RESULT PARAMETER (16 BYTE)
FE (SPARE)
CRASH SAVE AREA

ILLUSTRATION 2–4

REV 0 2228782
CRASH SYSTEM RESET SAVE
CPW MEMORY
A00 (H) CRASH SAVE AREA
B00 (H)
FLOPPY DISK
B00 (H) SECTOR 0
> FN FDMP : 0. &. DUMP. SY ’ CR’

FDMP : 0000. .DUMP .SY (00, 00)
> FD 010 ’ CR’
000000 00 00 54 3C 00 33 20 00 00 00 00 38 00 00 00 09 . . T< . 3. . . . 8. .. ..
000010 00 00 00 03 00 00 00 40 00 00 00 06 00 02 09 90 .. .. . . @. . . .. .. ..
000020 00 01 26 CA 00 01 28 CA 00 01 31 16 00 00 0C 00 . . &. . . <. . . 1. .. ..
000030 00 00 53 E2 00 01 26 CA 00 FF 31 00 00 02 09 C0 . . S. . . &. . . 1. .. ..
000040 00 01 38 00 00 00 0B EE 00 01 29 8E 00 00 24 52 . . 8. .. .. .. >. .. .$R
000050 10 35 00 FF 03 81 10 28 20 00 00 00 67 E4 00 00 . 5. . . . . . <. .. G. ..
000060 00 00 00 00 E0 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..
000070 00 00 0A F1 02 94 10 90 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. CPW
000080 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 . . .. .. .. .. .. .. ..
000090 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. CRASH SAVE AREA
0000A0 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..
0000B0 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..
0000C0 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..
0000D0 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..
0000E0 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..
0000F0 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..
>
CRASH SAVE ONTO FLOPPY DISK

ILLUSTRATION 2–5

blank 2228782

REV 0 2228782
SECTION 3 – POWER–UP SEQUENCE (Zj)
3-1 OVERVIEW
This section describes the System Power–up Sequence, which consists of hardware tests, the Operating System
(OS) load, and Applications program start up. Each processor board (FMP1, DMP4, PDC) has 8–bit LEDs that display
system status in hexadecimal code.
The power–up sequence includes the power–up self tests shown in Illustration 3–1. The following section tells you
how to skip these self tests by setting a DIP SW. The hexadecimal number in each rectangle represents the LED
status displayed on each board (FMP1, DMP4, PDC). Read the LEDs from top to bottom (MSB to LSB) . Decode
the top four LEDs to create the most significant hex digit (the leftmost digit) and the bottom four to create the least
significant digit (the rightmost digit). All hexadecimal codes are displayed with the letter ”H”: XXH
EXAMPLE:
8
7
6
bit 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 (LSB)
5
(90H)
4 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 0
3
2
1
“ ” means “Illuminated” and equals a “1.” “ ” equals “0”. LEDs are set at the start of each routine. If any error
occurs during self–test, the LED status becomes the error code, and the power–up sequence halts. If an error occurs
during the boot–up sequence, the LEDs display an error code. The following sections describe these error codes.
Detailed error information is also stored in the Crash Save Area, which is described in Section 3-6.
Section 8 describes LED information found on other boards.

REV 0 2228782
START
(FILE PROCESSOR) SYSTEM TEST SYSTEM TEST PLASMA DISPLAY

(SCAN/DISPLAY IN PROGRESS IN PROGRESS CONTROL
PROCESSOR) PROCESSOR
POWER–UP FMP1 TEST DMP4 TEST PDC TEST

SELF TEST (11H – 1BH) (11H – 1CH) (11H – 18H)
MRX TEST OVL2/IFB2 TEST AGD TEST

(21H – 22H) (20H – 2EH) (20H – 26H)
FMP2 or FMP3 FPU TEST FRAME BUFFER

TEST (31H – 39H) (30H – 3DH) TEST (30H – 33H)
(FMP3: for
ProSpeed PDC TEST DMP4 COM TEST
Plus) (4EH) (40H)
DMP4 COM TEST FMP1 COM TEST DMP4 RAM TEST

(45H – 47H) (50H – 55H) (50H)
SYSTEM SYSTEM
PREPARATION READY
INITIAL BOOT–UP INITIAL BOOT–UP WAITING BOOT–UP

(60H) (60H) ACCEPTANCE (A1H)
OS LOADING WAITING OS WAITING BOOT–UP

(70H) (70H) END (A3H)
BOOT–UP OS START
SEQUENCE BOOT–UP END
(80H) (90H)
APPLICATION DEMAND OF PDC

LOAD & START DATA BASE FILE
(8FH – 90H) READ (B1H)
OS START
OS TRANSFER (80H)
BOOT–UP END
TO DMP4
(90H)
(90H)
APPLICATION
LOAD & START
(8FH – 90H)
INPUT DATE/TIME
SYSTEM READY POWER–UP

SELF TEST
POWER–UP SEQUENCE
ILLUSTRATION 3–1

REV 0 2228782
3-1 OVERVIEW (continued)
Plasma Display Controller (PDC) Start Sequence

D Waiting Boot–up Acceptance
The LEDs on the PDC board are set to A1H after the power–up test completes. The PDC requests the
DMP4 to boot–up the PDC. The PDC remains in this state until the DMP4 enters phase (90H) and returns
the acceptance to the PDC.
D Waiting Boot–up End

When the DMP4 returns the acceptance message to the PDC, the LEDs on the PDC board are set to A3H
until the DMP4 completes the boot–up procedure.
D Boot–up End
The PDC LEDs are set to 90H for a moment upon completion of the boot–up procedure.
D Demand of PDC Data Base File Read

The PDC sets its LEDs to B1H and requests the DMP4 to send the PDC Data Base file to the PDC. The
PDC reads six font files, from which the PDC creates the font table. The LEDs remain the same until this
operation completes.
D Boot–up End
After completion of the above procedures the LEDs are set to 90H, and the PDC notifies the DMP4 of the
boot–up procedure end. This LED status is kept during normal operation.

REV 0 2228782
3-2 OPERATIONAL DESCRIPTION
3-2-1 Required Hardware

In order to correctly sequence through system power–up, the following hardware must be present, in the correct slot
or system location and properly cabled.
FILE PROCESSOR SCAN/DISPLAY PROCESSOR

FMP1 ASSY DMP4 ASSY
FMP2 or FMP3 ASSY OVL2 ASSY
(FMP3: for ProSpeed Plus) IFB2 ASSY
PACK ASSY FCP2A ASSY
MRX ASSY FCP22 ASSY
HARD DISKS FCP1 ASSY
FCP3B ASSY
FPA ASSY
FMD ASSY
DBM ASSY
PDC ASSY
CRT Monitor
Key board.....
3-2-2 Start–up
To start the power–up sequence, set the TEST SW on the FMP1, the DMP4, and PDC as follows:
FMP1 DMP4 (FOR OC) PDC
1 OFF/ON (SKIP) – NOTE 1 1 OFF/ON (SKIP) – NOTE 1 1 OFF/ON (SKIP) – NOTE 1

2 OFF 2 OFF 2 OFF
3 OFF 3 OFF 3 OFF
4 OFF 4 OFF 4 OFF
5 OFF 5 OFF 5 OFF
6 OFF 6 ON 6 OFF
7 OFF 7 OFF 7 OFF
8 OFF 8 ON 8 OFF
OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON
NOTE:
1. TO SKIP THE SELF TEST ROUTINE, SET BIT 1 TO ON . IN THIS ILLUSTRATION
ALL BOARDS WILL RUN SELF TESTS DURING THE POWER–UP SEQUENCE.
TEST SW SETTING
ILLUSTRATION 3–2
Then, power–on the system or pull the system RESET SW on (under) the OC keyboard enclosure.

REV 0 2228782
3-3 FILE PROCESSOR POWER–UP SEQUENCE
3-3-1 Power–up Sequence

Table 3–1 or 3–2 shows the typical power–up sequence, LED status during each phase, and the hardware under test.
Definition of acronyms are listed below.
CIA . . . . . Communication Interrupt Area

CIR . . . . . Communication Interrupt Register
DMA . . . . Direct Memory Access
DMAC . . DMA Controller
HD . . . . . Hard Disk
HDC . . . . HD Controller
FDC . . . . Floppy Disk Controller
PTM . . . . Programmable Timer Module
SIO . . . . . Serial Input/Output
DMP4 is the Scan/Display Processor. DMP2 is an optional processor board for the Diagnostic Console (DC III).
Enable these tests when the corresponding hardware is present. If the system has no Diagnostic Console, the system
skips the DMP2 Tests.

REV 0 2228782
TABLE 3–1
FILE PROCESSOR POWER–UP SEQUENCE
(PROSPEED/PROSPEED VX)
ILLUMINATE
HARDWARE UNDER TEST
PHASE DESCRIPTION LED STATUS

FMP1 FMP2 MRX PACK DMP4 * DMP2 HD
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
FMP1 a.ROM SUM CHECK
TEST
b. BUS ERROR CHECK
c. INTERNAL RAM CHECK
d. PTM OPERATION CHECK
e. PTM INTERRUPT CHECK
f. SIO REGISTER CHECK
g. FMP1 CONTROL/STATUS REGISTER CHECK
h. PRINTER PORT CHECK
i. SYSTEM DMAC REGISTER CHECK
j. CIA/CIR CHECK
k. SYSTEM DMAC DMA CHECK
MRX a. LOCAL MEMORY CHECK

TEST b. COMMON MEMORY CHECK
FMP2 a. LOCAL DMAC REGISTER CHECK
TEST
b. LOCAL DMAC DMA CHECK
c. HDC CONTROL/STATUS REGISTER CHECK
d. HDC REGISTER CHECK
e. HD SEEK OPERATION CHECK
f. HD READ CHECK
g. FDC CONTROL/STATUS REGISTER CHECK
h. UNPACK INITIALIZE CHECK
i. PACK INITIALIZE CHECK
DMP4 a. COMMAND TRANSMIT CHECK
TEST
b. INTERRUPT ACCEPT CHECK
c. RESPONSE DATA CHECK
TEST
c.RESPONSE DATA CHECK
BOOT a. INITIAL BOOT–UP
–UP
b. OS LOADING
c. OS START
d. APPLICATION LOAD & START

REV 0 2228782
TABLE 3–2
FILE PROCESSOR POWER–UP SEQUENCE
(PROSPEED PLUS)
ILLUMINATE
HARDWARE UNDER TEST
PHASE DESCRIPTION LED STATUS

FMP1 FMP3 MRX PACK DMP4 * DMP2 HD
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
FMP1 a.ROM SUM CHECK
TEST
b. BUS ERROR CHECK
d. PTM OPERATION CHECK
e. PTM INTERRUPT CHECK
f. SIO REGISTER CHECK
g. FMP1 CONTROL/STATUS REGISTER CHECK
h. PRINTER PORT CHECK
i. SYSTEM DMAC REGISTER CHECK
j. CIA/CIR CHECK
k. SYSTEM DMAC DMA CHECK
MRX a. LOCAL MEMORY CHECK

TEST b. COMMON MEMORY CHECK
FMP3 a. LOCAL DMAC REGISTER CHECK
TEST
b. LOCAL DMAC DMA CHECK
c. SCSI–2 CONTROL REGISTER CHECK
d. SCSI INITIALIZE CHECK
e. FDC CONTROL/STATUS REGISTER CHECK
f. UNPACK INITIALIZE CHECK
g. PACK INITIALIZE CHECK

TEST
c. RESPONSE DATA CHECK
TEST
c.RESPONSE DATA CHECK
–UP
b. OS LOADING
c. OS START

REV 0 2228782
3-3-2 Error Code Description

Refer to the following error code description when the File Processor fails during the power–up sequence, or the FMP1
ASSY LEDs display an error status during normal.
ERROR CODE CONDITION REMEDY

(HEX)
01 HARDWARE SELF TEST DOES SKIP THE SELF TEST OR

NOT EXIST IN ROM. CHANGE ROM.
11–1B ERROR DURING FMP1 ASSY REPLACE FMP1 ASSY.

TEST.
21–22 ERROR DURING MRX ASSY REPLACE MRX ASSY.

TEST.
31–39 ERROR DURING FMP2 OR FMP3 ASSY REPLACE FMP2 OR FMP3, PACK
TEST. OR HARD DISK.
(FMP3: for ProSpeed Plus)
45–47 ERROR DURING COMMUNICATION CHECK THE JUMPER SETTINGS

TEST BETWEEN FMP1 AND ON DMP4 ASSY.
DMP4.
48–4F ERROR DURING COMMUNICATION CHECK THE JUMPER SETTINGS

TEST BETWEEN FMP1 AND ON DMP2 ASSY.
DMP2.
60 ABNORMAL TERMINATION DUE REPLACE ROM ON FMP1 OR

TO LEVEL 7 INTERRUPT WHOLE FMP1.
BEFORE SETTING VECTOR.
62 ERROR IN HARD DISK OR REPLACE HARD DISK OR

FLOPPY DISK. FLOPPY DISK. ERROR.
INFORMATION IS STORED
IN CRASH SAVE AREA.
63 IMPROPER SECTOR #0 INITIALIZE HARD DISK

INFORMATION ON HARD DISK. .ERROR IS STORED IN CRASH
SAVE AREA.
64 UNEXPECTED INTERRUPT REPLACE ROM ON FMP1 OR

OTHER THAN BUS ERROR WHOLE FMP1. ERROR IS STORED
OR ADDRESS ERROR. IN CRASH SAVE AREA.
65 UNEXPECTED INTERRUPT REPLACE ROM ON FMP1 OR

DUE TO BUS ERROR WHOLE FMP1. ERROR IS
OR ADDRESS ERROR STORED IN CRASH SAVE AREA.
70 UNEXPECTED INTERRUPT IMPROPER INITIAL PROGRAM LOADER

WHILE EXECUTING PROGRAM. INITIALIZE HARD DISK
INITIAL PROGRAM LOADER ERROR INFORMATION IS STORED
IN CRASH SAVE AREA.

REV 0 2228782
3-3-2 Error Code Description (continued)

(HEX)
72 COULD NOT FIND OPERATING CORRUPTED CONTENTS IN THE

SYSTEM SOFTWARE IN THE DISK. INITIALIZE SPECIFIED
SPECIFIED DISK. HARD DISK. ERROR INFORMATION IS
STORED IN CRASH SAVE AREA.
74 ERROR IN HARD DISK OR REPLACE HARD DISK OR

FLOPPY DISK. FLOPPY DISK. ERROR INFORMATION
IS STORED IN CRASH SAVE AREA.
80 UNEXPECTED INTERRUPT DURING OPERATING SYSTEM FILE OR

INITIALIZE ROUTINE EXECUTION. FAILURE IN MEMORY. INITIALIZE
HARD DISK. ERROR INFORMATION
IS STORED IN CRASH SAVE AREA.
81 UNEXPECTED INTERRUPT DUE TO BUS REPLACE FMP1 ASSY. ERROR

ERROR DURING MEMORY CLEAR. INFORMATION IS STORED ON
CRASH SAVE AREA.
82 SOFTWARE CONTRADICTION CORRUPTED OPERATING SYSTEM

DURING INITIALIZE ROUTINE. OR READ ERROR. INITIALIZE HARD DISK
ERROR INFORMATION IS
83 MEMORY ALLOCATION ERROR. IMPROPER MEMORY SIZE OR

CORRUPTED OPERATING SYSTEM
.INITIALIZE HARD DISK. ERROR
INFORMATION IS STORED IN
CRASH SAVE AREA.
90 PROGRAM LOOPING OR CPU CHECK CONNECTION OF DAISY

HALT. NO RESPONSE ON CRT CHAIN LINE (IACK, BG 0–4).
MONITOR.
A0 ABNORMAL TERMINATION DUE SUSPECT MEMORY OR RELOAD

TO INSUFFICIENT MEMORY, SOFTWARE.
IMPROPER MEMORY LAYOUT
OR MISSING TASK.

TO IMPROPER MEMORY LAYOUT, SOFTWARE.
DUPLICATE TASK OR MISSING TASK

REV 0 2228782
3-3-2 ERROR CODE DESCRIPTION (continued)

(HEX)
D0 BUS ERROR DUE TO SUSPECT MEMORY OR

ACCESSING NONEXISTENT RELOAD SOFTWARE.
MEMORY ADDRESS OR ERROR INFORMATION IS
EXECUTING INADEQUATE STORED IN CRASH SAVE
INSTRUCTION. AREA.
D1 ADDRESS ERROR DUE TO SUSPECT MEMORY OR

WORD REFERENCE TO ODD RELOAD SOFTWARE.
ADDRESS. ERROR INFORMATION IS
STORED IN CRASH SAVE
AREA.
D2–D8 UNEXPECTED INTERRUPT DUE SUSPECT MEMORY OR

TO INCORRECT INSTRUCTION RELOAD SOFTWARE.
OR CORRUPTED MEMORY. ERROR INFORMATION IS
E0 ABNORMAL TERMINATION DUE ERROR INFORMATION IS

TO ABORT OF OS RELATED STORED IN CRASH SAVE
TASK. AREA.
EF ABNORMAL OPERATION ERROR INFORMATION IS

SYSTEM. STORED IN CRASH SAVE
AREA.

REV 0 2228782
3-4 SCAN/DISPLAY PROCESSOR POWER–UP SEQUENCE

Table 3–3 shows the power–up sequence, the LED status during each phase, and the hardware under test. Definition
of terms are listed below.
ACRTC . Advanced CRT Controller

DMAC . . DMA Controller
KB . . . . . Keyboard
MD . . . . . Main Data Memory
PTM . . . . Programmable Timer Module
PSA . . . . Program Source Address
TMA . . . . Table Memory Address
VSC . . . . Video System Controller

blank 2228782

REV 0 2228782
TABLE 3–3
SCAN/DISPLAY PROCESSOR POWER–UP SEQUENCE
ILLUMINATE
HARDWARE UNDER TEST

TEST FILE
NAME FUNCTION TO BE CHECKED LED STATUS PROCES- DMP4 OVL2 IFB2 FPU CRT KB CBRD PDC FMD DBM
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 SOR
Initial Set a. DISPLAY “SYSTEM TEST IN PROGRESS”

DMP4 a. ROM SUM CHECK
TEST
b. BUS ERROR CHECK
d. INTERRUPT HANDLER CHECK
e. PTM OPERATION/INTERRUPT CHECK
f. CONTROL/STATUS REGISTER CHECK
g. CALENDAR IC CHECK
h. I/O BUS CHECK
i. SYSTEM BUS INTERRUPT CHECK
j. DMAC REGISTER CHECK
k. DMA OPERATION CHECK 1
l. DMA OPERATION CHECK 2
OVL2/ a. OVL2/IFB2 TEST START

IFB2
b. ACRTC INITIALIZE & REGISTER CHECK
TEST
c. ACRTC SYNC TIMING CHECK
d. ACRTC INTERRUPT CHECK
e. ACRTC EXTERNAL REGISTER CHECK
f. ACRTC FRAME BUFFER CHECK
g. ACRTC DMA FUNCTION CHECK
h. KB LAMP REGISTER CHECK
i. KB DATA REGISTER CHECK
j. VSC REGISTER CHECK
k. VSC VSYNC TIMING CHECK
l. VSC SCREEN BUFFER CHECK
m.VSC SCREEN BUFFER DMA CHECK
n. VSC x 4 REGISTER CHECK
o. VSC x 4 VSYNC TIMING CHECK
(Continued)

blank 2228782

REV 0 2228782

SCAN/DISPLAY PROCESSOR POWER–UP SEQUENCE
ILLUMINATE
HARDWARE UNDER TEST
PHASE DESCRIPTION FILE

LED STATUS PROCES- DMP4 OVL2 IFB2 FPU CRT KB CBRD PDC FMD DBM
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 SOR
FPU a. FPU TEST START

TEST
b. MD CHECK
c. ADDRESS REGISTER CHECK
d. PSA REGISTER CHECK
e. TMA REGISTER CHECK
f. S–PAD REGISTER CHECK
g. PS MEMORY CHECK
h. PROGRAM START/STOP CHECK
i. FPU INTERRUPT CHECK
j. MD DMA ACCESS CHECK
k. FMD#1 MEMORY CHECK
l. FMD#2 DMA ACCESS CHECK
m.DBM MEMORY CHECK
n. DBM DMA ACCESS CHECK
PDC TEST a. PDC DUAL PORT RAM CHECK
b. PDC COM. CHECK (INTERRUPT CLEAR)
c. PDC COM. CHECK (INTERRUPT TO PDC)
d. PDC COM. CHECK (INTERRUPT FROM PDC)
e. PDC COM. CHECK (RESPONSE DATA)
f. PDC COM. CHECK (INTERRUPT CLEAR)
g. PDC RAM CHECK (INTERRUPT TO/FROM PDC)
h. PDC RAM CHECK
i. PDC RAM CHECK (INTERRUPT TO/FROM PDC)
FMP a. FMP COMMUNICATION TEST START
COM.
TEST b. DMP INTERRUPT ACCEPT CHECK
c. COMMAND DATA CHECK
d. SYSTEM BUS MEMORY CHECK
e. SYSTEM BUS MEMORY DMA CHECK
f. RESPONSE TRANSMIT & INTERRUPT CHECK
TEST END a. DISPLAY “SYSTEM PREPARATION”
–UP
SEQUENCE b. WAITING OS
c. OS START

blank 2228782

REV 0 2228782

Refer to the following Error Code Description when the Scan/Display Processor fails during the power–up sequence
or the DMP4 ASSY LEDs display an error status during normal operation.

(HEX)

10–1C ERROR DURING DMP4 ASSY REPLACE DMP4 ASSY.

TEST.
20–2C ERROR DURING OVL2 ASSY REPLACE OVL2 ASSY OR

TEST. CBRD.
2D, 2E ERROR DURING IFB2 ASSY REPLACE IFB2 ASSY OR

TEST. CBRD.
3D–31, 39 ERROR DURING MAIN DATA REPLACE FCP3 ASSY.

MEMORY IN FPU ON LOCAL
BUS.
32–38 ERROR DURING COMMAND CHANGE FCP2A ASSY OR

WRITE, STATUS READ OR DMP4 ASSY.
INTERRUPT RECEPTION
BETWEEN FPU AND DMP4.
3A, 3B ERROR DURING EXPANDED CHANGE FMD ASSY OR DMP4

MAIN DATA MEMORY IN FPU ASSY.
ON LOCAL BUS.
3C, 3D ERROR DURING DAS CHANGE DBM ASSY.

BUFFER MEMORY IN FPU
ON LOCAL BUS.
40 ERROR DURING PDC DUAL PORT RAM TESTREPLACE PDC ASSY.
41–45 ERROR DURING TEST OF DMP4–PDC REPLACE PDC ASSY.

COMMUNICATION VIA DUAL PORT RAM.
46–48 ERROR DURING TEST OF ACCESSING PDC REPLACE PDC ASSY.

RAM VIA DMP4 LOCAL BUS

TEST BETWEEN FMP1 AND ON DMP4 ASSY AND DAISY
DMP4. CHAIN LINE.
5C ERROR WHILE DISPLAYING RESET AND EXECUTE SELF

“SYSTEM PREPARATION”. TEST AGAIN.
60 ABNORMAL TERMINATION REPLACE ROM ON DMP4 OR

DUE TO LEVEL 7 INTERRUPT WHOLE DMP4.
70 UNEXPECTED INTERRUPT DURING IMPROPER INITIAL PROGRAM LOADER

INITIAL PROGRAM LOADER EXECUTION. PROGRAM. INITIALIZE HARD DISK.
ERROR INFORMATION IS STORED IN
CRASH SAVE AREA.

REV 0 2228782

(HEX)
73 OS LOADING TIME OUT. CORRUPTED OS TRANSFER PROGRAM

INITIALIZE ROUTINE EXECUTION. FAILURE IN MEMORY. INITIALIZE HARD
.DISK. ERROR INFORMATION IS STORED
IN CRASH SAVE AREA.
81 UNEXPECTED INTERRUPT DUE TO REPLACE DMP4 ASSY. ERROR

BUS ERROR DURING MEMORY CLEAR. INFORMATION IS STORED IN CRASH
. SAVE AREA.

DURING INITIALIZE ROUTINE. OR READ ERROR. INITIALIZE HARD DISK.
IN CRASH SAVE AREA.
83 MEMORY ALLOCATION ERROR. IMPROPER MEMORY SIZE

OR CORRUPTED OPERATING SYSTEM
CRASH SAVE AREA.

HALT. DATE/TIME ENTRY CHAIN LINE (IACK, BG0–4).
DISPLAY DOES NOT APPEAR
ON CRT.

OR MISSING TASK.
A1 ABNORMAL TERMINATION SUSPECT MEMORY OR RELOAD

DUE TO IMPROPER MEMORY SOFTWARE.
LAYOUT, DUPLICATE TASK OR
MISSING TASK.
D0 BUS ERROR DUE TO ACCESSING SUSPECT MEMORY OR RELOAD

NONEXISTENT MEMORY ADDRESS SOFTWARE. ERROR INFORMATION
OR EXECUTING INADEQUATE IS STORED IN CRASH SAVE AREA.
INSTRUCTION
D1 ADDRESS ERROR DUE TO WORD SUSPECT MEMORY OR RELOAD

REFERENCE TO ODD ADDRESS. SOFTWARE. ERROR INFORMATION IS
STORED IN CRASH SAVE AREA
D2–D8 EXCEPTION DUE TO SUSPECT MEMORY OR RELOAD

INCORRECT INSTRUCTION SOFTWARE. ERROR INFORMATION IS
OR CORRUPTED MEMORY. STORED IN CRASH SAVE AREA.

REV 0 2228782

(HEX)

TASK. AREA.

AREA.

REV 0 2228782
3-5 PLASMA DISPLAY CONTROL PROCESSOR (PDC) POWER–UP SEQUENCE

Table 2–3 shows the typical power–up sequence, LED status during each phase, and the hardware under test.
Definition of acronyms are listed below.
AGDC . . Advanced Graphic Display Controller

TPPS . . . TPPS ASSY (P9321YJ)
TPC . . . . Touch Panel Controller

REV 0 2228782
TABLE 3–4
PDC POWER–UP SEQUENCE
ILLUMINATE
HARDWARE UNDER TEST
PHASE DESCRIPTION LED STATUS Plasma Touch

DMP4 PDC TPPS TPC
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 Display Sensor
Initial a. DISPLAY “SYSTEM TEST IN PROGRESS” ON
Set PLASMA DISPLAY
PDC a. ROM SUM CHECK
TEST
b. BUS ERROR CHECK
d. DUAL PORT RAM CHECK
g. SIO CHECK
h. TOUCH PANEL/PSC SIO CHECK
AGDC a. RASTER COUNTER CHECK
TEST
b. AGDC INITIALIZE & REGISTER CHECK
c. AGDC SYNC TIMING CHECK
d. AGDC INTERRUPT CHECK
e. PLANE CONTROL REGISTER CHECK
f. BLINK CONTROL REGISTER CHECK
g. PDP CONTROL REGISTER CHECK
FRAME a. FRAME BUFFER TEST START
BUFFER
b. MPU WR/VER CHECK
TEST
c. AGDC WR/MPU VER CHECK
d. MPU WR/AGDC VER CHECK
DMP4 a. DMP4 COMMUNICATION TEST START
COM.
b. DMP4 INTERRUPT ACCEPT CHECK
TEST
d. DMP4 INTERRUPT CLEAR CHECK
e. RESPONSE TRANSMIT & INTERRUPT CHECK
DMP4 a. DMP4 RAM TEST START
RAM
b. LOCAL BUS ENABLE CHECK
TEST
c. LOCAL BUS DISABLE CHECK

REV 0 2228782

Refer to the following error code description when the PDC fails during the power–up sequence, or the PDC ASSY
LEDs display an error status during normal.

(HEX)
FF INITIALIZE FAILURE OF PLASMA DISPLAY. REPLACE PDC ROM OR PDC ASSY.
01 INITIALIZE FAILURE OF PDC RAM. REPLACE PDC ASSY.
10–33 ERROR DURING PDC ASSY TEST. REPLACE PDC ASSY.
40 ERROR DURING COMMUNICATION TEST CHECK THE DIP SW SETTING ON

BETWEEN PDC AND DMP4 VIA DUAL PORT DMP4; IT MUST BE SET TO P–ON TEST.
RAM. CHECK CABLE CONNECTION BETWEEN
PDC AND DMP4.
REPLACE PDC ASSY.
REPLACE DMP4 ASSY.
50 ERROR DURING DMP4 INTERNAL RAM TESTREPLACE PDC ASSY.

VIA DMP4 LOCAL BUS. REPLACE DMP4 ASSY.
90 PDC IS READY FOR BOOT–UP.

ERROR DURING INITIALIZATION OF PDC REPLACE PDC ASSY.
PERIPHERALS.
NO RESPONSE TO PDC READY SIGNAL REPLACE DMP4 ASSY.
FROM DMP4.
A0 BOOT–UP FAILURE. REPLACE PDC ROM.

.
A1 NO RESPONSE FROM DMP4 TO PDC REPLACE PDC ASSY.

BOOT REQUEST. REPLACE DMP4 ASSY.
A3 ERROR DURING PDC BOOT–UP BY DMP4. REPLACE PDC ASSY.

REPLACE DMP4 ASSY.
B0 FILE READ FAILURE. REPLACE PDC ROM.
B1 ERROR DURING PDC DATA FILE READ. REPLACE PDC ASSY

REPLACE DMP4 ASSY.
C0 NO RESPONSE FROM DMP4 TO PDC REPLACE PDC OR DMP4 ASSY.

BOOT–UP COMPLETION MESSAGE.
C1 INITIALIZE FAILURE OF TOUCH PANEL. REPLACE TPC OR PDC ASSY.
C2 AGDC ERROR. REPLACE PDC ASSY.
C3 FONT COMPOSITION ERROR. CHANGE FONT FILE TO CORRECT ONE.

REV 0 2228782
3-6 CRASH SAVE AREA

When abnormal termination is caused by any failure (Bus Error, Address Error, or OS task crash), some error informa-
tion is stored into an area of Memory called the “Crash Save Area.” Each processor has a Crash Save Area.
The Crash Save Area contains the following information.
S Program Counter
S Status Register
at crash
S Other registers
S LED status
For details, see Illustration 3–4.
The Crash Save Area on each processor is saved onto the hard disk at power–on. You can also save this information
on the floppy diskette, as shown in Illustration 3–5. Use the following procedure to transfer Crash Save Area informa-
tion to floppy diskette.
Under crash condition-:
1. Label a crash save floppy diskette and insert it floppy disk drive.
Note
The first time you use this diskette, initialize it for a crash save according to APPENDIX A, “HOW TO
MAKE CRASH SAVE DISKETTE.”
2. Pull the system reset switch with the diskette in place to automatically transfer a copy of the crash save area of
each processor onto the diskette. (System reset located beneath OC keyboard console extension)
3. Use the following procedure to read the contents of the diskette.
a. Insert the ”BOOT” diskette into the floppy disk drive.
b. Set the boot select SW on FMP1 board to the following positions:
ON
BOOT SELECT SWITCH SETTING
ILLUSTRATION 3–3
c. Pull the system reset SW.
d. Make sure the “F>” prompt appears on the CRT monitor, then remove the “BOOT” diskette and insert the
crash save diskette.
e. The diskette contents should resemble Illustration 2–5.

REV 0 2228782
CRASH SAVE AREA ADDRESS A00 (H) ~ AFF (H)

RELATIVE
ADDRESS
0 PROGRAM COUNTER (4 BYTE)
(SPARE)
8 REGISTER D0 (4 BYTE PER EACH)
D7
A0
A7
48 USER STACK POINTER (4 BYTE)
4C BUS ERROR VECTOR (4 BYTE)
50 FUNCTION (2 BYTE)
ACCESS ADDRESS WHEN BUS ERROR OR ADDRESS ER-
52 ACCESS ADDRESS (4 BYTE) ROR OCCURRED.
56 COMMAND REGISTER (2 BYTE)
5A PROGRAM COUNTER (4 BYTE) PROGRAM ADDRESS CAUSING BUS ERROR/AD-

DRESS ERROR.
64 LED STATUS (1 BYTE) (SPARE)
70 DATE (4 BYTE)
FILE PROCESSOR ONLY.
74 TIME (4 BYTE)
(SPARE)
80 ERROR STATUS (1 BYTE) DMAC CER (1 BYTE)
82 DMA TRANSFER ADDRESS (4 BYTE)
86 RESERVED HDC COMMAND CODE
88 HD PHYSICAL SECTOR NUMBER (4 BYTE)
90 HDC COMMAND PARAMETER (16 BYTE)
A0 HDC RESULT PARAMETER (16 BYTE)
FE (SPARE)
CRASH SAVE AREA

ILLUSTRATION 3–4

REV 0 2228782
CRASH SYSTEM RESET SAVE
FILE PROCESSOR MEMORY
A00 (H) CRASH SAVE AREA
B00 (H)
FLOPPY DISK
B00 (H) SECTOR 0
1
DUMMY
2
SCAN/DISPLAY PROCESSOR MEMORY
3
0
A00 (H)
CRASH SAVE AREA
B00 (H)
F > FN FDMP : 0. &. DUMP. SY ’ CR’

FDMP : 0000. .DUMP .SY (00, 00)
F > FD 0 10 ’ CR’
000000 00 00 54 3C 00 33 20 00 00 00 00 38 00 00 00 09 . . T< . 3. . . . 8. .. ..
000010 00 00 00 03 00 00 00 40 00 00 00 06 00 02 09 90 .. .. . . @. . . .. .. ..
000020 00 01 26 CA 00 01 28 CA 00 01 31 16 00 00 0C 00 . . &. . . <. . . 1. .. ..
000030 00 00 53 E2 00 01 26 CA 00 FF 31 00 00 02 09 C0 . . S. . . &. . . 1. .. ..
000040 00 01 38 00 00 00 0B EE 00 01 29 8E 00 00 24 52 . . 8. .. .. .. >. .. .$R
000050 10 35 00 FF 03 81 10 28 20 00 00 00 67 E4 00 00 . 5. . . . . . <. .. G. ..
000060 00 00 00 00 E0 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..
000070 00 00 0A F1 02 94 10 90 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. FILE PROCESSOR
000080 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 . . .. .. .. .. .. .. ..
000090 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. CRASH SAVE AREA
0000A0 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..
0000B0 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..
0000C0 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..
0000D0 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..
0000E0 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..
0000F0 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..
F>
F > FD 200 10 ’ CR’
000200 00 00 00 00 00 33 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 .. . . . 3. . .. .. .. ..
000210 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..
000220 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..
000230 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..
000240 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..
000250 26 C5 00 3F FF 00 26 C0 27 00 00 01 60 50 00 00 &. . ? . . &. I. .. @P. .
000260 00 00 00 00 70 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 .. . . P. . . .. .. .. .. SCAN/
000270 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. DISPLAY PROCESSOR
000280 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 .. .. . . . . .. .. .. .. CRASH SAVE AREA
000290 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..
0002A0 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..
0002B0 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..
0002C0 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..
0002D0 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..
0002E0 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..
0002F0 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..
F>
CRASH SAVE INTO DISKETTE

ILLUSTRATION 3–5

blank 2228782

REV 0 2228782
SECTION 4 – LED DESCRIPTION
The LEDs on circuit boards installed on the nest chassis indicate various status information.
The information in this section can be a help to identify failures occurred on boards.
4-1 LED DESCRIPTION FOR QJ, QJ–BASE, QJ–HLT, ZJ–ADV
4-1-1 CPW

!

! #
" %

! #

" ! #
" !
!
!
% #

!
' ! # % (
(

"

!

#

$ !
!

!
!

!

%

!

&
$

REV 0 2228782
4-1-2 IPU2

After the system starts up with no errors, bit 1 LED only flashes
at interval of approx. 1 second. Bit 0 ~7 LEDs are normally exĆ
STATUS
tinguished.
7
6 When performing reconstruction, bit 2 LED only is lit ON. OthĆ
5 ers are normally extinguished.
4
3
2
1
0

REV 0 2228782
4-1-3 DISP (DISP2)
(Overlay)
It is lit ON when OVL screen is ON. (OVL screen is controlled
by OVL ON bit of DISPLAY CONTROL REG.)

(Image)
It is lit ON when IFB (Image Frame Buffer) screen is ON. (IFB
screen is controlled by IMG ON bit of DISPLAY CONTROL
REG.)
OVL
IMG (Frame Buffer 1)
FB1 It is lit ON when FM1 (Frame Memory 1) displays. (FM0/FM1
selection is controlled by IMG bit of DISPLAY IMG REG.)
DB1
(DAS Buffer 1)
VSYNC It is lit ON when BUF1 is connected to IO BUS. (BUF0/BUF1
SBUS selection to connect IO BUS is controlled by BUF bit of BUF
REG.)
DMA
IOBUS (Vertical Synchronization)
It is lit ON during VSYNC.
(System Bus)
It is lit ON during access from SYSTEM BUS.

(Direct Memory Access)
It is lit ON during DMA to ACRTC.

It is lit ON during access from IO BUS.

REV 0 2228782
4-1-4 MISC2

These LEDs indicate status of Multi

Format Camera. It is lit ON when IP ERROR
occurs.

$00 MFC NOT READY 7
It is lit ON when AUTO
$01 MFC IS NOT SELECTED 6 DS1 COMMUNICATION ERĆ
$02 REC.MAG. IS NOT INSTALLED 5 ROR occurs.
$03 SUP. MAG. IS NOT INSTALLED
$04 FILM EMPTY OR SUP. MAG. SHUTTER IS
4
NOT OPEN 3 It is lit ON when TGP
COMMUNICATION ERĆ
$05 WAITING SUPPLY COMMAND 2 DS2 ROR occurs.
$06 WAITING EXPOSE COMMAND
$07 CRT POSITIONING
1
$08 EXPOSING 0 It is lit ON when DMP4-IP
COMMUNICATION ERĆ
$09 EXPOSE n COMPLETE ROR occurs.
$0A RESETTING
$0B SUPPLY ERROR
$0C RECIEVE ERROR It is lit ON when TEST
COMMAND or STATUS is
$0D RAM CHECK ERROR 2000H being processed.
$0E RAM CHECK ERORR 3000H ERROR
$0F 7 SEG. NO LIGHT (FLASHING) AUD ERR DS3
It is lit ON when AUDIO
$10 DEVELOPPER NOT READY TG ERR COMMAND or STATUS is
$11 REC. MAG. FULL
$16 FILM OVERLAP ERROR
CPU ERR being processed.
$17 LENS POSITIONING ERROR TEST

It is lit ON when TG COMĆ
$1B COMMUNICATION ERROR (SEND) AUD REQ DS4 MAND or STATUS is being
$1C VIDEO SIGNAL ERROR
$1D COMMUNICATION ERROR (RECIEVE)
TG REQ processed.
$1F COPY MODE (SSI ONLY) LOOP

It blinks when IP interval
timer is being operated.
PLAY

It is lit ON when playing AUTO
PBK DS5 VOICE from patient speaker.
REC
TALK It is lit ON when playing AUTO
VOICE from OC speaker.

It is lit ON when recording AUTO
It is lit ON when the Dual Port RAM, which is used to VOICE.
communicate between CPW and micro processor that
controls MFC I/F and KB I/F, is busy.

It is lit ON when an Operator is
talking to a patient.

DS6 All LEDs are turned OFF when a
patient is talking to an Operator.

REV 0 2228782
4-2 LED DESCRIPTION FOR ZJ
4-2-1 MFC CTL3

Eight LEDs (B0 to B7) are provided on MFC CTL ASSY. These indicate the operating status of MFC CTL as follows:
%&)-)1).- )1
+)-*)-'
51)-'2)0(%$

0 )0 .4%/.-
.1 #.,,2-)#!1)-' 1. . . .4%/ 1.

.,,2-)#!1)-' 1. . . .4%/ 1.
.,,2-)#!1)-' 1. .4%/.-
.1 #.,,2-)#!1)-' 1.
.
. .4%/ 1.

.,,2-)#!1)-' 1.
. . .4%/ 1.
.,,2-)#!1)-' 1.
.4%/.-
.1 #.,,2-)#!1)-' 1. . . .4%/ 1.

.,,2-)#!1)-' 1. . . .4%/ 1.
.,,2-)#!1)-' 1. .4%/.-
.1 #.,,2-)#!1)-' 1. . . .4%/ 1.

.,,2-)#!1)-' 1. . . .4%/ 1.
.,,2-)#!1)-' 1. .4%/.-

1. .01 .& #.--%#1%$ 1. (%0% !/% !3!)+!"+% 4(%- .-% )0 0(!/%$
"%14%%- !-$ 0

.01 20)-'

.-% /%%

REV 0 2228782
4-2-2 FMP1

8 3"342
)&2& *-%*$"3&2 3)& /.5&14/ 2&04&-$& 23"342 )&2&
$)"-(& '1., 3. ++ 2 "1& +*3 "3 /.5&1

.- .1,"+ 23"342 *2 *3 .- 23"342 *-%*$"3&2 .1

%&3"*+2 1&'&1 3. 723&, *"(-.23*$2 &$3*.- 9
!

42 11.1
3 *2 +*3 .- 5)&- #42 &11.1 .$$412 .1 5"3$) %.( 3*,&1 ./&1"3&2
.1,"++7 &63*-(4*2)&%
"+3
3 *2 +*3 .- 5)&- *2 *- 3)& 23"342 3 *2 "+2. +*3 .- "3
/.5&1.- .1,"++7 &63*-(4*2)&%

&2&3
3 *2 +*3 .- "3 /.5&1.- .1 ,"-4"+ 1&2&3 .1,"++7
&63*-(4*2)&%
427

3 *2 +*3 .- 5)&- .- *2 *- 42& 24"++7
&63*-(4*2)&%


REV 0 2228782
4-2-3 FMP2
OWN (DMAC BUSY)

OWN It is lit on when DMAC on FMP2 is in use. Usually
HDC extinguished.
OPN
FDC HDC (HDC DMA BUSY)
It is lit on during DMA from/to HDC. Usually extinguished.
OPN (Open Cable Detect)

It is lit on when FMP2 disconnects all control signals due to
AC FAIL signal. Normally extinguished.
FDC (FDC DMA Busy)

It is lit on during DMA from/to FDC. Usually extinguished.
ILLUSTRATION

REV 0 2228782
4-2-4 DMP4

;
+(4( ,/',&$5(4 5+( 108(361 4(26(/&( 45$564 +(4(
&+$/*( )30. 50 -- 4 $3( -,5 $5
108(30/ 03.$- 5$564 ,4 ,5 45$564 ,/',&$5(4

03 '(5$,-4 3()(3 50 :45(. ,$*/045,&4 (&5,0/
# "! !

5 ,4 -,5 0/ 8+(/ $3'8$3( 8$5&+ '0* 5,.(3 01(3$5(4
03.$--: (95,/*6,4+('

5 ,4 -,5 0/ 8+(/ ! ,4 ,/ 5$564 5 ,4 $-40 -,5 0/ $5
108(30/ 03 .$/6$- 3(4(5 03.$--: (95,/*6,4+('

! %64 (3303
5 ,4 -,5 0/ 8+(/ %64 (3303 0&&634 '63,/* ! $&&(44
%64 (3303
5 ,4 -,5 0/ 8+(/ %64 (3303 0&&634 '63,/* $&&(44
!
5 ,4 -,5 0/ 8+(/ ! ,446(4 $''3(44 4530%( 4,*/$-
; /5(33615 (7(- 5$564
+(4( ,/',&$5( 5+( ,/5(33615 -(7(- ,/165 50 ! 03.$--:
(95,/*6,4+('
!

REV 0 2228782
4-2-5 OVL2
OVL (Overlay Select Signal)

OVL It is lit on when the following devices on OVL are accessed.
I3 ACRTC, OVERLAY MEMORY, CONTROL REGISTERS,
I4 VSC, SCREEN BUFFER
DRQ I3 (ACRTC Interrupt Signal)
It is lit on when ACRTC issues the interrupt.
I4 (Vertical Sync. Signal)

It is lit on by Vertical Sync. Signal from VSC.
DREQ (DMA Request Signal)

It is lit on when ACRTC assert the Request signal of DMA
transfer to Overlay memory.

1. ACRTC - Advanced CRT Controller.
2. VSC - Video System Controller.
ILLUSTRATION

REV 0 2228782
4-2-6 IFB2
VSC (Video System Controller)

It is lit on when DMP accesses the VSC registers.
MWR (Memory Write)

It is lit on when display FPU writes into Image Memory.
MRD (Memory Read)

It is lit on when display FPU reads from Image Memory.
VSC
LUT (Look Up Table)
MWR It is lit on when display FPU accesses to LUT.
MRD
LUT RVS (Reverse)
RVS It is lit on when video signal is reversed (white - Black).
OVL
IMG
OVL (Overlay)
(Not used) It is lit on when the overlay plane is displayed.
IMG (Image)
It is lit on when the image display is displayed.
ILLUSTRATION

REV 0 2228782
4-2-7 FCP2A

- $, %$- (' 0# ' -# ,2,- & ,-+-, .) (+&%%2 %$- ('

- $, %$- (' &(& '-+$%2 0# ' ,, , -#
(+&%%2 1-$'".$,#

- $'$- ,
%02, 1-$'".$,#
'- ++.)- *. ,- -(

- $, %$- &(& '-+$%2 0# ' $'- ++.)-, -( (+&%%2
1-$'".$,#
'- ++.)- *. ,- -(
- $, %$- &(& '-+$%2 0# ' $'- ++.)-, -( '(-# +
(+&%%2 1-$'".$,#
'- ++.)- %"

- $, %$- &(& '-+$%2 0# ' (+ '(-# + $'- ++.)- -(
(+&%%2 1-$'".$,#

- $, %$- 0# ' , ', -# ,$"'% -( (+&%%2
1-$'".$,#
/$ .,2
- $, %$- 0# ' (+ $, ., (+&%%2 1-$'".$,#

*. ,- +(&
(- ., - $, ,%$"#-%2 %$- 0# ' -# ,2,- & ,-+-, .) (+&%%2 %$- ('
,%$"#-%2
!+(&

- $, ,%$"#-%2 %$- 0# ' -# ,2,- & ,-+-, .) (+&%%2 %$- ('
,%$"#-%2


REV 0 2228782
4-2-8 FCP3B
FPU No. (FPU Number)

FPU No. It indicates FPU No. Always extinguished.
EXT
CPU
CXY EXT (External Memory)
It is lit ON when the additional memory is provided.
CPU (Access From CPU)

It is lit ON when CPU accesses the Main Data Memory.
Normally extinguished.
CXY (Access From FPU)

It is lit ON when FPU accesses the Main Data Memory.
Normally lit ON.
ILLUSTRATION

REV 0 2228782
4-2-9 FMD
LOC (Location of Mapping)

LOC It indicates the memory location of FMD as follows.
SA
CPU

CXY
LOWER Extinguished OFF
UPPER Lit ON ON
SA (FCP3 Memory)
It indicates the capacity of FCP3 memory as follows. Always
extinguished.

2MW (8MB) Extinguished OFF

4MW (16MB) Lit ON ON
CPU (Access From CPU)

It is lit ON when CPU accesses the FMD Memory. Normally
extinguished.
CXY (Access From FPU)

It is lit ON when FPU accesses the Main Data Memory.
Normally lit ON.
ILLUSTRATION

REV 0 2228782
4-2-10 BPU
MSTR (Master)
MSTR It indicates which FPU is master. Always extinguished.
DA-A
DA-A (Device Address, FPU# A)
DA-B Not used. Normally extinguished.
SEL
DA-B (Device Address, FPU# B)
PMBSY Not used. Normally extinguished.
DUAL
CIRC SEL (Select)
It is lit on when FPU selects the device on BPU.
BPRUN It is blinking during Back Projection.
PMBSY (Pixel Memory Busy)
It is lit on when Pixel Memory in BPU is accessed. It is blinking
during Back Projection. Usually lit on slightly.
DUAL (Dual FPU)
It is lit on when dual FPUs operates for reconstruction.
Always extinguished.
CIRC (Circle)
It is always lit on.
BPRUN (Back Projection Run)

It is blinking during reconstruction.
ILLUSTRATION

REV 0 2228782
4-2-11 PDC

0 '/ ('0 3&#* /#.'( "0 '/ 0.*/$#..#" 0+ 0+1!&
,*#( +.)((5 #40'*%1'/&#"
0 '/ ('0 3&#* /#.'( "0 '/ .#!#'2#" $.+) 0+1!&
,*#( +.)((5 #40'*%1'/&#"
0 '/ ('0 3&#* /#.'( "0 '/ 0.*/$#..#" 0+
+.)((5 #40'*%1'/&#"
+0 /#" 0 '/ ('0 3&#* /#.'( "0 '/ .#!#'2#" $.+)
+0 /#" +.)((5 #40'*%1'/&#"

0 '/ ('0 3&#* 1/ #..+. '/ "#0#!0#" "1.'*% !!#// 0+

0 '/ ('0 3&#* '/ '* 001/ 0 '/ (/+ ('0 0
,+3#.6+* +. )*1( .#/#0 +.)((5 #40'*%1'/&#"

&#/# '*"'!0# 0&# ,+3#.61, /#-1#*!# /001/ &#/#
!&*%# $.+) 0+ (( / .# ('0 0 ,+3#.6+*
+.)( /001/ '/ +. "#0'( /## 0 #!0'+*


REV 0 2228782
4-2-12 FPA2 (Option)
(Lit ON) (Extinguished)

CPSEL Access from CPU to DM Access No Access
XSEL Access (Read) from FPU to DM by MAX Access No Access
YSEL Access (Read or Write) from FPU to DM by MAY Access No Access
CPSEL
XSEL GM1SEL Access (Read or Write) from i860_1 to GM1 Access No Access
YSEL GM2SEL Access (Read or Write) from i860_2 to GM2 Access No Access
GM1SEL DM1SEL Access (Read or Write) from i860_1 to DM1 Access No Access
DM2SEL Access (Read or Write) from i860_2 to DM2 Access No Access
GM2SEL
RESET Reset bit status of RST/DMM register Reset bit=1 Reset bit=0
DM1SEL
IFLG1 FLAG bit status of FLAG1 register FLAG bit=1 FLAG bit=0
DM2SEL
RESET IFLG2 FLAG bit status of FLAG2 register FLAG bit=1 FLAG bit=0
DMS1 DMSEL bit status of DMS1 register DMSEL bit=1 DMSEL bit=0
DMS2 DMSEL bit status of DMS2 register DMSEL bit=1 DMSEL bit=0
HLD1 HOLD bit status of HOLD1 register HOLD bit=1 HOLD bit=0
HLD2 HOLD bit status of HOLD2 register HOLD bit=1 HOLD bit=0
HLDA1 HOLDA bit status of HOLD1 register HOLDA bit=1 HOLDA bit=0
HLDA2 HOLDA bit status of HOLD2 register HOLDA bit=1 HOLDA bit=0
IFLG1
IFLG2
DMS1
DMS2
HLD1
HLD2
HLDA1
HLDA2
ILLUSTRATION

REV 0 2228782
4-3 LED DESCRIPTION FOR QJ, QJ–BASE, QJ–HLT, ZJ–ADV, ZJ
4-3-1 SCSI
TEST
It is lit on during the test execution.
LED
7 ERROR
It is lit on when an error occurs.
6
5
TEST PHASE
4 These LEDs indicate the phase of a test.
3
2
1 TEST NO.
These LEDs indicate the test No. being currently executed.
0

REV 0 2228782
4-3-2 ISC
( ( , #& ( &!" ,

( ' ( +" '" ' &* #" ( &-
!" %)$!"( &!" #& '" ' &*
#" ( #!!)"(#" %)$!"( #!
( &&& ((

( ' ( +" '" ' &* #" (

&!" %)$!"( &!" #& '" ' '"(
#" ( #!!)"(#" %)$!"( #!

"" "(#&
( ' ( +" '" ' &* #" ( &!-
#( ' " %)$!"( &!" #& '" ' '"( #"
( #!!)"(#" %)$!"( #!

( ' ( +" ( ','(! ' &'( #& ( &'(& &'(
#" ( #& ' $&#&!

&( !#&, ''
)',
( ' ( +" & #!!)"(#" $(&
#)$, #"#&
#&

( &!" ,
( ' ( +" ( '& "" ' '( '
&!" )'" $ '+(
( &!" ,

( ' ( +" ( '& "" ' '( '

&!" )'" $ '+(

( ( , #& ( &!" ,
#( ' ( ' ( +" '" ' &* #" ( &-
!" %)$!"( &!" #& '" ' &*
#" ( #!!)"(#" %)$!"( #!
( &&& ((

( ' ( +" '" ' &* #" (
&!" %)$!"( &!" #& '" ' '"(
#" ( #!!)"(#" %)$!"( #!
"" "(#&
( ' ( +" '" ' &* #" ( &!-
" %)$!"( &!" #& '" ' '"( #"
( #!!)"(#" %)$!"( #!

REV 0 2228782
4-3-3 ODC2 (Option)
STATUS LED
STATUS These indicate, the status of ODC2 test specified by test SW on
ODC 2.
FULL, EMP
These LED indicate the status of the FIFO buffer.
• “FULL” is lit ON when the FIFO is full.
• “EMP” is lit ON when the FIFO is empty.
(Not used)
FULL
EMP CRC (Cyclic Redundancy Check)
It is lit ON when CRC error occurs during reading data.
CRC
CEN CEN (CRC Enable)
BEN It is lit ON when CRC is generated during writing data or when
CRC is checked during reading data.
BEN (Buffer Enable)

It is lit ON during transferring 512 byte data.

REV 0 2228782
4-3-4 MTC (Option)
FULL, HALF, EMP

These indicate number of data stored in 8 Kbyte FIFO One of
Three is lit ON according to the followings.
FULL : 8 Kbyte
FULL HALF : 4 K ~ 8 Kbyte
HALF EMP : 0 byte
EMP
(Not used) INTR (Interrupt)
It is lit ON when interruption to MPU occurs. (e.g., DMA
INTR completion, command packet receipt, bus error)
DMA DMA (Direct Memory Access)
It is lit ON during DMA on MTC.
(Not used)
FAIL FAIL (Device Fail)
It is lit ON when MT unit power is turned off or control cable is
not connected.
T3
2
T3 ~ 0 (Test Status)
1 Not used. Normally all LEDs are extinguished.
0

REV 0 2228782
4-3-5 ETC (Option)

Refer to Section 6, ETC Board Test.

blank 2228782

REV 0 2228782
SECTION 5 – SCSI BOARD TEST
This section describes the self–test function of the SCSI board. The test is called up by setting the Test mode switch on
the SCSI board. The tests can be performed with or without an external terminal display (Terminal or Non–terminal
mode); the test items of either mode are identical.
5-1 TEST MODE SWITCH
ON B–8A
’1’
TEST
’0’
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
LSB
TEST NO. [00H – 0DH]
MSB
YMON
TERMINAL
LSB
TEST MODE [00 (H) – 03 (H)]
MSB
27A1–TEST MODE SWITCH
ILLUSTRATION 5–1
The Test mode switch is described below:
5-1-1 Test Mode
TABLE 5–1
TEST MODE
CODE MODE DESCRIPTION
0H TEST SKIP THE TESTS ARE NOT EXECUTED.
1H SINGLE TEST PERFORMS THE TESTS ONCE.
2H UNTIL ERROR CONTINUES TO PERFORM THE TESTS UNTIL AN ERROR OCCURS.
3H CONTINUE CONTINUES TO PERFORM THE TESTS REGARDLESS OF ERROR OCCURRENCES.

REV 0 2228782
5-1 TEST MODE SWITCH (continued)
5-1-2 Terminal
TABLE 5–2
TERMINAL
CODE MODE DESCRIPTION
0H NON–TERMINAL PERFORMS THE TESTS WITHOUT USING A TERMINAL DISPLAY
1H TERMINAL PERFORMS THE TESTS, USING A TERMINAL DISPLAY
5-1-3 YMON
When this bit is set “ON”, the YMON (YMS monitor) program contained on the SCSI board is called up. This bit set
precedes the Test mode set.
5-1-4 Test No.

The Test No. bits are used to select a test item, when the non–terminal mode is selected. The test items are listed in
the following table:
WARNING!
IF YOU PERFORM ANY OF THE TESTS AH ~ CH, THE DATA ON THE OPTICAL DISK (OR
MAGNETIC OPTICAL DISK) WILL BE LOST.

REV 0 2228782
5-1 TEST MODE SWITCH (continued)
TABLE 5–3
TEST ITEMS
CODE DESCRIPTION
(TEST NO.)
0H THIS TEST CONSISTS OF THE FOLLOWING 1H ~ 9H TESTS; THIS TEST EXECUTES THE 1H TEST THROUGH
THE 9H TEST CONSECUTIVELY.
1H MPU BUS ERROR TEST
2H RAM READ/WRITE TEST
3H TIMER TEST
4H SBI REGISTER READ/WRITE TEST
5H BLOCK BUFFER READ/WRITE TEST
6H DUAL PORT RAM READ/WRITE TEST
7H DMA COUNTER READ/WRITE TEST
8H DMA TEST
9H SCSI REGISTER READ/WRITE TEST
AH OD READ/WRITE #1 TEST
BH OD READ/WRITE #2 TEST
CH OD WRITE
DH OD READ & COMPARE
EH (RESERVED)
FH (RESERVED)

REV 0 2228782
5-2 TEST RESULTS

The selected test will be executed, by powering on or resetting the operator console. Under the non–terminal mode,
the test will be executed right after power on or reset, and the test results can be known with the status LEDs on the
SCSI board.
The meaning of the status LEDs is described below (the following descriptions only apply during the test mode):
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
LSB
TEST NO.
MSB
LSB
TEST PHASE
MSB
ERROR
TEST
STATUS LED
ILLUSTRATION 5–2
(a) TEST
This LED comes on during the test execution, and goes off after the test completion.
(b) ERROR
This LED comes on when an error occurs.
(c) TEST NO.

The LEDs tell the test No. being currently executed. The test No. will remain if an error occurs (except for the
Continue test mode).
(d) TEST PHASE

The two LEDs show the test phase of a test (a test consists of some steps). When an error occurs, the test phase
information will remain, so you can know on which phase the error occurred (during the Continue test mode,
however, the information will not be kept). The LEDs will show ‘0’ when the test finishes without an error. The
test phases for each test are described in the following table:

REV 0 2228782
5-2 TEST RESULTS (continued)
TABLE 5–4
TEST PHASE DESCRIPTIONS
TEST NO. TEST PHASE DESCRIPTION
1H 0 (NO CHANGE)
2H 0 INITIALIZE
3 CHECK
0 TEST COMPLETION WITHOUT AN ERROR
3H 0 (NO CHANGE)
4H 0 (NO CHANGE)
5H 0 INITIALIZE
3 CHECK
6H 0 INITIALIZE
3 CHECK
7H 0 (NO CHANGE)
8H 0 (NO CHANGE)
9H 0 (NO CHANGE)
AH 0 INITIALIZE
1 WRITE (BLK ” OD)
2 READ (OD ” BLK)
3 VERIFY
BH 0 INITIALIZE
1 WRITE (MRX ” OD)
2 READ (OD ” MRX)
3 VERIFY
CH 0 INITIALIZE
1 WRITE (BLK ” OD)
DH 0 INITIALIZE
2 READ (OD ” BLK)
3 VERIFY

blank 2228782

REV 0 2228782
SECTION 6 – ETC BOARD TEST
The ETC test programs contain the following:
D ETC POWER–ON TEST
D ETHERNET ADDRESS VERIFICATION
Note
Each test for the ETC does not depend on OC self–diagnostics test (Power–ON/Off–Line tests), so
that both self–diagnostics tests of OC and ETC can be performed at the same time.
6-1 ETC POWER–ON TEST
6-1-1 General
The ETC (DC–X Ethernet Controller Interface) Power–ON test program is used for ETC self–diagnostics during the
Power up sequence, and is resident in the ROM on the ETC assy.
During test execution, the test currently running, along with the description/name and status (pass/fail), are identified
in ETC LEDs.
If at any point during the Power–ON Tests an error is encountered, the testing is halted and the error code displays
on the ETC LEDs.

REV 0 2228782
6-1 ETC POWER–ON TEST (continued)
6-1-2 Reading ETC Board LEDs

The lower byte (8 bits) indicates the ETC process, the ETC Power–ON Test and current status in start–up sequence,
and the upper byte (8 bits) indicates the ETC status.
: ( For HARDWARE)
MSB (bit 15)

bit 14
:
CURRENT STATUS (INTERRUPT etc.)
: (See table 6–4)
:
bit 8
bit 7
:
: ETC STATUS ROUTINE
: (See tables 6–1 through 6–3)
bit 1
LSB (bit 0)
ETC BOARD LED CONFIGURATION

ILLUSTRATION 6–1

REV 0 2228782
6-1-3 Running The Test
Switch Setting
Set the DIP switch on the ETC Assy (location S8A) as required according to the following;
D SW8A – Power On test Perform/Skip. Off–Line test setting.
ON
’1’
’0’
1 2 3 4
B0 : Not used. Set to ’0’

B1 : Not used. Set to ’0’
B2 : Off–Line Test : ’0’–Not perform test, ’1’–Perform test,
B3 : Power on Test : ’0’–Perform test, ’1’–Skip test
ETC DIP SWITCH SETTING
ILLUSTRATION 6–2
Note
The DIP SW setting information is read at the moment of system power up or reset. Changing the
DIP switch setting during test execution will have no effect on the test sequence. If you want to
change the parameters, first set the DIP SW accordingly, then press the OC reset switch to start the
test.

REV 0 2228782
Test Sequence
The Illustration 6–3 is a flowchart showing the sequence of the ETC test programs, including Power On Test proce-
dure, and where the results are displayed in LEDs.
SYSTEM TEST PROGRAM ETC LED

ACTIVITY
START $FF–$00
(power on Hardware test
or reset) ETC P–ON
test
STATUS TEST NUMBER

$01–$21
OK
ETC Off–Line
test
STATUS TEST NUMBER
$39–$40
OK
ETC Initializing
&
Starting up
Procedure
STATUS TEST GROUP
$40–$8X
OK
END
SITE $90
PREPARA-
TION
ETC TEST SEQUENCE FLOWCHART
ILLUSTRATION 6–3
Note
The ETC Off–line test can be skipped by changing the ETC Dip switch setting (SW8A). For detail
information of this test, refer to Section 11-2 ETC OFF–LINE TEST.

REV 0 2228782
6-1-4 LED Indication
Test Items
TABLE 6–1
ETC BOARD LED STATUS (POWER–ON/OFF–LINE TEST)
ILLUMINATE FLASHING
DESCRIPTION LED STATUS

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
HARDWARE TEST MODE CHECK

LANCE(ethernet controller LSI) INVALID ACCESS CHECK
DRAM INVALID ACCESS CHECK
DUAL PORT RAM INVALID ACCESS CHECK
ETC CONTROL REGISTER INVALID ACCESS CHECK
INVALID ADDRESS ACCESS CHECK
SRAM ACCESS CHECK(BYTE MODE)
SRAM ACCESS CHECK(WORD MODE)
SRAM ACCESS CHECK(LONG WORD MODE)
COPYING PROGRAM INITIALIZED BY CPU TO SRAM
EXECUTING CPU INITIALIZED PROGRAM
EPROM WRITING CHECK(VERIFY BUS ERROR)
LANCE INTERRUPT CONTROL REGISTER TEST
SYSTEM BUS INTERRUPT CONTROL REGISTER TEST
SERIAL PORT INTERRUPT TEST
SYSTEM BUS INTERRUPT TEST
DRAM/DUAL PORT RAM CONTROL REGISTER TEST
DRAM ACCESS CHECK(BYTE MODE)
DRAM ACCESS CHECK(WORD MODE)
DRAM ACCESS CHECK(LONG WORD MODE)
DUAL PORT RAM ACCESS CHECK
LANCE CONTROL REGISTER TEST
LANCE INTERNAL LOOP BACK TEST
LANCE COLLISION DETECT & RETRY TEST
LANCE EXTERNAL LOOP BACK TEST
INTERNAL BUS ARBITRATION TEST(PART1)
INTERNAL BUS ARBITRATION TEST(PART2)
ETC OFFLINE TEST IS BEING EXECUTED
HARDWARE TEST END

REV 0 2228782
Initializing & Starting–up
TABLE 6–2
ETC BOARD LED STATUS(INITIALIZING & STARTING–UP)
ILLUMINATE FLASHING
LED STATUS
DESCRIPTION
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
SUPERVISOR STACK POINTER IS BEING SET

CREATING “EXCEPTION VECTOR TABLE”
SRAM TEST(ONLY EXECUTED WHEN HARDWARE TEST IS SKIPPED)
DRAM TEST(ONLY EXECUTED WHEN HARDWARE TEST IS SKIPPED)
SETTING INITIALIZATION OF SELECTED OS
OS INITIALIZATION
SERIAL PORT INITIALIZE
SYSTEM CLOCK INITIALIZATION
SYSTEM BUS I/F INITIALIZATION
RT SCOPE POINTER INITIALIZATION IS BEING SET
RT SCOPE INITIALIZATION
RT SCOPE START
BASIC TASK ON ROM IS BEING EXECUTED
MEMORY PARTITION IS BEING SET
QUEUE IS BEING SET
SEMAPHORE FLAG IS BEING MADE
MAIL POST IS BEING CREATED/FIRST MAIL TRANSMIT
ALTERNATE TABLE OR POINTER IS BEING SET
SYSTEM CLOCK START
SYSTEM BUS INTERRUPT OPEN(ETC BOARD IS ABLE TO COMMUNICATE WITH CPU)
OS START(TASK MANAGEMENT START)
SPECIAL ETC DATA IS BEING SET
ETC PREPARATION END/WAITING FOR EXECUTE COMMAND FROM CPU
EXECUTE COMMAND RECEIVED FROM CPU
INFORMING CPU OF EXECUTE COMMAND
REQUESTING I/F MANAGER LOADING FROM CPU
I/F MANAGER LOADING IS BEING EXECUTED
I/F MANAGER LOADING END
I/F MANAGER START
INITIALIZE PROCESS COMPLETED ON ROM
NECESSARY PROGRAM IS BEING LOADED FROM CPU
ETC APPLICATION PROGRAM MANAGEMENT START

REV 0 2228782
Error Code
Refer to the following Error Code Description when the ETC fails during the power–up sequence.
TABLE 6–3
ETC BOARD EXCEPTION LED STATUS
ILLUMINATE FLASHING
LED STATUS
DESCRIPTION
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
ROM LEVEL DOES NOT MATCH PROGRAM LEVEL

CPU PACKET WRITING ERROR
CPU PACKET TRANSMIT ERROR
WORK AREA IS NOT SUFFICIENT
FILE READ ERROR
ANYTHING ELSE FATAL ERROR
IP ADDRESS FOR MYSELF IS NOT SET
ETHERNET ADDRESS IS NOT SET
LANCE INITIATE ERROR
INITIAL ERROR OF MEMORY FOR LANCE
LANCE INITIAL TIMEOUT
BUS ERROR
ADDRESS ERROR
BREACH COMMAND
DIVISION BY ZERO
CHK/CHK2 COMMAND
TRAPcc/TRAPV COMMAND
PRIVILEGE BREACH
EXECUTE TRACE ON INVALID CONDITION
LINE 1010 EMULATOR
LINE 1111 EMULATOR
HARDWARE BREAK POINT ON INVALID CONDITION
PROCESSOR PROTOCOL BREACH
FORMAT ERROR
IN–INITIAL INTERRUPT
STANDBY RAM DESTROYED/ETC SPECIAL DATA IS NOT SET
SPRIUS INTERRUPT(HARDWARE INVALID)
INTERRUPT TO UNDEFINED AUTO VECTOR
UNDEFINED EXCEPTION OCCURRENCE(VECTOR 0 OR 1)
UNDEFINED EXCEPTION OCCURRENCE(VECTOR 16 ~ 23)
UNDEFINED EXCEPTION OCCURRENCE(EXCEPT ABOVE)
UNDEFINED TRAP OCCURRENCE

REV 0 2228782
Error Code (Continued)
TABLE 6–4
ETC BOARD CURRENT LED STATUS
ILLUMINATE FLASHING
LED STATUS
DESCRIPTION
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8
FATAL HARDWARE ERROR

FATAL SOFTWARE ERROR
ETC IS CURRENTLY STOPPED BY FATAL ERROR
WAITING FOR RESPONSE PACKET FROM CPU
WAITING FOR ACK FROM SYSTEM BUS
INTERRUPT FROM LANCE IS CURRENTLY MANAGED
PANIC IN TCP/IP DRIVER
IDLING TASK IS CURRENTLY EXECUTED(FLASHING)

REV 0 2228782
6-2 ETHERNET ADDRESS VERIFICATION

This test is performed to check if the ethernet address data back–uped by the internal battery of the ETC board is
stored without error. If data is destroyed, first check if the internal battery has been consumed. Weak battery can
not back up the ethernet data into the RAM. (Normally for 5 to 10 years, the internal battery can be used without
replacement.)
1. Connect the external terminal display to the CN4 of the ETC board.
2. Set the dip switch (location:S6A) to the $4 position.
ON
’1’
S6A
’0’
1 2 3 4
3. Pull the reset switch of the Operator Console.

The ETC Power–ON test is executed. After approximately 30 seconds, the status LEDs are displayed as follows:
15 8 7 0
4. ETC initial setting screen appears on the terminal. Check if each item is set to the proper value according to
the table below.
Item Entry Example

Manufactured Date 1994/03/03
Manufactured Time 12:34
Serial Number 0012 (Enter the same number as the ETC board.)
Ethernet Address 0C (Enter the number that decodes the serial number (decimal) into the
hexa–decimal.)
5. Enter ‘y’ in response to ‘Are you sure (y/n)?’ to verify that the ETC board initial setting is properly done.
6. Verify that the ETC status LEDs are displayed as follows:
15 8 7 0

blank 2228782

REV 0 2228782
APPENDIX A – EXTERNAL TERMINAL REQUIREMENT
CRT Terminal
Interface: RS 232C
9600 BAUD
8 bit Data, no parity, 1 stop bit
Connecting Cable
RS 232C
25 pin male connector Same as left
PIN NO. Signal PIN NO. Signal

1 (NOT USE) 1 (NOT USE)
2 TXD 2 TXD
3 RXD 3 RXD
4 RTS 4 RTS
5 CTS 5 CTS
6 DSR 6 DSR
7 SIGNAL GND 7 SIGNAL GND
8 DCD 8 DCD
9 ~ 12 (NOT USE) 9 ~ 12 (NOT USE)
13 ~ 19 (NOT USE) 13 ~ 19 (NOT USE)
20 DTR 20 DTR
21 ~ 25 (NOT USE) 21 ~ 25 (NOT USE)
A–1 OPERATOR CONSOLE

blank 2228782
A–2 OPERATOR CONSOLE

REV 0 2228782
TABLE/GANTRY
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION PAGE
SECTION 1 – LED AND SWITCH DESCRIPTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–1

1-1 LED DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–1
1-1-1 TGP Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–1
1-1-2 OGP Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–2
1-1-3 Gantry Servo Amp. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–3
1-2 DIAGNOSTICS DIP SWITCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–5
1-2-1 TGP Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–5
1-2-2 OGP Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–6
SECTION 2 – POWER–ON TEST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–1

2-1 TGP BOARD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–1
2-1-1 Gantry Processor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–1
2-1-2 Table Processor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–4
2-1-3 Management Processor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–7
2-2 OGP BOARD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–8
SECTION 3 – OFF–LINE TEST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–1

3-1 TGP BOARD OFF–LINE TEST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–1
3-1-1 Table Processor I/O Port Status Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–1
3-1-2 Gantry Processor I/O Port Status Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–6
3-1-3 Management Processor I/O Port Status Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–7
3-2 OGP BOARD OFF–LINE TEST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–8
3-2-1 Test Mode Switch (SW3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–9
3-2-2 TGP Test Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–11
3-2-3 Scan Test Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–11
SECTION 4 – SERVO AMP. AND SERVO MOTOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–1

4-1 SWITCH SETTING ON SERVO AMP. CIRCUIT BOARD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–1
4-2 SERVO ALARM AND TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–3
i TABLE/GANTRY
blank 2228782
ii TABLE/GANTRY
REV 0 2228782
SECTION 1 – LED AND SWITCH DESCRIPTIONS
1-1 LED DESCRIPTION
1-1-1 TGP Board

The TGP board has 16 Status LEDs.
ERRM Management Processor detected an error.

(or) Management Processor is in an error condition.
This LED lights up when error (s) occurred on the TGP board.
(e.g.) D RAM Check Error
D ROM Check Error
This error status is kept until TGP power down or TGP reset.
LOOPM Indicates that the interval timer function of the Management Processor is operating. Flashes “ON” and
“OFF” every second cycle during normal Management Processor operation.
MNLM Lights up while the Management Processor executing a manual mode Program.
(ex. While the gantry is rotated using the TGP service switches).
ERRG Signals a Gantry Processor detected error.

(or) that the Gantry Processor itself is in an error condition.
This LED lights up when error (s) occurred in the Gantry Processor System.
(e.g.) D RAM Check Error
D ROM Check Error
D Gantry Azimuth Initialize Error.
This error status is maintained until TGP power down or TGP reset.
LOOPG Indicates that the interval timer function of the Gantry Processor is operating. Flashes “ON” and “OFF”
for every second during normal Gantry Processor operation.
REQG The Gantry Processor is executing a program requested by the Management Processor.
1–1 TABLE/GANTRY
REV 0 2228782
1-1 LED DESCRIPTION (continued)

ERRT Signals a Table Processor detected error.
(or) that the Table Processor itself is in an error condition.
This error status is maintained until TGP power down or TGP reset.
LOOPT Indicates that the interval timer function of the Table Processor is operating. Flashes “ON” and “OFF”
every second cycle during normal Table Processor operation.
REQT The Table Processor is executing a program requested by the Management Processor.
MNLT Lights while the Table Processor executes a manual mode Program.
(ex. While the table is operated up/down using the gantry switches).
SVALM Lights up when the servo Alarm is detected.

The detailed failure mode is displayed by the 7 segment Servo Amp LED.
TBLSTOP Lights up when the TGP loses control of the cradle In/Out operation.
TRIG Display the Trigger pulse to OGP by flashing. Normal operation appears as a solid light due to the high
operation frequency.
XGRDY Lights up when supply of the 550VDC power to XG is enabled.
GSAFE Lights up when the side service switch which detects whether the gantry cover is open is closed. When
closed the gantry is enabled to rotate and the LED is ON (lit).
1-1-2 OGP Board

The OGP board has 7 Status LEDs.
ERRS Scan Processor detected error.
LOOPS Indicates that the interval timer function of the Scan Processor is operating. Flashes “ON” and “OFF” at
0.5 second cycles during normal Scan Processor operation.
REQS The Scan Processor is executing a program requested by the Management Processor on the TGP Board.
EXPCMD EXPCMD signal monitor
DENTG DENTG signal monitor
RINGS Signals that the Scan Processor has detected an error between Workstation and
Scan Processor communication.
TEST Lights up while the Scan Processor Test mode sequence is in progress.
1–2 TABLE/GANTRY
REV 0 2228782
1-1-3 Gantry Servo Amp.
Seven–segment LED
The Gantry Servo Amp. contains a 7 segment LED which indicates Servo Amp. failure modes.
O.C OVER CURRENT:

Indicates over current in output circuit
OVER LOAD:
O.L
Indicates motor over load
OVER HEAT:
O.H
Indicates overheating of the Power Transistor
F.E CIRCUIT BREAKER OFF:

Indicates that the input circuit breaker has been tripped
DYNAMIC BRAKE FUNCTION FAIL:

P.E Indicates dynamic break function failure.
S.E SPEED ERROR:

Indicates excessive motor speed (120% of maximum speed)
V.E VOLTAGE ERROR (POWER FAIL):

Indicates input voltage failure (85% or less than normal operational voltage)
COMMUTATION ERROR:
C.E
Indicates commutation signal failure
(No Display) Power is not applied or Normal operating status
1–3 TABLE/GANTRY
REV 0 2228782
Other LEDs
The Gantry Servo Amp. also contains 5 LED’s which indicate the following conditions as shown in table 1–1.
TABLE 1–1
SERVO AMP. LED
LED COLOR DESCRIPTION
INDICATES THAT SERVO AMP. IS READY TO

RGSO GREEN OPERATE WHEN LIT
R.S GREEN NOT USED FOR CT SYTEC/PROSPEED SERIES

INDICATES EXTERNAL RESET OF SERVO AMP
+15 GREEN INDICATES THAT +15V POWER IS OK WHEN LIT
–15 GREEN INDICATES THAT –15V POWER IS OK WHEN LIT
NOT USED FOR CT SYTEC/PROSPEED SERIES

C.L
GREEN INDICATES THAT EXTERNAL CURRENT LIMIT OR
(T.H)
TORQUE HOLD OPERATION IS WORKING
1–4 TABLE/GANTRY
REV 0 2228782
1-2 DIAGNOSTICS DIP SWITCH
1-2-1 TGP Board

Tables 1–2, 1–3 and 1–4 show the functions of the TGP DIAG. DIP Switches.
TABLE 1–2
DIAG. DIP SWITCH (GANTRY PROCESSOR)
SW. No. DESCRIPTION
G1 Not Used.
G2 ON : Disables Gantry Rotation Check and Initialize.

G3 Not Used.
G4 Positioning Light 0 deg./270 deg. mode (Not used for P9183XA TGP board)
G5 Not Used.
G6
Gantry Processor off–line test selection.
G7
G8 Disables Gantry Processor ROM Check.
Disables Gantry Processor watchdog timer function.
TABLE 1–3
DIAG. DIP SWITCH (TABLE PROCESSOR)
SW. No. DESCRIPTION
T1 Disables Scan status check.

Disables Automatic –150 Table height stop
Disables Automatic zero deg. tilt stop.
T2 ON : Set the Table down limit to –570 mm.
T3 Disables the interlock function for Table up/down – Gantry tilt.
T4 ON : Cradle In limit short mode.
T5 ON : When P9155UU cradle motor driver is used.
T6
Table Processor off–line test selection.
T7
T8 Disables Table Processor ROM check.
Disables Table Processor watchdog timer function.
1–5 TABLE/GANTRY
REV 0 2228782
1-2 DIAGNOSTICS DIP SWITCH (continued)
TABLE 1–4
DIAG. DIP SWITCH (MANAGEMENT PROCESSOR)
SW. No. DESCRIPTION
M1 Not Used.
M2 ON : Disables the Communication Pipe function.

Disables the buffer function for communication commands and status.
M3 Not Used.
M4 Not Used.
M5 ON : Displays MA & KV values on the Gantry Display.
M6
Management Processor off–line test selection.
M7
M8 Disables Management Processor ROM check.
Disables Management Processor watchdog timer function.
1-2-2 OGP Board

Table 1–5, 1–6, or 1–7 shows the function of OGP DIAG. DIP Switches.
TABLE 1–5
DIAG. DIP SWITCH (ROM: 2121676)
SW. No. DESCRIPTION
S1 Test selection. (Normally set to OFF)
S2 Test selection. (Normally set to O FF)

S3 Test Mode selection. (ON:Scan Test Mode, OFF:TGP Test Mode)
(Normally set to OFF)
S4 Firmware selection
S5 Firmware selection
S6 Detector Selection (OFF: SS type, ON: Xe type)
S7 System selection (ProSpeed – Legato)
S8 OFF: Disables Scan Processor (the processor on the OGP Board) watchdog
timer function. (Normally set to ON)
1–6 TABLE/GANTRY
REV 0 2228782
1-2 DIAGNOSTICS DIP SWITCH (continued)
TABLE 1–6
DIAG. DIP SWITCH (ROM: 2107557)
SW. No. DESCRIPTION
S1 Test selection. (Normally set to ON)

S3 Firmware selection.
S4 Gantry selection (ProSpeed – Legato)
S5 OFF : Scan Test Mode (Normally set to ON)
S6 OFF : TGP Test Mode (Normally set to ON)
S7 OFF : XG Test Mode (Normally set to ON)
S8 OFF : Disables Scan Processor (the processor on the OGP Board)
watchdog timer function. (Normally set to ON)
TABLE 1–7
DIAG. DIP SWITCH (ROM: P9183ZP/P9183ZQ)
SW. No. DESCRIPTION

S3 Not defined. (Set to ON)
S4 Not defined. (Set to ON)
S5 OFF : Scan Test Mode (Normally set to ON)
S6 OFF : TGP Test Mode (Normally set to ON)
S7 OFF : XG Test Mode (Normally set to ON)
S8 OFF : Disables Scan Processor (the processor on the OGP Board)
watchdog timer function. (Normally set to ON)
1–7 TABLE/GANTRY
blank 2228782
1–8 TABLE/GANTRY
REV 0 2228782
SECTION 2 – POWER–ON TEST
The TGP contains three Micro Processors. (i.e., Gantry Processor (GP), Table Processor (TP) and Management
Processor (MP) )
The OGP contains one Micro Processor (called Scan processor).
These processors execute the following programs independently when power is applied or reset occurs.
2-1 TGP BOARD
2-1-1 Gantry Processor
RAM Check
The Gantry Processor performs memory READ/WRITE response checks for the micro processor internal RAM and
external RAM.
D PD78310 internal RAM (Location U6R)

ADDRESS FE00 ~ FEDF (Addresses FEF0 ~ FEFF are used as an internal register area
and are not checked.)
D RAM (HM6716P) (Location U7M)

ADDRESS C000 ~ C7FF
D Dual Port RAM (7130) (Location U6L)

ADDRESS D000 ~ D1FF
D3C0 ~ D3FB
This RAM Check is executed when power is applied or reset occurs.
If the Gantry Processor detects an error, it displays the error via the LEDs as follows:
ERRG, LOOPG, and REQG LEDs ON.
If the test passes, LOOPG LED flashes on and off.
2–1 TABLE/GANTRY
REV 0 2228782
2-1 TGP BOARD (continued)
ROM Check
The Gantry Processor performs a ROM data Sum Check after the RAM Check.
D Sum Check Address

ADDRESS 0 ~ BFFF
(One byte of dummy data is calculated so that during the data sum check, the Check sum
value will always total FF. This data is stored in address 00FF.)
If the Gantry Processor detects an error, it indicates the error on the LEDs as follows:
ERRG, and REQG LEDs ON.
If successful, LOOPG LED blinks.
Gantry Rotation Check and Initialize

The Gantry Processor performs the Gantry Rotation Check and azimuth position initialization after completion of the
ROM Check. The following chart shows initializing operations:
2–2 TABLE/GANTRY
REV 0 2228782
START
CHECK TGP MANUAL

SWITCH STATUS
INDICATES STATUS
VIA LEDS ERRG AND NO
LOOPG ALTERNATE SYS OR MNL
“ON” AND “OFF”. POSITION?
YES
GANTRY DOES NOT

ROTATE NO
BY SAFETY IS ROTATION
INTERLOCK. ENABLED?
YES
ROTATE GANTRY IN
CW DIRECTION.
INITIALIZE AZIMUTH
POSITION COUNTER
BY GPLS1 NO GANTRY RESPONSE
GANTRY
ROTATES? ERROR.
INDICATE STATUS ON
ERRG. LED
YES
INITIALIZE
COMPLETED
IN 25SEC?
AZIMUTH EN- NO GANTRY RESPONSE
YES CODE DE- ERROR.
TECTS INDICATE STATUS ON
PULSE? LED ERRG.
STOP GANTRY AT
HOME (0_). YES
GANTRY ROTATES
AT 15SEC/ROT
INDICATE STATUS ON
ERRG. LED
GANTRY INITIALIZE OPERATION

ILLUSTRATION 2–1
2–3 TABLE/GANTRY
REV 0 2228782

If the Gantry Processor detects an error during the Rotation check and Initialization, the Gantry Processor Stops
Gantry rotation and displays an error via the LEDs and the Gantry Processor hangs up. (stops operations)
1. SERVO ALARM
D ERRG LED “ON”
D SVALM LED “ON”.
2. GANTRY NOT ROTATING
D ERRG LED “ON”
3. GANTRY OVER SPEED
D ERRG LED “ON”
2-1-2 Table Processor
RAM Check
The Table Micro Processor performs a memory READ/WRITE response check on the micro processor internal RAM
and external RAM.
D mPD78310 internal RAM (Location U3R)

ADDRESS FE00 ~ FEDF
D RAM (HM6176P) (Location U3M)

ADDRESS C000 ~ C7FF
D Dual Port RAM (IDT7130) (Location U3L)

ADDRESS E000 ~ E1FF
E3C0 ~ E3FB
If the Table Processor detects an error, it displays the error via the LEDs as follows:
ERRT, LOOPT, REQT and MNLT LEDs ON.
If successful, LOOPT LED flashes on and off.
2–4 TABLE/GANTRY
REV 0 2228782
ROM Check
The Table Processor performs a ROM data Sum Check after the RAM Check.
D Sum Check Address 0 ~ BFFF
(ROM Sum data is in 00FF)
If the Table Processor detects an error, it displays the error via the LEDs as follows:
ERRT, REQT and MNLT LED’s ON.
If successful, LOOPT LED blinks.
Display Check
The Table Processor performs the display check program after the ROM Check.
Table 2–1 lists the Gantry Panel Switch and Gantry Display LED display check patterns.
2–5 TABLE/GANTRY
REV 0 2228782
TABLE 2–1
GANTRY DISPLAY CHECK PATTERN
GANTRY DISPLAY GANTRY SWITCH
Ptn FWD BWD D8 D7 D6 Posn Hgn D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 UP DOWN IN
10
11
2–6 TABLE/GANTRY
REV 0 2228782
2-1-3 Management Processor
RAM Check
The Management Processor performs memory READ/WRITE response checks on the micro processor internal RAM
and external RAM.
D mPD78310 internal RAM (Location U3E)

ADDRESS FE00 ~ FEDF (Addresses FEF0 ~ FEFF are used as internal register area
and not be checked.)
D RAM (HM6716P) (Location U3A)

ADDRESS C000 ~ C7FF

ADDRESS D200 ~ D3BF

ADDRESS E200 ~ E3BF
If the Gantry Processor detects an error, it displays the error via the LEDs as follows:
ERRM, LOOPM, REQM and MNLM LEDs ON.
If the test passes, LOOPM LED flashes on and off.
ROM Check
The Management Processor performs the ROM data Sum Check after the RAM Check.
D Sum Check Address

ADDRESS 0 ~ BFFF
(The dummy data is calculated as the Check sum value become FF. And the data stored
in address 00FF.)
If the Gantry Processor detects an error, it indicates the error via the LEDs as follows:
ERRM, REQM and MNLM LEDs ON.
If successful, LOOPM LED flashes on and off.
2–7 TABLE/GANTRY
REV 0 2228782
2-2 OGP BOARD
RAM and ROM Error

The RAM and ROM on the OGP board are checked during power–on or reset. If an error occurs, the following LEDs
light up.
D RAM Error
ERRS and LOOPS LEDs ON
D ROM Error
ERRS LED ON
Processor Lock Up
The following LEDs light up when abnormal status is detected by monitoring interrupts generated every 10.9 ms.
(Except when the WDT test mode is set.)
ERRS, LOOPS, REQS, RINGS, and TEST LEDs ON
Communication Error
The Scan Processor on the OGP board communicates with the Management Processor on the TGP board via the
slip rings. When communication errors occur, the following LEDs light up. Investigate the cause of errors, with the
LED information and error information generated by the Management Processor.
The ERRS LED goes OFF when the X–ray tube rotor starts to rotate. The status of the RINGS LED does not change
until the OGP board is reset.
D Hardware Error during OGP receiving data
ERRS and RINGS LEDs ON
D Timeout during ACK or NACK Communication
ERRS and RINGS LEDs ON
D Three times receiving of NACK, or NACK transmitted
ERRS LED ON
2–8 TABLE/GANTRY
REV 0 2228782
SECTION 3 – OFF–LINE TEST
3-1 TGP BOARD OFF–LINE TEST

The TGP Assembly contains three micro processor systems. (i.e., Gantry Processor(GP), Table Processor(TP) and
Management Processor (MP) )
These Processor systems can execute the OFF-LINE programs used for subsystem Adjustment, Functional Check
and Diagnostics.
Each Processor holds test programs in its own PROM. Execute each Processor’s OFF-LINE TEST program indepen-
dently with the DIAG switches and test switches.
The Micro Processor displays the test results and/or error on the Gantry Display Panel, so it requires a normally oper-
ating TABLE Processor display function. Execute the OFF-LINE TEST program after successful completion of the
TABLE PROCESSOR DISPLAY TEST.
CAUTION
Do NOT perform the Table, Gantry or Management processor OFF–LINE test programs in par-
allel.
3-1-1 Table Processor I/O Port Status Check

1. Set T6 of the TABLE PROCESSOR DIAG. SWITCH to the “ON” position. (See Illustration 3–1)
2. Press the”Reset” switch of the TGP Board, or switch ON the Control switch at the gantry rear base if it is in the
OFF position.
3. The gantry display shows the Test Number (000) and cradle position value in decimal form.
EXAMPLE VALUE
3–1 TABLE/GANTRY
REV 0 2228782
3-1 TGP BOARD OFF–LINE TEST (continued)

4. To select the test program, press the TEST switch on TGP Board. The Test Number increases each time you
press the test switch until it reaches .
The Test Number loops back to after .
(i.e., Loop 000 ~ 020)
Use Test Number 000 ~ 002 to monitor the CRADLE POSITION, TABLE HEIGHT and TILT ANGLE.
(i.e., AD CONVERTER VALUE)
Use Test Number 014 ~ 019 to check the cradle movement at various speed settings.
In Test Number 020, count values of the cradle encoder pulses per one gantry rotation are displayed on the gantry
display during helical scans.
Table 3–1 shows the bit assignment of the I/O ports.
Note
Test No. 003 through 013 are not available with the current revision of the off–line test.
To Exit this Test Mode

Move T6 to the OFF position.
3–2 TABLE/GANTRY
REV 0 2228782
SYS/OFF/MNL
ABT/SVE/FIX
SPD2/SPD1/SPD0
FAST/MID/SLOW
CCW/HOME/CW
TGP BOARD ASSY
RESET
CPU TEST
VR
P0
MANAGEMENT PROCESSOR PG
DIAG. SWITCH
H0
M1 M1 M8
HG
ON T0
V ZERO TG
V GAIN
M8
CPU CPU
OFF
T1 T8 G1 G8
TABLE PROCESSOR GANTRY PROCESSOR

DIAG. SWITCH DIAG. SWITCH
ON T1
ON
G1
T8
G8
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
DIAG. SWITCHES
ILLUSTRATION 3–1
3–3 TABLE/GANTRY
REV 0 2228782
TABLE 3–1
TABLE PROCESSOR OFF–LINE TEST
TEST TEST DISPLAY & OPERATION

NO.
CRADLE POSITION Zero Position ; Cradle Mechanical Out limit.
000 0.5mm/digit. (e.g.) Display 0100 !50mm away from Zero Position
Display Cradle
Absolute Position CRADLE LIMIT POSITION
in decimal form.
IN LIMIT OUT LIMIT
3050 10
(1525mm) (5mm)
SCANNABLE RANGE
2990 70
(1495mm) (35mm)
D If the cradle is within the range of 0 ~ 30 (0mm ~ 15mm),

the table can be lowered to –600mm.
TABLE HEIGHT Zero Position ; Table Height –605mm from ISO center.
001
(Mechanical lowest position from ISO center is –610mm.)
Display Table 0.5mm/digit. (e.g.) Display 0010 ! Table Height –600mm
Height in 1210 ! Table Height 0mm
decimal form. Up direction (+)
TILT ANGLE Zero Position ; Tilt FWD 25.5 .

002
Display Tilt 0.1 /digit. (e.g.) Display 0005 ! FWD25
Angle in 0255 ! 0
decimal. 0505 ! BWD 25
BWD direction (+)
Speed Settings ; 1.25 to 55.0 in increments of 1.25 (44 settings in total)

CRADLE MOTION (Unit: mm/sec)
014
Press both In and Fast buttons simultaneously to increase the speed
Move Cradle at settings; press both Out and Fast buttons simultaneously to decrease
various speeds the speed settings.
Display of Speed Settings ; 13 (1.25mm/sec) to 550 (55.0mm/sec)
Operation ; Press the In or Out button to move the cradle in the In or Out
direction.
3–4 TABLE/GANTRY
REV 0 2228782
TABLE 3–1 (CONTINUED)

TABLE PROCESSOR OFF–LINE TEST
TEST TEST DISPLAY & OPERATION

NO.
CRADLE MOTION Speed Settings ; 1.25 to 37.5 in increments of 0.625 (59 settings in total)
015 (Unit: mm/sec)
Move Cradle at vari- See Test 014 for the operation and display.
ous speeds (for 0.8
sec helical scan)
016 (Unit: mm/sec)
ous speeds (for 1
sec helical scan)
017 (Unit: mm/sec)
ous speeds (for 1.5
sec helical scan)
018 (Unit: mm/sec)
ous speeds (for 2
sec helical scan)
019 (Unit: mm/sec)
ous speeds (for 3
sec helical scan)
HELICAL INTER- Display count values of the cradle encoder pulses per one gantry rotation
020 VAL (Home to Home) during helical scans.
0.1mm movement/digit
Display Cradle En- The pulses are not counted during cradle acceleration or deceleration.
coder Pulse Count The test number (020) repeats on and off (light and extinguish) each time
the gantry passes the Home position while the pulses are counted.
TILT ANGLE (A/D) Display digitized values of the tilt angle potentiometer output; according to
021 below:
Display Tilt Angle 0 ∼ 4095
A/D data ← →
FWD BWD
3–5 TABLE/GANTRY
REV 0 2228782
3-1-2 Gantry Processor I/O Port Status Check

1. Set Dip Switch G6 of the GANTRY PROCESSOR DIAG. SWITCH to the “ON” position. (See Illustration 3–1)
2. Press the”Reset” switch of the TGP Board, and switch ON the Control switch at the gantry rear base if it is in
the OFF position.
3. The gantry display shows the Test Number (400) and cradle position value in decimal form.
EXAMPLE VALUE
4. To select the test program, press the TEST switch on the TGP Board. The Test Number increases each time
you press the test switch until it reaches .
(i.e., Loop 400 ~ 414)
Note

Set G6 to the OFF position.
TABLE 3–2
GANTRY PROCESSOR OFF–LINE TEST
TEST TEST DISPLAY

NO.
AZIMUTH POSITION Zero Position ; –180 Position.

400 1/digit.
Available range of the display is 0083 ~ 1462.
(e.g.) Home Position = 0180
Displays the time from Home position to Home position.

GANTRY
401 10msec/digit.
ROTATION
(e.g.) 1sec/rot ! 0100
TIME
3–6 TABLE/GANTRY
REV 0 2228782
3-1-3 Management Processor I/O Port Status Check

1. Set Dip Switch M6 of the GANTRY PROCESSOR DIAG. SWITCH to the “ON” position. (See Illustration 3–1)
2. Press the”Reset” switch on the TGP Board, and switch ON the Control switch at the gantry rear base if it is in
the OFF position.
3. The gantry display shows the Test Number (700) and cradle position value in decimal.
EXAMPLE VALUE
4. To select the test program, press the TEST switch on TGP Board. The Test Number increases each time you
press the test switch until it reaches .
(i.e., Loop 400 ~ 414)
Note

Move M6 to the OFF position.
TABLE 3–3
MANAGEMENT PROCESSOR OFF–LINE TEST
TEST TEST DISPLAY

NO.
OC COMMAND Displays the status of OC command while the Management Processor

700 STATUS DISPLAY are receiving the data.
The display value is given by quadrant notation.
The bit definition of the OC command status is the followings;
bit 7 bit 6 bit 5 bit 4 bit 3 bit 2 bit 1 bit 0

0 Com Tilt Cradle Gantry Apt. XG Scan
Req. Mode Mode Mode Mode Mode Mode
(e.g.) When OC requests Gantry Mode, Aperture Mode and

XG Mode
! 0032
value 0 0 3 2
binary 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 0
bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
3–7 TABLE/GANTRY
REV 0 2228782
3-2 OGP BOARD OFF–LINE TEST

The OGP Board OFF–LINE test is performed by the Scan processor (on OGP).
The OGP OFF–LINE test can be roughly divided into the following two items;
RAM, ROM self check at reset or power up sequence.
Test Mode check by SW2 and SW3.
ROM: 2121676
The Scan processor has two (2) test modes – TGP and Scan.
ROM: 2107557, P9183ZP, P9183ZQ
The Scan processor has three (3) test modes – XG, TGP and Scan.
The test mode is selected using the SW3 Dip switches (See Illustration 3–2).
SW3
S8 S1 SW2 TEST
RESET
OGP BD ASSY
OGP DIP SWITCH AND PUSH SWITCHES

ILLUSTRATION 3–2
3–8 TABLE/GANTRY
REV 0 2228782
3-2 OGP BOARD OFF–LINE TEST (continued)
3-2-1 Test Mode Switch (SW3)
ROM: 2121676
The function of the SW3 is shown in the Illustration 3–3.
SW3
Test
FIRMWARE FIRMWARE Mode TEST 1 TEST 2
WDT System Detector 1 0
Selection
S8 S7 S6 S5 S4 S3 S2 S1
OGP TEST MODE SWITCH
ILLUSTRATION 3–3
Set S3 ~ S1 of SW3 to select the appropriate test mode, and initiate the mode using SW2. (except for WDT function).
S8: WDT
Inhibit the function of the Watch Dog Timer of the Scan Processor. This setting will come into effect only
during reset or power–up sequence .
S3: Test Mode Selection

To select test mode; OFF: TGP Test mode, ON: Scan Test mode
3–9 TABLE/GANTRY
REV 0 2228782
ROM: 2107557, P9183ZP, P9183ZQ

The function of the SW3 is shown in the Illustration 3–4.
SW3
TEST TEST
WDT XG TGP SCAN SELEC- SELEC-
TION TION
S8 S7 S6 S5 S4 S3 S2 S1
OGP TEST MODE SWITCH
ILLUSTRATION 3–4
Set S8 ~ S5 of SW3 to select the appropriate test mode, and initiate the mode using SW2. (except for WDT function).
The normal setting of the SW3 is all ON.
S8: WDT
Inhibit the function of the Watch Dog Timer of the Scan Processor. This setting will come into effect only
during reset or power–up sequence .
S7: XG
Special function mode for the XG (not used for sites)
S6: TGP
Special function mode for the TGP
S5: SCAN
Special function mode for SCAN.
3–10 TABLE/GANTRY
REV 0 2228782
3-2-2 TGP Test Mode

This test mode checks the DAS trigger pulses. In this mode the DAS trigger pulses are counted every time the GPLS2
pulse is detected by the OGP, the counted value being sent to the Operator Console and displayed with letters XG
ERR and APERTURE ERR on the CRT monitor.
1. For ROM: 2121676

Set S3 of the SW3 to OFF, S2 to ON, and S1 to OFF.
For ROM: 2107557, P9183ZP, P9183ZQ
Set S6 and S1 of the SW3 to OFF.
2. Push the SW2 once.
3. Rotate the Gantry manually within 5seconds (For Qj Type Only:1 minute) of pushing the SW2.
4. The count value of the DAS trigger pulses is displayed with APERTURE ERR and XG ERR letters, every time
the OGP receives the GPLS2 pulse.
Normally the following values should be displayed.
for Gantry with Xe Type Detector for Gantry with SS Type Detector
XG ERR 0F6H or 106H or 116H XG ERR FF6H or 007H or 017H
APERTURE ERR 7H APERTURE ERR 8H
5. For ROM: 2121676

Set S3, S2, and S1 of the SW3 to OFF, and press the RESET switch on the OGP board.
For ROM: 2107557, P9183ZP, P9183ZQ
Set S6 and S1 of the SW3 to ON, and press the RESET switch on the OGP board.
3-2-3 Scan Test Mode

This test mode sends the number of spits occurred during the previous X–ray exposure.
1. For ROM: 2121676

Set S3 of the SW3 to ON, S2 to ON, and S1 to OFF.
For ROM: 2107557, P9183ZP, P9183ZQ
Set S5 and S1 of the SW3 to OFF.
2. Push the SW2 once.
The number of spits occurred during the previous HV ON is sent to the Operator Console and displayed with
letters XG ERR when the HV turns OFF. For example, XG ERR 003 indicates that spits occurred three times
during the previous X–ray on time. This operation continues until reset or power–off.
If a spit occurs during a Multi Scan Sequence, even once, the further planned scans are inhibited from being
performed.
3. For ROM: 2121676

Set S3, S2, and S1 of the SW3 to OFF, and press the RESET switch on the OGP board.
For ROM: 2107557, P9183ZP, P9183ZQ
Set S5 and S1 of the SW3 to ON, and press the RESET switch on the OGP board.
3–11 TABLE/GANTRY
blank 2228782
3–12 TABLE/GANTRY
REV 0 2228782
SECTION 4 – SERVO AMP. AND SERVO MOTOR
4-1 SWITCH SETTING ON SERVO AMP. CIRCUIT BOARD

The following illustration shows the location of the dip switch and the setting for the Sytec Synergy.
SERVO AMP. CIRCUIT BOARD
OFF
ON
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
DSW
DIP SWITCH ON SERVO AMP. CIRCUIT BOARD

ILLUSTRATION 4–1
The function of the switch settings and the setting for Sytec Synergy are given in the following table:
TABLE 4–1
SERVO AMP. SWITCH SETTING
SWITCHES DESCRIPTION SETTING

SW1 & 2 Selection of the differential constant for the TG (Tachogenerator, i.e., BOTH ON
velocity) feedback circuit.
SW3 & 4 Selection of the current feedback gain. This setting should not be SW3: ON, SW4:
changed. OFF
SW5 Setting of the additional integral constant (capacitor) to the velocity feed- ON
back circuit. The added value is o.19 ms when this switch is set to ON.
SW6 Not Used. –
SW7 & 8 Selection of the integral constant for the velocity feedback circuit. BOTH ON
4–1 TABLE/GANTRY
REV 0 2228782
4-1 SWITCH SETTING ON SERVO AMP. CIRCUIT BOARD (continued)

The switch settings of SW1 & 2, or SW7 & 8 give circuit constants as described in the following tables:
TABLE 4–2
DIFFERENTIAL CONSTANT FOR VELOCITY FEEDBACK
SWITCH SETTING DIFFERENTIAL

SW1 SW2 CONSTANT (ms)
OFF OFF 0
ON OFF 10.0
OFF ON 0.22
ON ON 10.22
TABLE 4–3
INTEGRAL CONSTANT FOR VELOCITY FEEDBACK
SWITCH SETTING INTEGRAL

SW7 SW8 CONSTANT (ms)
OFF OFF 4.0
ON OFF 8.1
OFF ON 1.5
ON ON 1.5
4–2 TABLE/GANTRY
REV 0 2228782
4-2 SERVO ALARM AND TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE

The following descriptions comprise the troubleshooting guide for the Servo Alarm indicated on the Servo Alarm LED
of Servo Amp.
Alarm
1. O.C. (OVER CURRENT)
a. Motor winding short circuit? → Replace Motor.
b. Motor lead wire grounded? → Check power lead of motor.
c. Shorted output Transistor? → Replace Servo Amp.
d. Control circuit of Servo Amp? → Replace Servo Amp.
2. O.L. (OVER LOAD)
a. Gantry mechanical Failure? → Check Gantry.
b. Control circuit of Servo Amp? → Replace Servo Amp.
c. Communication Sensor of motor? → Replace Servo Amp.
3. O.H. (OVER HEAT)
a. Servo Amp? → Replace Servo Amp.
4. F.E. (CIRCUIT BREAKER OFF)
a. Motor winding short circuit? → Replace Motor.
b. Motor lead wire grounded? → Check power lead of motor.
c. Shorted output Transistor? → Replace Servo Amp.
d. Control circuit of Servo Amp? → Replace Servo Amp.
5. P.E. (DYNAMIC BRAKE FUNCTION FAIL)
a. DYNAMIC BRAKE Resistors open? → Check Dynamic Brake Resistors.
b. Input Voltage too high? → Check Input Voltage.
4–3 TABLE/GANTRY
REV 0 2228782
4-2 SERVO ALARM AND TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE (continued)

6. S.E. (SPEED ERROR)
a. VR2 ADJUSTMENT? → Check & Adjust VR2.
b. VOLTAGE COMMAND? → Check Voltage Command from TGP.
c. TACO GEN Signal Connection? → Check TACO GEN Signal Cable.
d. TACO GEN Fail? → Replace Motor.
7. V.E. (VOLTAGE ERROR POWER FAIL)
a. Input Voltage drop? (170 VAC) → Check Input Voltage.
b. Bad Connection of Input Lead? → Check Cable Connection.
c. Control Circuit of Servo Amp? → Replace Servo Amp.
8. C.E. (COMMUNICATION ERROR)
a. Control Circuit of Servo Amp? → Replace Servo Amp.
b. Signal Connection between Servo Amp and Motor? → Check Cable Connection.
c. Communication Sensor of Motor? → Replace Motor.
4–4 TABLE/GANTRY
REV 0 2228782
4-2 SERVO ALARM AND TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE (continued)
Flow Chart
The following flow chart supplements the servo amp and motor troubleshooting guide.
MOTOR
WON’T
ROTATE
ANY ALARM REFER TO 4–1 SERVO

ON LED OF YES
ALARM OF THIS
SERVO SECTION.
AMP?
NO
IS VOLTAGE CHECK CHECK SIGNAL

COMMAND NO
TGP CABLE FROM
AT CN1, 3–4? BOARD. TGP TO SERVO
AMP.
YES
RSGO SIGNAL NO CHECK CHECK SIGNAL

OK? (i.e.) CN1 TGP CABLE FROM
21–25 CLOSED? BOARD. TGP TO SERVO
AMP.
YES
NO
CHECK FUSES REPLACE
OK? FUSE(S).
YES
REPLACE
SERVO AMP.
SERVO AMP & MOTOR TROUBLESHOOTING FLOW CHART

ILLUSTRATION 4–2
4–5 TABLE/GANTRY
blank 2228782
4–6 TABLE/GANTRY
REV 0 2228782
DAS/DETECTOR
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION PAGE
SECTION 1 – CHANNEL – RING RADIUS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–1

1-1 XE TYPE DETECTOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–1
1-2 SS TYPE (HILIGHT) DETECTOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–8
i DAS/DETECTOR
blank 2228782
ii DAS/DETECTOR
REV 0 2228782
SECTION 1 – CHANNEL – RING RADIUS
1-1 XE TYPE DETECTOR

Table 1–1 shows the DAS Channel – Ring Radius cross references (for Xe type Detector).
Refer to the descriptions below.
CH#: Channel No. (DAS)

CN#: Connector No.
AR#: Pin Array (A ~ D)
(Refer to Illustration 1–1.)
PN#: Pin No. (1 ~ 15)
(Refer to Illustration 1–1.)
CB#: CAM or other Board No.; as follows:
#1: CAM Board #1
#2: CAM Board #2
#3: CAM Board #3
#4: CAM Board #4
#5: NCAM Board
#6: REF Board
DA#: Amplifier No.
#1: Unit No. 1 on CAM Board #1
I
#59: Unit No.11 on CAM Board #4
#60: Unit No. 1 on REF Board
R (mm): Radius of image ring artifact in mm
PN#
1 2 3 4 15
AR#
A
B
C
D
DET. PWB 1
DETECTOR BACKPLANE PIN ARRAY (VIEWED FROM GANTRY REAR SIDE)

ILLUSTRATION 1–1
1–1 DAS/DETECTOR
REV 0 2228782
1-1 XE TYPE DETECTOR (continued)
Pin Arrangement
Refer to Illustration 1–2. Note that the pin arrangement on the Table side (Illustration 1–2) is different from on the
Detector backplane side (Illustration 1–1).
CN CN
DETECTOR
#15 #1
NCAM CAM CAM CAM CAM

#4 #3 #2 #1
DETECTOR
CAM BOARD
C15 D15 C14 D14 C13 D13 C12 D12 C11 D11 C10 D10 C9 D9 C8 D8 C7 D7 C6 D6 C5 D5 C4 D4 C3 D3 C2 D2 C1 D1
A15 B15 A14 B14 A13 B13 A12 B12 A11 B11 A10 B10 A9 B9 A8 B8 A7 B7 A6 B6 A5 B5 A4 B4 A3 B3 A2 B2 A1 B1
A : AR # (PIN ARRAY NO.)

1 : PN # (PIN NO.)
CONNECTOR PIN ARRAY (VIEWED FROM TABLE SIDE)

ILLUSTRATION 1–2
1–2 DAS/DETECTOR
REV 0 2228782
TABLE 1–1
CHANNEL – RING RADIUS CROSS REFERENCE (XE TYPE DETECTOR)

1–3 DAS/DETECTOR
REV 0 2228782


1–4 DAS/DETECTOR
REV 0 2228782


1–5 DAS/DETECTOR
REV 0 2228782


1–6 DAS/DETECTOR
REV 0 2228782


13 A 10 5 51 189.6
14 C 11 5 55 225.0
13 D 11 5 51 190.2
14 A 11 5 55 225.6
13 B 11 5 51 190.8 14 D 12 5 56 226.2
13 C 11 5 51 191.4 14 B 12 5 56 226.8
13 A 11 5 51 192.0 14 C 12 5 56 227.4
13 D 12 5 52 192.6 14 A 12 5 56 228.0
13 B 12 5 52 193.2 14 D 13 5 56 228.6

13 C 12 5 52 193.8 14 B 13 5 56 229.2
13 A 12 5 52 194.4
14 C 13 5 56 229.8
13 D 13 5 52 195.1 14 A 13 5 56 230.4
13 B 13 5 52 195.7 14 D 14 5 56 230.9
13 C 13 5 52 196.3 14 B 14 5 56 231.5
13 A 13 5 52 196.9 14 C 14 5 56 232.1
13 D 14 5 52 197.5 14 A 14 5 56 232.7
13 B 14 5 52 198.1 14 D 15 5 56 233.3
13 C 14 5 52 198.7 14 B 15 5 56 233.9
13 A 14 5 52 199.3 15 C 1 5 57 234.5

13 D 15 5 52 199.9 15 A 1 5 57 235.1
13 B 15 5 52 200.5
15 D 2 5 57 235.6
14 C 1 5 53 201.1 15 B 2 5 57 236.2.
14 A 1 5 53 201.7 15 C 2 5 57 236.8
14 D 2 5 53 202.3 15 A 2 5 57 237.4.
14 B 2 5 53 202.9 15 D 3 5 57 238.0
14 C 2 5 53 203.5 15 B 3 5 57 238.6.
14 A 2 5 53 204.1 15 C 3 5 57 239.1.
14 D 3 5 53 204.7 15 A 3 5 57 239.7.
14 B 3 5 53 205.3 15 D 4 5 57 240.3.

14 C 3 5 53 205.9 15 B 4 5 57 240.9.
14 A 3 5 53 206.5
15 C 4 5 57 241.5
14 D 4 5 53 207.1 15 A 4 5 57 242.0.
14 B 4 5 53 207.8 15 D 5 5 58 242.6
14 C 4 5 35 208.4 15 B 5 5 58 243.2.
14 A 4 5 53 209.0 15 C 5 5 58 243.8.
14 D 5 5 54 209.6 15 A 5 5 58 244.4.
14 B 5 5 54 210.2 15 D 6 5 58 244.9.
14 C 5 5 54 210.8 15 B 6 5 58 245.5.
14 A 5 5 54 211.4 15 C 6 5 58 246.1.

14 D 6 5 54 212.0 15 A 6 5 58 246.7.
14 B 6 5 54 212.5
15 D 7 5 58 247.3
14 C 6 5 54 213.1 7 15 B 7 5 58 247.8
14 A 6 5 54 213.7 15 C 7 5 58 248.4
14 D 7 5 54 214.4 15 A 7 5 58 249.0
14 B 7 5 54 214.9 15 D 8 5 58 249.6
14 C 7 5 54 215.5 15 B 8 5 58 250.1
14 A 7 5 54 216.1 15 C 8 5 59 250.7
14 D 8 5 54 216.7 15 A 8 5 59 251.3
14 B 8 5 54 217.3 15 D 9 5 59 251.9

14 C 8 5 55 217.9 15 B 9 5 59 252.4
14 A 8 5 55 218.5
15 C 9 5 59 253.0
14 D 9 5 55 219.1 15 A 9 5 59 253.6
14 B 9 5 55 219.7 15 D 10 5 59 254.2

14 C 9 5 55 220.3 15 B 10 5 59 254.7

14 A 9 5 55 220.9

14 D 10 5 55 221.5 I 15 B 12 6 60 0.0

14 B 10 5 55 222.1

14 C 10 5 55 222.7

14 A 10 5 55 223.3

14 D 11 5 55 223.9

14 B 11 5 55 224.5
1–7 DAS/DETECTOR
REV 0 2228782
1-2 SS TYPE (HILIGHT) DETECTOR

Table 1–2 shows the DAS Channel – Ring Radius cross references (for SS type Detector).
Refer to Illustration 1–3 for the connector locations.
Detector
#61 #3 #2 #1
Viewed from the Table side

(X–ray tube at the home position)
CONNECTOR LOCATION
ILLUSTRATION 1–3
1–8 DAS/DETECTOR
REV 0 2228782
TABLE 1–2
CHANNEL – RING RADIUS CROSS REFERENCE (SS TYPE DETECTOR)
Channel No. Ring Radius (cm) Connector No.

(= CAM Board No.)
5 ∼ 20 25.15 ∼ 24.39 3
21 ∼ 36 24.34 ∼ 23.57 4
37 ∼ 52 23.52 ∼ 22.75 5
53 ∼ 68 22.70 ∼ 21.92 6
69 ∼ 84 21.87 ∼ 21.08 7
85 ∼ 100 21.03 ∼ 20.24 8
101 ∼ 116 20.19 ∼ 19.39 9
117 ∼ 132 19.34 ∼ 18.54 10
133 ∼ 148 18.48 ∼ 17.68 11
149 ∼ 164 17.62 ∼ 16.81 12
165 ∼ 180 16.76 ∼ 15.94 13
181 ∼ 196 15.89 ∼ 15.07 14
197 ∼ 212 15.01 ∼ 14.19 15
213 ∼ 228 14.13 ∼ 13.30 16
229 ∼ 244 13.25 ∼ 12.41 17
245 ∼ 260 12.36 ∼ 11.52 18
261 ∼ 276 11.46 ∼ 10.62 19
277 ∼ 292 10.57 ∼ 9.72 20
293 ∼ 308 9.67 ∼ 8.82 21
309 ∼ 324 8.77 ∼ 7.92 22
325 ∼ 340 7.86 ∼ 7.01 23
341 ∼ 356 6.95 ∼ 6.10 24
357 ∼ 372 6.04 ∼ 5.19 25
373 ∼ 388 5.13 ∼ 4.28 26
389 ∼ 404 4.22 ∼ 3.36 27
405 ∼ 420 3.31 ∼ 2.45 28
421 ∼ 436 2.39 ∼ 1.53 29
437 ∼ 452 1.47 ∼ 0.62 30
453 ∼ 463 0.56 ∼ 0.01 31
1–9 DAS/DETECTOR
REV 0 2228782

CHANNEL – RING RADIUS CROSS REFERENCE (SS TYPE DETECTOR)
Channel No. Ring Radius (cm) Connector No.

(= CAM Board No.)
468 ∼ 463 0.30 ∼ 0.01 31
484 ∼ 469 1.22 ∼ 0.36 32
500 ∼ 485 2.13 ∼ 1.27 33
516 ∼ 501 3.05 ∼ 2.19 34
532 ∼ 517 3.96 ∼ 3.11 35
548 ∼ 533 4.88 ∼ 4.02 36
564 ∼ 549 5.79 ∼ 4.93 37
580 ∼ 565 6.70 ∼ 5.85 38
596 ∼ 581 7.61 ∼ 6.76 39
612 ∼ 597 8.51 ∼ 7.66 40
628 ∼ 613 9.42 ∼ 8.57 41
644 ∼ 629 10.32 ∼ 9.47 42
660 ∼ 645 11.21 ∼ 10.37 43
676 ∼ 661 12.11 ∼ 11.27 44
692 ∼ 677 13.00 ∼ 12.16 45
708 ∼ 693 13.88 ∼ 13.05 46
724 ∼ 709 14.76 ∼ 13.94 47
740 ∼ 725 15.64 ∼ 14.82 48
756 ∼ 741 16.51 ∼ 15.70 49
772 ∼ 757 17.38 ∼ 16.57 50
788 ∼ 773 18.24 ∼ 17.44 51
804 ∼ 789 19.10 ∼ 18.30 52
820 ∼ 805 19.95 ∼ 19.15 53
836 ∼ 821 20.80 ∼ 20.00 54
852 ∼ 837 21.63 ∼ 20.85 55
868 ∼ 853 22.47 ∼ 21.69 56
884 ∼ 869 23.29 ∼ 22.52 57
900 ∼ 885 24.11 ∼ 23.34 58
916 ∼ 901 24.92 ∼ 24.16 59
921 ∼ 917 25.17 ∼ 24.97 60
1–10 DAS/DETECTOR
REV 0 2228782
X–RAY GENERATOR
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION PAGE
SECTION 1 – GENERAL DESCRIPTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–1

1-1 GENERATOR MODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–1
1-2 GENERATOR PHASE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–1
1-3 DEVICE DESIGNATORS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–3
SECTION 2 – (BLANK SECTION) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–1
SECTION 3 – FAILURE ANALYSIS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–1

3-1 LED INDICATORS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–1
3-1-1 OBC – Backboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–1
3-1-2 Rotor Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–1
3-1-3 CPU Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–2
3-1-4 KV Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–3
3-1-5 Filament Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–4
3-1-6 PDU (P9180AB or P9180AF) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–5
3-1-7 PDU (2121798) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–6
3-2 ERROR CODES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–7
3-2-1 Error Code Notation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–7
3-2-2 Generator Error and Command Error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–8
3-2-3 DCRGS Control Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–9
3-2-4 Rotor Control Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–9
3-2-5 Filament Control Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–10
3-2-6 Exposure Control Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–10
3-2-7 Safety Loop Control Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–11
3-2-8 Other Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–12
3-2-9 Command Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–13
SECTION 4 – SERVICE TESTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–1

4-1 GENERAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–1
4-2 POWER–ON TEST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–2
4-2-1 CPU Board Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–2
4-3 SERVICE TEST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–3
4-3-1 Entering/Exiting Service Test Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–3
4-3-2 Commands/Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–4
4-3-3 Rotor Board Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–5
4-3-4 Filament Board Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–15
4-3-5 KV Board Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–24
4-3-6 PDU Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–41
i X–RAY GENERATOR
blank 2228782
ii X–RAY GENERATOR
REV 0 2228782
SECTION 1 – GENERAL DESCRIPTIONS
1-1 GENERATOR MODE

Two modes are defined for the x–ray generator operations, as follows:
D Operation Mode The normal mode. Scans are performed in this mode.
D Service/Calibration Mode In this mode the generator accepts and executes Service Tests (described
in Section 4), or performs MA Calibration.
For each of the generator modes, Generator Phases are defined as described below.
1-2 GENERATOR PHASE

Eight phases (phase 0 through phase 7) are defined for the x–ray generator operations, as follows:
D phase 0 (Power–on Test or Service Mode) After powering on or resetting the generator, the generator
is in phase 0, during which power–on tests are performed within the generator. Also, the generator ac-
cepts Service Test Commands in this phase.
D phase 1 (Idling) The generator proceeds to phase 1, after the power–on tests are finished without
errors. In this phase a preheating current is flowing in the x–ray tube filament (approximately 3 A).
D phase 2 (Exposure Preparation) In this phase, Exposure Preparation is performed.

Exposure Preparation: The x–ray tube rotor starts to rotate and the filament is heated by a current prede-
termined on the selected KV–MA station.
D phase 3 (Exposure Ready) The generator is ready for exposure, waiting for the exposure command
from the system (Operator Console).
D phase 4 (KV Rise) The KV starts to rise. When the KV exceeds 75 % of the set KV, the generator
goes to phase 5.
D phase 5 (KV Control) The KV is controlled to the set KV.
D phase 6 (KV Fall) The KV starts to fall. When the KV falls below 25 % of the set KV, the generator
goes to phase 7.
D phase 7 (Rotor Brake) The generator starts to decelerate the rotor by applying inverse voltage to the
x–ray tube stator, then goes to phase 1.
1–1 X–RAY GENERATOR

REV 0 2228782
1-2 GENERATOR PHASE (continued)
Generator Power–on or Reset
PHASE 0
Power–on Test or Service Mode
PHASE 1
Idling
Scan Set
PHASE 2
Exposure Preparation
PHASE 3
Exposure Ready
Scan
PHASE 4
KV Rise
SET KV (100 %)
PHASE 5 75 %
PHASE 5 PHASE 6
KV Control
PHASE 4 PHASE 7
Scan End 25 %
PHASE 6
KV Fall
PHASE 7
Rotor Brake
GENERATOR OPERATION PHASE

ILLUSTRATION 1–1

REV 0 2228782
1-3 DEVICE DESIGNATORS

Refer to Illustration 1–2, which overviews the x–ray generator system and includes device designators as explained
below:
Circuit Boards
The OBC (On Board Computer) rack or X–ray Generator Controller rack contains four circuits boards:
a board which contains an inverter for the x–ray tube filament and controls the filament current;
a board which controls the CTVRC power module which supplies electric currents to the x–ray tube stator;
a board which controls an inverter which generates high frequency power for the high voltage tanks;
and CPU Board.
These boards are called Filament Board, Rotor Board, KV Board, and CPU Board, respectively, in these X–ray Gener-
ator Diagnostics sections.
Inverters
The x–ray generator has three units of inverters:
an invertor which supplies power to the x–ray tube stator and is contained within the CTVRC power module;
an inverter which supplies power for heating the x–ray tube filament. This inverter exists on the Filament Board; and
an inverter which outputs high frequency power to the high voltage transformers.
These inverters are called Rotor Inverter, Filament Inverter, and KV Inverter, respectively, in these X–ray Generator
Diagnostics sections.
The KV Inverter includes Anode Inverter and Cathode Inverter.

REV 0 2228782
1-3 DEVICE DESIGNATORS (continued)
OPERATOR
CONSOLE
PDU
TGP DCRGS: Regulated 550 VDC Supply
BOARD contained in P9180AB/AF PDU
DCRGS
OGP BOARD
550 (OR 750) VDC
SLIP RINGS
OBC
CPU BOARD
CTVRC
ROTOR BOARD ROTOR INVERTER
ROTOR
KV INVERTER
ANODE INVERTER ANODE HV X–RAY HV –

TRANSFORMER TUBE
KV BOARD HV +
CATHODE INVERTER CATHODE HV

TRANSFORMER
FILAMENT BOARD
FILAMENT
INVERTER
GENERATOR FUNCTIONAL BLOCK DIAGRAM

ILLUSTRATION 1–2

REV 0 2228782
SECTION 2 – (BLANK SECTION)
(This section is intentionally left blank.)

blank 2228782

REV 0 2228782
SECTION 3 – FAILURE ANALYSIS
3-1 LED INDICATORS
3-1-1 OBC – Backboard
TABLE 3–1
BACKBOARD LED

" ! &" #%!!' # !"$
3-1-2 Rotor Board
TABLE 3–2
ROTOR BOARD LEDS

' & "
" $$" %
' & % !"$
" $$ " !
' & $ "

" %$
' & "$

REV 0 2228782
3-1 LED INDICATORS (continued)
3-1-3 CPU Board
TABLE 3–3
CPU BOARD LEDS

$!
#")$ %'##* % "#$&!

$!
#")$ %'##* % "#$&!

$!
#")$ %'##* % "#$&!
$ &
$ $%&
$ &* ""# "#!
*")
& $(! $" & %*%& %
$!
& &$!% %%"! &" & %*%& %
+ *")
%#*% $$"$ "%

REV 0 2228782
3-1-4 KV Board
TABLE 3–4
KV BOARD LEDS

DS1 green +5 VDC power supply is operating.
DS2 green +15 VDC power supply is operating.
DS3 green -15 VDC power supply is operating.
CAST red Cathode shoot-through
ANST red Anode shoot-through
CAOVKV red Cathode over KV (greater than |-83 kV|)
ANOVKV red Anode over KV (greater than 83 kV)
ANOVMA red Anode over MA (greater than 450 mA)
CAOVMA red Cathode over MA (greater than 450 mA)
CAOC red Cathode inverter overcurrent
ANOC red Anode inverter overcurrent
INVON yellow Inverters are operating.
HVON yellow The tube kV is now greater than 75 % of the set
KV.
TAN yellow High voltage test on the anode side
TCA yellow High voltage test on the cathode side
TANTCA yellow High voltage test on the anode and cathode sides

REV 0 2228782
3-1-5 Filament Board
TABLE 3–5
FILAMENT BOARD LEDS

DE1 green FIL_SUPPLY is present.
( 20 v
v 39 )
DE2 green 15V_SAFE (used for drivers for the gate control
signals) is OK.
DE3 green +15 VDC power supply is operating.
DE4 green -15 VDC power supply is operating.
DE5 green +5 VDC power supply is operating.
DE6 red FIL_OPEN (indicating filament or cable open)
DE7 red FIL_OVER (overcurrent in the filament: greater
than 6.5 A in LF and greater than 7.5 A in SF)
DE8 red FIL_SUPPLY_OK (the FIL_SUPPLY voltage is
OK)
DE9 yellow FIL_ON (the filament current is now greater than
2 A, which indicates that the Filament Board is
normally operating)

REV 0 2228782
3-1-6 PDU (P9180AB or P9180AF)
Lamps
TABLE 3–6
PDU LAMPS

DS25 green Phase R present
DS26 green Phase S present
DS27 green Phase T present
DS33 green P ON A
DS34 green P ON B
DS35 green P ON C
DS36 green Safety (AC power is applied to the DCRGS module)
DCRGS Board (Top Board)
TABLE 3–7
PDU – DCRGS BOARD LEDS

DS171 yellow Main voltage low (On: when 550 VDC is not acĆ
tive
Off: when 550 VDC is active)
DS170 green Power on (normally On)
DS169 yellow Interconnection open (normally Off)
DS165 yellow Capacitor unbalance (normally Off)
DS166 yellow Overcurrent
DS167 yellow Undervoltage
DS168 yellow Phase loss (On: when 550 VDC is not active
Off: when 550 VDC is active)

REV 0 2228782
3-1-7 PDU (2121798)
Panel Common PDU Board
TABLE 3–8
PDU– PANEL COMMON PDU BOARD LEDS
LED COLOR DESCRIPTION

DS1 – DC_BUS
DS2 Green –
DS3 Green –
DS4 Green –
DS5 – 115VW
DS6 – 115VV
DS7 – 115VU
DS8 Red FAULT
DS9 Red OVER_VOLTAGE
DS10 Red UNBAL_VOLTAGE
DS11 Red CONN_LIN_OUT
DS12 Red MAINS_FAULT
DS13 Yellow P_ON_C_LIGHT
DS14 Yellow P_ON_B_LIGHT
DS15 Yellow P_ON_A_LIGHT
DS16 Yellow SAFETY_LIGHT
DS17 Green 24V

REV 0 2228782
3-2 ERROR CODES

Errors which occur in the generator are detected by the CPU Board of the generator.
3-2-1 Error Code Notation

Error codes displayed on the Operator Console CRT monitor screen take either of the following formats:
Exyz
exyz
where,
E: Identifier for errors which occur during the operation mode
e: Identifier for errors which occur during the service mode or autotest
x: Phase number which the generator was operating in when the error occurred
yz: Error code

REV 0 2228782
3-2 ERROR CODES (continued)
3-2-2 Generator Error and Command Error

The generator detects two kinds of errors, called Generator Errors and Command Errors.
D Generator Error
If a Generator Error occurs, the generator takes the following actions (refer to Illustration 3–1):
– terminates the exposure (INV_ON) and resets the KV Board (KV_RESET and SPIT_RESET)
– disables the filament heating (FIL_EN) and resets the Filament Board (FIL_RESET)
– disables the rotor operation (ROT_EN) and resets the Rotor Board (ROT_RESET)
– opens the safety loop
– goes to phase 1 and resumes filament preheating three seconds after the reset operations.
D Command Error
If a Command Error occurs, the generator sends the error code to the system (Operator Console). Howev-
er, the generator does not change its actions.
ERROR
INV_ON
FIL_EN PREHEATING
ROT_EN
100 msec 3 sec

SAFETY_LOOP
50 microsec
FIL_RESET
ROT_RESET
KV_RESET
SPIT_RESET
GENERATOR ERROR
ILLUSTRATION 3–1

REV 0 2228782
3-2-3 DCRGS Control Errors

D yz: 01 – 550 VDC Supply Error
The correct 550 (or 750) VDC could not be measured in the x–ray generator.
D yz: 02 – 15V_ SAFE Voltage Failure

The power supply voltage for optical devices used in the KV Inverter and CTVRC was out of the specified
range (13.5 V 15.5 V). This is detected after all the generator error status is reset and before all the
devices are reset.
D yz: 03 – CTVRC Short–circuit Error

A short–circuit (shoot–through) occurred between the time when the generator closed the safety loop and
detecting the correct 550 (or 750) VDC in the generator.
D yz: 81 – 550 VDC Supply Error at Exposure Preparation Start

The correct 550 (or 750) VDC could not be measured in the x–ray generator before 1.2 second have
passed since the generator closed the safety loop.
3-2-4 Rotor Control Errors

D yz: 11 – Rotor Controller Error
The rotor did not start normally, or the 550 (or 750) VDC supply failed.
D yz: 12 – Rotor Acceleration Error

The specific rotor speed was not attained within the specified time.
D yz: 16 – Stator Current Error

The current in either of the two windings (measured in the CTVRC) did not fall within the specified range.
216 – This error occurred in phase (x) 2 (rotor acceleration)
316 – This error occurred in phase (x) 3 (rotor run)
716 – This error occurred in phase (x) 7 (rotor brake)
D yz: 18 – Stator Current Unbalance

The difference in currents in the two windings (measured in the CTVRC) exceeded specified values.
218 – This error occurred in phase (x) 2 (rotor acceleration)
318 – This error occurred in phase (x) 3 (rotor run)
718 – This error occurred in phase (x) 7 (rotor brake)

REV 0 2228782
3-2-5 Filament Control Errors

D yz: 21 – Filament Overcurrent
D yz: 22 – No Filament Current
D yz: 23 – Small Focus Change Error
D yz: 24 – Invalid Power Supply Voltage For Filament Heating
D yz: 25 – Filament Inverter Error
3-2-6 Exposure Control Errors

D yz: 31 – Tube Current Accuracy Error
The x–ray tube currents measured were out of specifications.
D yz: 32 – Tube Voltage Accuracy Error

The x–ray tube voltages (HV tank output) were out of specifications.
D yz: 33 – Spit
Spits were detected during an exposure at the rate of more than 30 spits/s.
D yz: 34 – Exposure Overtime

Exposure time exceeded 105 % of the set time.
D yz: 35 – Anode Over MA

The tube current measured on the anode side was out of specifications.
D yz: 36 – Cathode Over MA

The tube current measured on the cathode side was out of specifications.
D yz: 37 – Anode Over KV

The tube anode voltage (anode output from the HV tank) measured was over specifications.
D yz: 38 – Cathode Over KV

The tube cathode voltage (cathode output from the HV tank) measured was over specifications.
D yz: 39 – Anode Inverter Shoot–through

Surge currents were detected in the anode inverter. Tube spits are considered to be the cause for this.
D yz: 40 – Cathode Inverter Shoot–through

Surge currents were detected in the cathode inverter. Tube spits are considered to be the cause for this.
D yz: 41 – Anode Inverter Overcurrent

The output currents from the anode inverter were out of specifications. This error could be a cause for
tube spits.

REV 0 2228782

D yz: 42 – Cathode Inverter Overcurrent
The output currents from the cathode inverter were out of specifications. This error could be a cause for
tube spits.
D yz: 44 – KV Unbalance (Negative)

(Cathode KV – anode KV) was greater than 5 kV.
D yz: 45 – KV Unbalance (Positive)

(Anode KV – cathode KV) was greater than 5 kV.
D yz: 61 – System Request Error

The system (Operator Console) sends periodically Request Commands “?” to the generator during expo-
sure. If the generator does not receive the command at the correct timing, this error code is sent to the
system.
D yz: 83 – KV Rise Timeout

The tube voltage did not reach above a specified value within a specified time after starting the KV Inverter
operation.
D yz: 84 – KV Fall Timeout

The tube voltage did not lower below a specified value within a specified time after ending the KV Inverter
operation.
3-2-7 Safety Loop Control Errors

D yz: 48 – Safety Loop Control Error (Generator Side)
The safety loop is open on the generator side.
D yz: 49 – Safety Loop Control Error (System Side)

The safety loop is open on the system side.

REV 0 2228782
3-2-8 Other Errors

D yz: 43 – HV_ON Error
The HV_ON signal (which indicates that the KV has reached over 75 % of the set KV) became active with-
out receiving the exposure command from the system.
D yz: 50 – EPROM Checksum Error

A checksum error occurred during the EPROM checksum test which is performed as a background test
in all generator phases.
D yz: 51 – RAM Checksum Error

A checksum error occurred during the RAM checksum test which is performed as a background test in
all generator phases.
D yz: 52 – EEPROM Write Error

Write operation into the EEPROM did not succeed.
D yz: 53 – EEPROM Checksum Error

A checksum error occurred during the EEPROM checksum test which is performed during the power–up
tests. Any of the following causes this error.
– A new EEPROM was used.
– The EPROM was replaced with one of later revision.
– Write operation failed.
If this error occurred, parameters on the EPROM (default parameters) are loaded into the RAM and the
generator operates using these parameters.
D yz: 60 – Communication Error

The system sends an “ACK” response to the generator every time after the generator sends communica-
tion data to the system. If the generator does not receive this response, this error code is sent to the sys-
tem.
D yz: 82 – Exposure Command Timeout Error

When the generator is in phase 3 (Exposure Ready), it is waiting for the exposure command from the sys-
tem. If the generator does not receive the command within 90 seconds since the beginning of phase 3,
this error code is sent to the system.

REV 0 2228782
3-2-9 Command Errors

D yz: 70 – Undefined Command
The generator received an undefined command from the system.
D yz: 71 – Parameter out of Range

The generator received a parameter whose value is not in the allowable range from the system. For exam-
ple, “200 kV” for a KV value.
D yz: 72 – Parameter Modification not Allowed

The system tried to change parameters related to exposures in a not allowed phase. It is only allowed
in phases 1, 3, and 7.
D yz: 73 – Phase Change not Allowed

The system tried to change the generator phase in a not allowed phase. For example, the “P” command
(Exposure Preparation Command) is only allowed in phase 1 and 7; if the system sends this command
to the generator which is in phase 2, for example, error code “E273” is generated.
D yz: 74 – Exposure Command not Allowed

The generator received the exposure command at a not allowed timing from the system.

blank 2228782

REV 1 2228782
SECTION 4 – SERVICE TESTS
4-1 GENERAL
The diagnostic tests for the x–ray generator are classified into the following three kinds:
D Power–on Test
This is automatically performed when the generator is powered–on, or is reset. The tests are mainly per-
formed on Rotor Board, Filament Board, KV board, and CPU Board itself (self test).
D Service Tests
Test the rotor control function, filament current control function, KV control function, or PDU operation.
D Operation Mode Tests

During the generator is operating in the operation mode (i.e., when scans are performed), generator op-
erations (MA accuracy, KV balance, etc.) are checked.

REV 1 2228782
4-2 POWER–ON TEST

When the generator is powered–on, or is reset, the following tests are automatically performed:
D CPU Board Test
D Autotests for Rotor Board, Filament Board, and KV Board
Autotest
This is a predetermined sequence of tests, performed by the CPU Board. If an error is detected, the error code is
sent to the Operator Console.
Autotests can also be executed by off–line commands, described in the SERVICE TEST section. The test results
shown on the CRT monitor includes hexadecimal codes, which tell that how the values of logical signals on the circuit
board changed in response to test signals; which may be useful information to know the detailed circuit operations
on the board, but not so for diagnostic purposes; therefore, these will not be explained.
4-2-1 CPU Board Test

It is a self test. The following tests are sequentially performed:
D Register pattern read/write
D EPROM checksum test
D RAM pattern read/write
D DUART test: DTACK, TIMER, DUART A internal loop, DUART B internal loop, Timer Interrupt
D EEPROM checksum test

REV 1 2228782
4-3 SERVICE TEST
4-3-1 Entering/Exiting Service Test Mode

MAINTENANCE MENU Enter “$$” at the ∗∗∗ MAINTENANCE MENU ∗∗∗, after inserting the BOOT
disk into the floppy disk drive.
↓
SUPPORT
↓
GENERATOR/TUBE
↓
GENERATOR TEST ∗∗∗ GENERATOR TEST ∗∗∗
↓
S Enter “S” at the TO: prompt. The generator responds with the “P0” message
(meaning that the generator is now in phase 0) at the FROM: prompt. The
generator is now in the Service Test mode.
↓
Service Tests
↓
N Enter “N” at the TO: prompt to exit the Service Test mode.

REV 1 2228782
4-3-2 Commands/Status
In the ∗∗∗ GENERATOR TEST ∗∗∗ menu, you can send commands listed below to the x–ray generator by entering
them at the TO: prompt. Responses from the x–ray generator are displayed at the FROM: prompt.
TABLE 4–1
SERVICE TEST MODE COMMANDS
COMMAND/ DESCRIPTION
STATUS
( Safety Loop Close Closes the Safety Loop on the system side, which lights the Scan Set"
button. After this operation, when the generator closes the Safety Loop on the generator side,
the complete Safety Loop is closed, which brings up the 550 (or 750) VDC.
) Safety Loop Open Opens the Safety Loop on the system side, which extinguishes the Scan
Set" button.
< Exposure Command ON Asserts the Exposure Command signal to the generator. This operaĆ
tion lights the Scan" button. If the generator is ready (in phase 3), an exposure is started.
> Exposure Command OFF Deasserts the Exposure Command signal. This operation extinĆ
guishes the Scan" button.
<RTN> Message Request Displays service test results, or generator phase which the generator is
(Return) currently operating in or has been operating in.
N Phase 0 to 1 This command changes the generator phase from phase 0 (service mode) to phase
1.
S Phase 1 to 0 This command changes the generator phase from phase 1 to phase 0. Before perĆ
forming a service test, the generator is operating in phase 1. Before sending a service test comĆ
mand to the generator, you should send this command S" to let the generator operate in phase
0. This command is accepted when the generator is operating in phase 1.ă
SE0 Service Test Exit Terminates the test which is currently running, or exit the current service test.
Note: Once entering a service test (SXX; see below), this command should be entered before
exiting the service mode (phase 0) by the N" command (see above), otherwise, a system error
may occur; if this happens, push the reset switch on the CPU Board of the generator.
Refer to Illustration 4-1. RESET SW
CPU BOARD
SXX Service Test Command XX is test numbers (11, 12, ...). This command runs a selected test.
Service test commands are accepted when the generator is operating in phase 0.
PX Generator Phase X: 0, 1, ... , 7 PX indicates Generator Phase, shown at the FROM: prompt.
Note: The Version 3.05 firmware adds 02" before PX" characters, as 02P2, 02P5, etc. This
02" means the number of characters PX, i.e., two.

REV 1 2228782
4-3-2 Commands/Status (continued)
*** GENERATOR TEST ***

(PHASE 1)
S
N
SERVICE TEST MODE
(PHASE 0)
SXX (XX: 11, 12, ...)
SERVICE TEST SELECTION AND EXECUTION
SE0
SERVICE TEST END
SERVICE TEST MODE

ILLUSTRATION 4–1
4-3-3 Rotor Board Test
TEST COMMAND DESCRIPTION

S11 Displays the results of Autotest for Rotor Board which was last executed (by test S12, or
x-ray generator power-on or reset).
(This is not really a test)
S12 Executes Autotest for Rotor Board, and displays the test results.
S14 Performs a series of rotor operations (acceleration, run, and brake), using key input of P."
S16 Performs a series of rotor operations (acceleration, run, and brake).
S17 Operates the CTVRC power module without 550 VDC (or 750 VDC) supply.
S18 Performs series of rotor operations (acceleration, run, and brake) repeatedly.
S19 Performs series of rotor operations (acceleration, run, and brake) repeatedly, using key
input of P."
Error Code
During test S12, if an error occurs, the following error codes will be displayed:
ERROR CODE DESCRIPTION

e013, e014 Error occurred on the Rotor Board

REV 1 2228782
4-3-3 Rotor Board Test (continued)
S11
Test Procedure (on the CRT screen)
–––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––
TO: S <RTN>
FROM: P0
TO: S11 <RTN>
TO: <RTN>
FROM: P0 ( ... test results ... )
.....
TO: N <RTN> (to exit service mode)
FROM: P1
TO:
–––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––
S11 – Test Result (for Version 3.05/V3.06/V3.08/V3.10/V4.01 Firmware only)
(For V3.10/V4.01) Rotor Rotor Inverter Operating

Inverter Operating FreĆ Frequency for Run
quency for Run should fall within 00170 ∼
should fall within 00130 ∼ 00190 (170 Hz ∼ 190 Hz)
00150 (130 Hz ∼ 150 Hz)
Means result of service test S11"
Rotor Inverter Stand by
(Stop) Frequency
Number of hexadecimal codes should be 00000 (0 Hz)
Error Codes
64 r11 : 02 07 03 00 00 : 13 14 : 30C0 F880 F9C0 0080 3080 2080 30C0 : 00000 00180 00180
Normal return codes
Number of errors occurred
Not defined
Number of analog values
Number of frequency values
Number of message characters (r, 1, 1, :,0, 2, ... , 0, 1, 8, 0)
D See that “Number of errors occurred” is “00.”
D At the first stage of the Autotest, since filament operation check is performed, an error code related to
filament operation might be generated.

REV 1 2228782
S11 – Test Result (for Version 1.10 or 2.00 or 2.01 Firmware only)
Rotor Inverter Stand by

(Stop) Frequency
should be 000 (0 Hz)
r11 : 000, 180, 105 : 30C0, F880, F9C0, 0080, 3080, 2080, 30C0
Normal return codes
Rotor Inverter Operating Frequency for Run

(Normal and Slow Speed)
should fall within 170 ∼ 190 (170 Hz ∼ 190 Hz)
and 90 ∼ 115 (90 Hz ∼ 115 Hz)
D At the first stage of the Autotest, since filament operation check is performed, an error code related to
filament operation might be generated.
S12
–––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––
TO: S <RTN>
FROM: P0
TO: S12 <RTN>
TO: <RTN> (several seconds later)
.....
FROM: P1
TO:
–––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––
S12 – Test Result

See “S11 – Test Result (for Version 3.05/V3.06 Firmware only),” or “ S11 – Test Result (for Version 1.10 or 2.00 or
2.01 Firmware only).” How to interpret the test result of S12 is the same as for S11.

REV 1 2228782
S14
–––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––
TO: S <RTN>
FROM: P0
TO: S14 <RTN>
FROM: P1
TO: ( <RTN> (to close the safety loop)
TO: P <RTN> (to start the rotor)
TO: <RTN> (after the 550 VDC (or 750 VDC) is turned off)
FROM: P2
FROM: P3
FROM: P7
.....
TO: ) <RTN> (to open the safety loop)
TO: SE0 <RTN> (to exit test S14; if this command is input before brake is applied to the rotor, brake will not
be applied to it. In this case, wait until the rotor stops before performing another test.)
––––––––––––
FROM: P1
TO:
–––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––

REV 1 2228782
S14 – Test Result (for Version 3.05/V3.06/V3.08/V3.10/V4.01 Firmware only)
Stator Currents (in winding 1)

These are stator currents in winding 1 for boost1
(acceleration step 1), boost2 (acceleration step 2),
run, brake1 (brake step 1), and brake2 (brake
step 2), respectively.
(Unit: in decivolts measured on the backboard)
Means result of service test S14" (acceleration step 1), boost2 (acceleration step 2),
Number of hexadecimal codes run, brake1 (brake step 1), and brake2 (brake
step 2), respectively.
Number of frequency values (Unit: in decivolts measured on the backboard)
71 r14 : 00 00 05 10 00 : 00180 00180 00180 00100 00100 : 053 050 010 036 024 050 048 010 035 026
Rotor Inverter Operating Frequency

Number of errors occurred These are frequencies for boost1 (acceleration
step 1), boost2 (acceleration step 2), run, brake1
(brake step 1), and brake2 (brake step 2), respecĆ
Not defined tively.
(For V3.10/V4.01) Rotor Inverter Operating FreĆ

Number of message characters (r, 1, 4, :, 0, 0, ... , 5, 0, 2, 6) quency is:
00140 00140 00140 00100 00100
D During rotor operations the generator is operating as in the operation mode.

Check if any error code is generated or not.
For error code descriptions, see Section 3–2, ERROR CODES.

REV 1 2228782

Means result of service test S14" (acceleration step 1), boost2 (acceleration step 2),
run, and brake, respectively.
(acceleration step 1), boost2 (acceleration step 2),
run, and brake, respectively.
r14 : 180, 180, 180, 180 : 060, 061, 025, 035 : 061, 062, 026, 036
Rotor Inverter Operating Frequency

These are frequencies for boost1 (acceleration
step 1), boost2 (acceleration step 2), run, and
brake, respectively.
D During rotor operations the generator is operating as in the operation mode.

For error code descriptions, see Section 3–2, ERROR CODES.

REV 1 2228782
S16
–––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––
TO: S <RTN>
FROM: P0
TO: S16 <RTN>
FROM: P1
TO: ( <RTN> (to close the safety loop and start the rotor)
TO: <RTN> (after the 550 VDC (or 750 VDC) is turned off)
FROM: P2
FROM: P3
FROM: P7
.....
TO: SE0 <RTN> (to exit test S16; if this command is input before brake is applied to the rotor, brake will not
be applied to it. In this case, wait until the rotor stops before performing another test.)
––––––––––––
FROM: P1
TO:
–––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––
S16 – Test Result

See “S14 – Test Result (for Version 3.05/V3.06 Firmware only)” or “S14 – Test Result (for Version 1.10 or 2.00 or 2.01
Firmware only).” How to interpret the test result of S16 is the same as for S14.

REV 1 2228782
S17
–––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––
TO: S <RTN>
FROM: P0
TO: S17 <RTN>
FROM: P1
Verify that LEDs DS122, DS177, DS51, and DS88 on the CTVRC Board are turned on during S17
execution to check that the optical cables are correctly connected.
(CTVRC Board: Contains gate drivers, contained in the CTVRC power module)
TO: SE0 <RTN> (to exit test S17)

FROM: P0
FROM: P1
TO:
–––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––

REV 1 2228782
S18
T1
RUN BRAKE1
BOOST2
BRAKE2
BOOST1
STOP STOP
T2

–––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––
TO: S <RTN>
FROM: P0
TO: S18 <RTN>
FROM: P1
TO: ( <RTN> (to close the safety loop and start the rotor)
TO: <RTN> (after brake is applied to the rotor)
FROM: P2
FROM: P3
FROM: P7
FROM: P1
––––––––––––
(These operations repeat until you open the safety loop.)
During rotor operations, the generator is operating as in the operation mode.

For error code descriptions, see Section 3-2, ERROR CODES.
TO: ) <RTN> (to open the safety loop; if this command is input before brake is applied to the rotor, brake will
not be applied to it. In this case, wait until the rotor stops before performing another test.)
FROM: P0
FROM: P1
TO:
–––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––

REV 1 2228782
S19
T1
RUN BRAKE1
BOOST2
BRAKE2
BOOST1
STOP STOP
T2

–––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––
TO: S <RTN>
FROM: P0
TO: S19 <RTN>
FROM: P1
TO: P <RTN> (to start the rotor)
TO: <RTN> (after brake is applied to the rotor)
FROM: P2
FROM: P3
FROM: P7
FROM: P1
––––––––––––
(These operations repeat until you open the safety loop.)
During rotor operations, the generator is operating as in the operation mode.

TO: ) <RTN> (to open the safety loop; if this command is input before brake is applied to the rotor, brake will
not be applied to it. In this case, wait until the rotor stops before performing another test.)
FROM: P0
FROM: P1
TO:
–––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––

REV 1 2228782
4-3-4 Filament Board Test
For Version 3.05 Firmware only

S21 Displays the former part of the results of Autotest for Filament Board which was last
executed (by test S23, or x-ray generator power-on or reset).
S22 Displays the latter part of the results of Autotest for Filament Board which was last executed
(by test S23, or x-ray generator power-on or reset). (related to S21)
S23 Executes Autotest for Filament Board, and displays the former part of the test results.
S24 The latter part of the test results (S23) is displayed.
S25 Flows a current of 3 A in the small focus filament.
S26 Flows a current of 3 A in the large focus filament.
For Version 3.06 or 3.08 or 3.10 or 4.01 Firmware only

S21 Displays the former part of the results of Autotest for Filament Board which was last
executed (by test S22, or x-ray generator power-on or reset).
S22 Executes Autotest for Filament Board, and displays the former part of the test results.
S25 Displays the latter part of the results of Autotest for Filament Board which was last executed
(by test S22, or x-ray generator power-on or reset). (related to S21)
S26 The latter part of the test results (S22) is displayed.
For Version 1.10 or 2.00 or 2.01 Firmware only

S21 Displays the results of Autotest for Filament Board which was last executed (by test S22,
or x-ray generator power-on or reset).
S22 Executes Autotest for Filament Board, and displays the test results.

REV 1 2228782
4-3-4 Filament Board Test (continued)
Error Code
During test S23 (Version 3.05), or, S22 (Version 1.10/2.00/2.01/3.06/3.08/3.10/4.01),
if an error occurs, the following error codes will be displayed:

e021, e022 Error occurred on the Filament Board
e023 Output current could not be flown out properly from the Filament Board for the small focus filament
e024 Output current could not be flown out properly from the Filament Board for the large focus filament

REV 1 2228782
S21 (for Version 3.05/3.06/3.08/3.10/4.01 Firmware only)

–––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––
TO: S <RTN>
FROM: P0
TO: S21 <RTN>
TO: <RTN>
FROM: P056r21: ( ... test results ... )
.....
FROM: P1
TO:
–––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––
S21 – Test Result (for Version 3.05/3.06 Firmware only)
Number of hexadecimal codes
Error Codes
56 r21 : 04 08 00 00 00 : 21 22 23 24 : 7EF8 20A0 7EA0 1E40 F830 F830 F870 F870
Not defined
Number of message characters (r, 2, 1, :,0, 4, ... , F, 8, 7, 0)
D Normally the returned hexadecimal codes should be
7EF8 20C0 7EC0 1E40 F830 F830 F870 F870

REV 1 2228782
S22 (for Version 3.05 Firmware only)

S25 (for Version 3.06/3.08/3.10/4.01 Firmware only)
–––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––
TO: S <RTN>
FROM: P0
TO: S22 (or S25) <RTN>
TO: <RTN>
.....
FROM: P1
TO:
–––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––
S22 – Test Result (for Version 3.05 Firmware only)

S25 – Test Result (for Version 3.06/3.08/3.10/4.01 Firmware only)
Filament Inverter Operating Frequency for 3A

should fall within 02400 ∼ 03500 (24 kHz ∼ 35 kHz)
Means result of service test S22" (The preheating current is approximately 3 A)

Number of hexadecimal codes should fall within 02500 ∼ 03500 (25 kHz ∼ 35 kHz)
(The preheating current is approximately 3 A)
40 r22 : 00 00 05 00 00 : 04000 02700 02700 02700 02700

Filament Inverter Stand by Frequency
Not defined should fall within 04000 ∼ 05200 (40 kHz ∼ 52 kHz)
Number of message characters (r, 2, 2, :,0, 0, ... , 2, 7, 0, 0)

REV 1 2228782

–––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––
TO: S <RTN>
FROM: P0
TO: <RTN>
.....
FROM: P1
TO:
–––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––

See “S21 – Test Result (for Version 3.05/3.06 Firmware only).” How to interpret the test result of S23 (or S22) is the
same as for S21.

–––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––
TO: S <RTN>
FROM: P0
TO: <RTN>
.....
FROM: P1
TO:
–––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––

See “S22 – Test Result (for Version 3.05 Firmware only)/S25 – Test Result (for Version 3.06/3.08/3.10/4.01 Firmware
only).” How to interpret the test result of S24 (or S26) is the same as for S22 (or S25).

REV 1 2228782

–––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––
TO: S <RTN>
FROM: P0
FROM: P1
The generator is now operating as in the operation mode.


FROM: P0
FROM: P1
TO:
–––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––

–––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––
TO: S <RTN>
FROM: P0
TO: S26 <RTN>
FROM: P1


FROM: P0
FROM: P1
TO:
–––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––

REV 1 2228782
S21 (for Version 1.10 or 2.00 or 2.01 Firmware only)

–––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––
TO: S <RTN>
FROM: P0
TO: S21 <RTN>
TO: <RTN>
.....
FROM: P1
TO:
–––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––


r21 : 04000 02700 02700 02700 02700 : 7EF8, 20A0, 7EA0, 1E40, F830, F830, F870, F870
Normal return codes
Filament Inverter Stand by Frequency


REV 1 2228782

–––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––
TO: S <RTN>
FROM: P0
TO: S22 <RTN>
TO: <RTN>
.....
FROM: P1
TO:
–––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––
See “S21 – Test Result (for Version 1.10 or 2.00 or 2.01 Firmware only).” How to interpret the test result of S22 is
the same as for S21.

–––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––
TO: S <RTN>
FROM: P0
TO: S23 <RTN>
FROM: P1


FROM: P0
FROM: P1
TO:
–––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––

REV 1 2228782

–––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––
TO: S <RTN>
FROM: P0
TO: S24 <RTN>
FROM: P1


FROM: P0
FROM: P1
TO:
–––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––

REV 1 2228782
4-3-5 KV Board Test
For Version 3.05/3.08/3.10/4.01 Firmware only

S31 Displays the results of Autotest for KV Board which was last executed (by test S32, or x-ray
generator power-on or reset).
S32 Executes Autotest for KV Board, and displays the test results.
S33 KV Control Test. Tests the KV control circuits on the KV Board. The (large focus) filament
heating operation also is checked.
High voltage is not generated.
This test is related to S34.
S34 Displays the latter part of the test results by S33.
S35 Operates the drive signal (for KV Inverter) generator circuits on the KV Board.
S36 Anode High Voltage Test. High voltage (+40 kV) is generated but no MA is output from
the HV tank. In this test the KV control circuits are disabled; the feedback circuits from the
HV tank to the control circuits on the KV Board are excluded for test.
S37 Cathode High Voltage Test. High voltage (-40 kV) is generated but no MA is output from
S38 Anode + Cathode High Voltage Test. High voltage (80 kV) is generated but no MA is output
from the HV tank. In this test the KV control circuits are disabled; the feedback circuits from
the HV tank to the control circuits on the KV Board are excluded for test.
S39 Inverter Test. Operates the KV Inverter with its outputs shorted; therefore, high voltage is
not generated. The enable signal for the Inverter drive signal generator on the KV Board
is pulsed. The Inverter output currents are measured.

REV 1 2228782
4-3-5 KV Board Test (continued)
For Version 3.06 Firmware only

This test is related to S34.
S39 Displays the latter part of the test results by S33.

REV 1 2228782
For Version 1.10 or 2.00 or 2.01 Firmware only

Error Code
During test S32, if an error occurs, the following error codes will be displayed:

e031, e032 Error occurred on the KV Board

REV 1 2228782
S31
–––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––
TO: S <RTN>
FROM: P0
TO: S31 <RTN>
TO: <RTN>
.....
FROM: P1
TO:
–––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––
S31 – Test Result (for Version 3.05/3.06/3.08/3.10/4.01 Firmware only)
Error Codes
60 r31 : 02 06 03 00 00 : 31 32 : 7FF8 4008 7F88 F000 E000 E000 : 04000 07000 10000
Number of errors occurred KV Inverter Frequencies

should fall within 03800 ∼ 04200 (38 kHz ∼ 42 kHz),
06650 ∼ 07350 (66.5 kHz ∼ 73.5 kHz), 09500 ∼
Not defined 10500 (95 kHz ∼ 105 kHz), respectively
Number of message characters (r, 3, 1, :, 0, 2, ... , 0, 0, 0, 0)
D Normally the returned hexadecimal codes should be
7FFE 4002 7FE2 F000 E000 E000

REV 1 2228782
Normal return codes
r31 : 04000, 07000, 10000 : 7FFE, 4002, 7FE2 : F000, E000, E000
KV Inverter Frequencies
should fall within 03920 ∼ 04080 (39.2 kHz ∼ 40.8 kHz),
06650 ∼ 07350 (66.5 kHz ∼ 73.5 kHz), 09500 ∼ 10500
(95 kHz ∼ 105 kHz), respectively
S32
–––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––
TO: S <RTN>
FROM: P0
TO: S32 <RTN>
TO: <RTN> (to display the test results; input this <RTN> several seconds later)
.....
FROM: P1
TO:
–––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––
S32 – Test Result

See “S31 – Test Result (for Version 3.05/3.06 Firmware only),” or “ S31 – Test Result (for Version 1.10 or 2.00 or 2.01
Firmware only).” How to interpret the test result of S32 is the same as for S31.

REV 1 2228782
S33
–––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––
TO: S <RTN>
FROM: P0
TO: S33 <RTN>
FROM: P1
FROM: P2
FROM: P3
TO: < <RTN> (to send Exposure Command)
FROM: P5
.....
TO: > <RTN> (to deassert Exposure Command)
FROM: P1
TO:
–––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––

REV 1 2228782
S33 – Test Result (for Version 3.05/3.06/3.08/3.10/4.01 Firmware only)
(For systems with PDUs whose model number is 2121798)
These are Inverter frequency, Anode Inverter frequency, and
Cathode Inverter frequency; and should fall within 03920 ∼ 04080
(39.2 kHz ∼ 40.8 kHz), 01960 ∼ 02040 (19.6 kHz ∼ 20.4 kHz),
01960 ∼ 02040 (19.6 kHz ∼ 20.4 kHz), respectively.
(For systems with PDUs whose model number is P9180AB or

Means result of service test S33" P9180AF)
Number of hexadecimal codes Cathode Inverter frequency; and should all fall within 03920 ∼
04080 (39.2 kHz ∼ 40.8 kHz).
60 r33 : 00 00 09 00 00 : 03981 01995 01960 03925 01962 01962 09841 04977 04973
Not defined KV Inverter Frequencies

(39.2 kHz ∼ 40.8 kHz), 01960 ∼ 02040 (19.6 kHz ∼ 20.4 kHz),
01960 ∼ 02040 (19.6 kHz ∼ 20.4 kHz), respectively
(98.0 kHz ∼ 102 kHz), 04900 ∼ 05100 (49.0 kHz ∼ 51.0 kHz), 04900
∼ 05100 (49.0 kHz ∼ 51.0 kHz), respectively
D Since filament operation check also is performed, an error code related to filament operation might be
generated.

REV 1 2228782
r33 : 03981, 01995, 01960, 03925, 03926, 03927, 09841, 04977, 04973
KV Inverter Frequencies Cathode Inverter frequency; and should fall within 09800 ∼ 10200
These are Inverter frequency, Anode Inverter frequency, and (98.0 kHz ∼ 102 kHz), 04900 ∼ 05100 (49.0 kHz ∼ 51.0 kHz), 04900
Cathode Inverter frequency; and should fall within 03920 ∼ 04080 ∼ 05100 (49.0 kHz ∼ 51.0 kHz), respectively
(39.2 kHz ∼ 40.8 kHz), 01960 ∼ 02040 (19.6 kHz ∼ 20.4 kHz),
01960 ∼ 02040 (19.6 kHz ∼ 20.4 kHz), respectively
Cathode Inverter frequency; and should all fall within 03920 ∼
04080 (39.2 kHz ∼ 40.8 kHz).
D Since filament operation check also is performed, an error code related to filament operation might be
generated.

–––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––
TO: S <RTN>
FROM: P0
TO: <RTN>
.....
FROM: P1
TO:
–––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––

REV 1 2228782


33 r34 : 00 00 00 06 00 : 028 028 028 063 021 098
Not defined KV Command Voltage

should fall within 012 ∼ 028, 012 ∼ 028, 012 ∼ 028,
Number of frequency values 056 ∼ 064, 012 ∼ 028, and be blow 106, (in decivolts),
respectively

S34 (for Version 1.10 or 2.00 or 2.01 or 3.06 or 3.08 or 3.10 or 4.01 Firmware only)
Set jumper ST1 to TANTCA on the KV Board, prior to starting this test, as shown in Illustration 4–2.
NOR
TAN
TCA
TANTCA
ST1
KV BOARD
XJ1 XJ2
ST1 SETTING
ILLUSTRATION 4–2

REV 1 2228782

–––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––
TO: S <RTN>
FROM: P0
FROM: P1
FROM: P3
FROM: P5

TO: SE0 <RTN> (to exit test S35 or S34)
FROM: P0
FROM: P1
TO:
–––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––
After exiting this test, set jumper ST1 to NOR on the KV Board, as shown in Illustration 4–2.

REV 1 2228782

Set jumper ST1 to TAN on the KV Board, prior to starting this test, as shown in Illustration 4–2.

–––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––
TO: S <RTN>
FROM: P0
FROM: P1
FROM: P3
FROM: P5

Also, the tube voltage [KV] is measured; error allowed is ±30 %.
TO: ? <RTN> (to display the KV value measured; input this command before KV falls)
FROM: S5k044m000
(5: exposure time, 044: KV value, 000: MA value)
FROM: s000 (000: number of spits occurred)
FROM: P0
FROM: P1
TO:
–––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––

REV 1 2228782

Set jumper ST1 to TCA on the KV Board, prior to starting this test, as shown in Illustration 4–2.

–––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––
TO: S <RTN>
FROM: P0
FROM: P1
FROM: P3
FROM: P5

FROM: S5k044m000
FROM: P0
FROM: P1
TO:
–––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––

REV 1 2228782

Set jumper ST1 to TANTCA on the KV Board, prior to starting this test, as shown in Illustration 4–2.

–––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––
TO: S <RTN>
FROM: P0
FROM: P1
FROM: P3
FROM: P5

FROM: S5k084m000
FROM: P0
FROM: P1
TO:
–––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––

REV 1 2228782

– Anode Side Test –

Set jumper ST1 to TAN on the KV Board, prior to starting this test, as shown in Illustration 4–2.
Short–circuit the inverter outputs by connecting terminals P1 and P2 on the HV tank with an appropriate cable. See
Illustration 4–3. Set the jumper both on the anode and cathode HV tanks.
Note
For systems with PDUs whose model number is P9180AB or P9180AF, the test is simultaneously
performed both on the anode and cathode sides with setting jumper ST1 to TANTCA.
JUMPER
INVERTER
HV TANK
JUMPER SETTING ON HV TANK

ILLUSTRATION 4–3

REV 1 2228782

–––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––
TO: S <RTN>
FROM: P0
FROM: P1
FROM: P3
FROM: P5
High voltages both on the anode and cathode sides are measured to check that these are not
generated; error allowed is ±5 %.
TO: ? <RTN> (to display the KV value measured; input this command before the inverter operation ends)
FROM: S5k000m000
TO: ? <RTN> (to display the inverter output current value measured; input this after the inverter
operation ends)
.....
FROM: P0
FROM: P1
TO:
–––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––

REV 1 2228782

S38 – Test Result (for Version 3.06 or 3.08 or 3.10 or 4.01 Firmware only)

21 r39 : 00 00 00 02 00 : 020 000
Not defined Inverter Current

These are Anode inverter current and Cathode
Number of frequency values inverter current measured in decivolts
r38 : 100, 105
Inverter Current
These are Anode inverter current and Cathode
inverter current measured in decivolts

REV 1 2228782

If you do not perform this test on the cathode side, remove the jumpers from the anode and cathode HV tanks, and
set jumper ST1 to NOR on the KV Board, as shown in Illustration 4–2.
– Cathode Side Test –

Note
For systems with PDUs whose model number is P9180AB or P9180AF, you do not have to perform
this test on the cathode side, since test was also performed on the cathode side during the anode
side test.
Set jumper ST1 to TCA on the KV Board, prior to starting this test, as shown in Illustration 4–2.
Perform the same procedure as for – Anode Side Test –.
After the Test

Remove the jumpers from the anode and cathode HV tanks.

REV 1 2228782
4-3-6 PDU Test
For Version 3.05 or 3.06 or 3.08 or 3.10 or 4.01 Firmware only

S51 The PDU outputs 550 (or 750) VDC. The generator CPU checks the safety loop signals.
S52 The PDU outputs 550 (or 750) VDC. This test is the same as S51, except that this test reĆ
quires key input of P."
For Version 2.00 or 2.01 Firmware only

S51 The PDU outputs 550 VDC. This test is the same as S52, except that this test requires key
input of P."
S52 The PDU outputs 550 VDC. The generator CPU checks the safety loop signals.
WARNING!
ELECTROCUTION ! THE PDU GENERATES 550 (OR 750) VDC. SINCE THE ROTOR DOES
NOT ROTATE, THERE IS NO AUDIBLE SIGNAL THAT THE 550 VDC IS BEING OUTPUTTED.
S51 (for Version 3.05 or 3.06 or 3.08 or 3.10 or 4.01 Firmware only)
S52 (for Version 2.00 or 2.01 Firmware only)
–––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––
TO: S <RTN>
FROM: P0
FROM: P1
TO:
The PDU is now outputting 550 (or 750) VDC. The test will be ended 95 seconds later.
TO: <RTN>
FROM: P3
TO: ) <RTN> (to open the safety loop; 95 seconds later or to turn off the 550 (or 750) VDC before it)
FROM: e382
FROM: P0
FROM: P1
–––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––

REV 1 2228782
4-3-6 PDU Test (continued)
WARNING!
ELECTROCUTION ! THE PDU GENERATES 550 (OR 750) VDC. SINCE THE ROTOR DOES
NOT ROTATE, THERE IS NO AUDIBLE SIGNAL THAT THE 550 VDC IS BEING OUTPUTTED.
S52 (for Version 3.05 or 3.06 or 3.08 or 3.10 or 4.01 Firmware only)
S51 (for Version 2.00 or 2.01 Firmware only)
–––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––
TO: S <RTN>
FROM: P0
FROM: P1
TO: P <RTN>
TO:
The PDU is now outputting 550 (or 750) VDC. The test will be ended 95 seconds later.
TO: <RTN>
FROM: P3
TO: ) <RTN> (to open the safety loop; 95 seconds later or to turn off the 550 (or 750) VDC before it)
FROM: e382
FROM: P0
FROM: P1
–––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––

REV 0 2228782
DC III
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION PAGE
SECTION 2 – DIAGNOSTICS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–1

2-1 POWER–UP SELF TEST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–1
2-2 OFF–LINE DIAGNOSTICS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–9
2-2-1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–9
2-2-2 How to Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–9
SECTION 3 – LED DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–1
i DC III
blank 2228782
ii DC III
REV 0 2228782
This chapter provides the following information.
D Power–up Self Test
D Off–line Diagnostic Program
D LED Description
Off–line diagnostic program is an interactive program and is used to identify the failure in Display Processor for DC III.
LED Description shows all LEDs on the boards related with DC III in the OC Console Nest and DC III Console and
indicates the status of them.
1–1 DC III
blank 2228782
1–2 DC III
REV 0 2228782
SECTION 2 – DIAGNOSTICS
Display processor for DC III provides the following diagnostics.
D System power–up self test
D Display processor Off–line test
The above diagnostic programs are almost the same as those of Scan/Display processor for OC.
2-1 POWER–UP SELF TEST

This test sequence runs as a part of power–up sequence when the dip SW 8A1 on the DMP2 board for DC III is set as
below.
DMP2 (FOR DC III)
1 OFF/ON (SKIP) – NOTE 1
2 OFF
3 OFF
4 OFF
5 OFF
6 OFF
7 OFF
8 OFF/ON (FMD) – NOTE 2
OFF ON
Note:
1. TO SKIP THE SELF TEST ROUTINE, SET BIT 1 TO ON. WHEN YOU SKIP THE TEST, SELF–TESTS
FOR OTHER PROCESSORS (FMP1, DMP2 FOR OC) SHOULD BE ALSO SKIPPED.
REFER TO SYSTEM DIAGNOSTICS, SECTION 2–2–2, START–UP.
2. SET BIT 8 TO ON WHEN THE SYSTEM HAS AN FMD BOARD.
TEST SW SETTING
ILLUSTRATION 2–1
Table 2–1 shows the power–up sequence, the LED status during each phase, and the hardware under test. Definition
of terms are listed below.
ACRTC . . . . Advanced CRT Controller

DMAC . . . . . DMA Controller
KB . . . . . . . . Keyboard
MD . . . . . . . . Main Data Memory
PTM . . . . . . . Programmable Timer Module
PSA . . . . . . . Program Source Address
TMA . . . . . . . Table Memory Address
VSC . . . . . . . Video System Controller
2–1 DC III
blank 2228782
2–2 DC III
REV 0 2228782
2-1 POWER–UP SELF TEST (continued)
TABLE 2–1
TYPICAL DISPLAY PROCESSOR POWER–UP SEQUENCE
ILLUMINATE
HARDWARE UNDER TEST

TEST FILE
NAME FUNCTION TO BE CHECKED LED STATUS PROCES- DMP2 OVL2 IFB2 FPU CRT KB CBRD FMD
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 SOR
INITIAL SET a. DISPLAY “SYSTEM TEST IN PROGRESS”

DMP2 a. ROM SUM CHECK
TEST
b. BUS ERROR CHECK
d. INTERRUPT HANDLER CHECK
g. CALENDAR IC CHECK
h. I/O BUS CHECK
i. SYSTEM BUS INTERRUPT CHECK
j. DMAC REGISTER CHECK
k. DMA OPERATION CHECK 1
l. DMA OPERATION CHECK 2
OVL2/ a. OVL/IFB2 TEST START

IFB2
b. ACRTC INITIALIZE & REGISTER CHECK
TEST
c. ACRTC SYNC TIMING CHECK
d. ACRTC INTERRUPT CHECK
e. ACRTC EXTERNAL REGISTER CHECK
f. ACRTC FRAME BUFFER CHECK
g. ACRTC DMA FUNCTION CHECK
h. KB LAMP REGISTER CHECK
i. KB DATA REGISTER CHECK
j. VSC REGISTER CHECK
k. VSC VSYNC TIMING CHECK
l. VSC SCREEN BUFFER CHECK
m.VSC SCREEN BUFFER DMA CHECK
n. VSC x 4 REGISTER CHECK
o. VSC x 4 VSYNC TIMING CHECK
(Continued)
2–3 DC III
blank 2228782
2–4 DC III
REV 0 2228782

TYPICAL DISPLAY PROCESSOR POWER–UP SEQUENCE
ILLUMINATE
HARDWARE UNDER TEST
PHASE DESCRIPTION FILE

LED STATUS PROCES- DMP2 OVL2 IFB2 FPU CRT KB CBRD FMD
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 SOR
FPU a. FPU TEST START

TEST
b. MD CHECK
c. ADDRESS REGISTER CHECK
d. PSA REGISTER CHECK
e. TMA REGISTER CHECK
f. S–PAD REGISTER CHECK
g. PS MEMORY CHECK
h. PROGRAM START/STOP CHECK
i. FPU INTERRUPT CHECK
j. MD DMA ACCESS CHECK
k. FMD MEMORY CHECK
l. FMD DMA ACCESS CHECK
FMP a. FMP COMMUNICATION TEST START
COM.
TEST b. DMP INTERRUPT ACCEPT CHECK
d. SYSTEM BUS MEMORY CHECK
e. SYSTEM BUS MEMORY DMA CHECK
f. RESPONSE TRANSMIT & INTERRUPT CHECK
TEST END a. DISPLAY “SYSTEM PREPARATION”
–UP
SEQUENCE b. WAITING OS
c. OS START
2–5 DC III
blank 2228782
2–6 DC III
REV 0 2228782

Refer to the following Error Code Description when the Display Processor fails during the power–up sequence or the
DMP2 ASSY LEDs display an error status during normal operation.

(HEX)

10–1C ERROR DURING DMP2 ASSY REPLACE DMP2 ASSY.

TEST.
20–2C ERROR DURING OVL2 ASSY REPLACE OVL2 ASSY OR

TEST. CBRD.
2D, 2E ERROR DURING IFB2 ASSY REPLACE IFB2 ASSY OR

TEST. CBRD.
3D–31, 39 ERROR DURING MAIN DATA REPLACE FCP3B ASSY.

MEMORY IN FPU ON LOCAL
BUS.
32–38 ERROR DURING COMMAND CHANGE FCP2A ASSY OR

WRITE, STATUS READ OR DMP2 ASSY.
INTERRUPT RECEPTION
BETWEEN FPU AND DMP2.
3A, 3B ERROR DURING EXPANDED CHANGE FMD ASSY OR DMP2

MAIN DATA MEMORY IN FPU ASSY.
ON LOCAL BUS.

TEST BETWEEN FMP1 AND ON DMP2 #2 ASSY AND DAISY
DMP2 #2. CHAIN LINE.
5C ERROR WHILE DISPLAYING RESET AND EXECUTE SELF

“SYSTEM PREPARATION”. TEST AGAIN.
60 ABNORMAL TERMINATION REPLACE ROM ON DMP2 OR

DUE TO LEVEL 7 INTERRUPT WHOLE DMP2.
70 UNEXPECTED INTERRUPT DURING IMPROPER INITIAL PROGRAM LOADER

INITIAL PROGRAM LOADER EXECUTION. PROGRAM. INITIALIZE HARD DISK.
ERROR INFORMATION IS STORED IN
CRASH SAVE AREA.
73 OS LOADING TIME OUT. CORRUPTED OS TRANSFER PROGRAM

INITIALIZE ROUTINE EXECUTION. FAILURE IN MEMORY. INITIALIZE HARD
.DISK. ERROR INFORMATION IS STORED
IN CRASH SAVE AREA.
81 UNEXPECTED INTERRUPT DUE TO REPLACE DMP2 ASSY. ERROR

BUS ERROR DURING MEMORY CLEAR. INFORMATION IS STORED IN CRASH
. SAVE AREA.
2–7 DC III
REV 0 2228782

(HEX)

DURING INITIALIZE ROUTINE. OR READ ERROR. INITIALIZE HARD DISK.
IN CRASH SAVE AREA.
83 MEMORY ALLOCATION ERROR. IMPROPER MEMORY SIZE

OR CORRUPTED OPERATING SYSTEM
CRASH SAVE AREA.

HALT. DATE/TIME ENTRY CHAIN LINE (IACK, BG0–4).
DISPLAY DOES NOT APPEAR
ON CRT.

OR MISSING TASK.
A1 ABNORMAL TERMINATION SUSPECT MEMORY OR RELOAD

DUE TO IMPROPER MEMORY SOFTWARE.
LAYOUT, DUPLICATE TASK OR
MISSING TASK.
D0 BUS ERROR DUE TO ACCESSING SUSPECT MEMORY OR RELOAD

NONEXISTENT MEMORY ADDRESS SOFTWARE. ERROR INFORMATION
OR EXECUTING INADEQUATE IS STORED IN CRASH SAVE AREA.
INSTRUCTION
D1 ADDRESS ERROR DUE TO WORD SUSPECT MEMORY OR RELOAD

REFERENCE TO ODD ADDRESS. SOFTWARE. ERROR INFORMATION IS
STORED IN CRASH SAVE AREA
D2–D8 EXCEPTION DUE TO SUSPECT MEMORY OR RELOAD

INCORRECT INSTRUCTION SOFTWARE. ERROR INFORMATION IS
OR CORRUPTED MEMORY. STORED IN CRASH SAVE AREA.

TASK. AREA.

AREA.
2–8 DC III
REV 0 2228782
2-2 OFF–LINE DIAGNOSTICS
2-2-1 Overview
Display processor off–line test is a ROM resident program and consists of the following functional tests.
D DMP2 BOARD TEST
D KB/TB TEST
D OVERLAY TEST
D GRAY PATTERN TEST
D MFC CONTROL TEST
D FPU TEST (EXCEPT BPU, DBU AND FFT)
The above tests are the same as those for Scan/Display Processor off–line test. For the detailed information, refer
to Operator Console Diagnostics, Section 3, DMP2 OFF–LINE DIAGNOSTICS.
2-2-2 How to Start

To start–up this test program, set the dip switch 8A1 on the DMP2 board (#23) as follows:
8A1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8 – SWITCH FOR FMD OPTION
ON
NOTE:
1. WHEN RUNNING THIS TEST, FILE PROCESSOR MUST BE IN OFF–LINE TO AVOID DATA CONFLICT ON THE SYSTEM BUS.
IT IS RECOMMENDED TO SELECT THE OFF–LINE TEST ON FMP1 BOARD AND DMP2 BOARD FOR OC. REFER TO OC
DIAGNOSTICS SECTION 2 AND 3.
2. IF THE SYSTEM PROVIDES THE FMD BOARD FOR DISPLAY PROCESSOR, SET BIT 8 TO ON. REFER TO P9017AF,
FUNCTIONAL CHECK/ADJUSTMENT MANUAL, OC ADJUSTMENT TAB, SECTION 2–1–19.
START–UP FMP2 OFF–LINE TEST

ILLUSTRATION 2–2
2–9 DC III
REV 0 2228782
2-2 OFF–LINE DIAGNOSTICS (continued)

And then turn ON the OC Power SW or pull the system reset SW. The general menu will appears on the CRT as
shown below.
***** DMP2 DIAG. TEST V/R 0.0 *****

MENU
0 DMP2 Board TEST (REFER TO OC DIAGNOSTICS, SECTION 3–3)
1 KB/TB TEST (REFER TO OC DIAGNOSTICS, SECTION 3–4)
2 OVERLAY TEST (REFER TO OC DIAGNOSTICS, SECTION 3–5)
3 GRAY PATTERN TEST (REFER TO OC DIAGNOSTICS, SECTION 3–6)
4 MFC CONTROL TEST (REFER TO OC DIAGNOSTICS, SECTION 3–7)
5 FPU TEST (REFER TO OC DIAGNOSTICS, SECTION 3–8)
6
7
8
9 END
ENTRY NO.
*1) PUSH NO. AND RETURN TO SELECT THE MENU.
*2) TO RETURN TO ONLINE, RESET TEST MODE SW AND PUSH SYS. RESET SW.
2–10 DC III
REV 0 2228782
SECTION 3 – LED DESCRIPTION
This section describes LEDs for indicating the various status on boards related with DC III in the Operator Console and
DC III console. Locations of all LEDs are shown in Illustration 3–1. In addition, the normal LED status after system
start–up is indicated in Illustration 3–1. These informations are effective to identify the failure on the boards.
For description of LED on boards in Operator Console, refer to OC Diagnostics, Section 4, LED DESCRIPTION.
3–1 DC III
REV 0 2228782
OC DC III console
OCCM4 OVL2 IFB2 FCP2A FCP3B FMD DMP2
TEST
OVL RUN FPU NO. 7
I3 SEL EXT LOC 6
I4 CI CPU SA 5
DRQ CO CXY CPU 4
CXY 3 DCCM2
2
1
0
F
H
MBER
DBER
VSC
MWR
MRD
LUT
RVS R KBINT
OVL 2 DC MFCON
IMG 1 TxD
0 RxD
IRQCP S0
IRQFP S1
INTF S2
STOP S3
S–FAIL
IOBSY M1
MDSPN M2
SPIN M3
ILLUMINATE
EXTINGUISH
BLINK
11 12 13 14 16 17 23
SLOT
LED STATUS OF DC III

ILLUSTRATION 3–1
3–2 DC III
REV 0 2228782
SECTION 3 – LED DESCRIPTION (continued)
OCCM4 (Slot #11)
SYSTEM FAIL
It is lit ON when data receipt error occurs continuously (more
than 20 frames) during communication with DCCM2.
Not used. (Extinguished)
3–3 DC III
REV 0 2228782
SECTION 3 – LED DESCRIPTION (continued)
DCCM2 (In DC III Console)
Key Board Interrupt

It is lit ON when key interruption from keyboard occurs.
DC MFC Power ON
It is lit ON when MFC connected to DC is turned ON.
KBINT
DC MFC ON
TxD RS–422 Transmit Data Status.
It is blinking during data transmission.
RxD
RS–422 Receive Data Status.

It is blinking during data reception.
S0
S1
S2 Not used
S3
S–FAIL SYSTEM FAIL
M1 It is lit ON when data receipt error occurs continuously (more

M2 Not used than 20 frames) during communication with OCCM4.
M3
3–4 DC III
REV 0 2228782
APPENDIX A – SYMBOLS AND CLASSIFICATION
Symbol Publication Description
417–5032 Alternating Current
335–1 Three–phase Alternating Current

#
335–1 Three–phase Alternating Current with neutral con-

#( ductor
Direct Current
417–5019 Protective Earth (Ground)
348 Attention, consult ACCOMPANYING DOCUMENTS
417–5008 OFF (Power: disconnection from the mains)
417–5007 ON (Power: connection to the mains)
Warning, HIGH VOLTAGE
Emergency Stop
A–1 APPENDIX
REV 0 2228782
Symbol Publication Description

Type B
417–5339 X–ray Source Assembly Emitting
417–5009 Standby
Start
Table Set
Abort
Intercom
(on Operator Console)

Power On: light on
Standby: light off
A–2 APPENDIX
REV 0 2228782
Symbol Description
Microphone (Mic)
Contrast
Brightness
_
System storage prior to installation:
Maintain storage temperature between –10° C and +60° C
_
System storage prior to installation:

Maintain non–condensing storage
humidity below 95%
DO NOT store system longer than 90 days

System storage and shipment:

Maintain Air Pressure between 750 and 1060hPa

A–3 APPENDIX
REV 0 2228782
CLASS 1 EQUIPMENT
Any permanently installed equipment containing operator or patient accessible surfaces must provide backup protec-
tion against electric shock,in case the BASIC INSULATION fails. In addition to BASIC INSULATION,Class1 equip-
ment contains a direct connection to a PROTECTIVE(EARTH) CONDUCTOR which prevents shocks when a person
touches a broken piece of equipment or touches two different equipment surfaces simultaneously.
TYPE B EQUIPMENT
CLASS I, II, or III EQUIPMENT or EQUIPMENT with INTERNAL ELECTRICAL POWER SOURCES provide an ade-
quate degree of protection against electric shock arising from (allowable) LEAKAGE CURRENTS or a breakdown
in the reliability of the protective earth connection.
ORDINARY EQUIPMENT
Enclosed EQUIPMENT without protection against the ingress of water.
OPERATION 0f EQUIPMENT
CONTINUOUS OPERATION WITH INTERMITTENT LOADING.
Operation in which EQUIPMENT is connected continuously to the SUPPLY MAINS. The stated permissible loading
time is so short that the long term on–load operating temperature is not attained. The ensuing interval in loading is,
however, not sufficiently long for cooling down to the long term no–load operating temperature.
EQUIPMENT not suitable for use in the presence of a FLAMMABLE ANESTHETIC MIXTURE WITH AIR or WITH
OXYGEN or NITROUS OXIDE
CLEANING
The ProSpeed S series system is NOT WATERPROOF. It is NOT designed to protect internal components against
the ingress of liquids.Clean external system surfaces(Gantry,table,consoles and accessories)with a soft cloth dipped
in hot water and wrung DAMP/DRY. (NOT dripping!) IF NECESSARY, use only mild (dish washing liquid) soap to re-
move dirt.
NOTICE
Avoid damage to equipment! Some ”spray and wipe”cleaners etch and permanently cloud
clear plastic surfaces!! Use only warm water and mild liquid soap to clean surfaces.
A–4 APPENDIX
GE Medical Systems: Telex 3797371
P.O. Box 414, Milwaukee, Wisconsin 53201 U.S.A.
(Asia, Pacific, Latin America, North America)
GE Medical Systems – Europe: Telex 698626

283, rue de la Miniére, B.P. 34, 78533 Buc Cedex, France

Diagnostics SM 2228782 2

Transféré par

Informations du document

Titre original

Copyright

Formats disponibles

Partager ce document

Partager ou intégrer le document

Options de partage

Avez-vous trouvé ce document utile ?

Ce contenu est-il inapproprié ?

Droits d'auteur :

Formats disponibles

Diagnostics SM 2228782 2

Transféré par

Droits d'auteur :

Formats disponibles

Technical

Copyright 1999–2002 by General Electric Company

D THIS SERVICE MANUAL IS AVAILABLE IN ENGLISH ONLY.

D CE MANUEL DE MAINTENANCE N’EST DISPONIBLE QU’EN ANGLAIS.

D DIESES KUNDENDIENST–HANDBUCH EXISTIERT NUR IN

D ESTE MANUAL DE SERVICIO SÓLO EXISTE EN INGLÉS.

D ESTE MANUAL DE ASSISTÊNCIA TÉCNICA SÓ SE ENCONTRA

D IL PRESENTE MANUALE DI MANUTENZIONE È DISPONIBILE

IMPORTANT! . . . X-RAY PROTECTION

  

OMISSIONS & ERRORS

Devices not to be used near this equipment:

REV DATE PRIMARY REASON FOR CHANGE

LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES

BEFORE USING THIS MANUAL

CT PRODUCTS WHICH THIS MANUAL APPLIES TO

Code Name Product Name

GEMS–AM GEMS–E GEMS–A GEYMS

Qj ProSpeed S ProSpeed S ProSpeed S –

ProSpeed SX ProSpeed SX ProSpeed SX Lemage

Qj–Base ProSpeed ProSpeed S Fast ProSpeed Lemage SX/E

Qj–Hlt ProSpeed ProSpeed SX Power ProSpeed Lemage Supreme

Zj–Adv – ProSpeed Advantage ProSpeed Advantage ProSeed SA

ProSpeed Plus ProSpeed Plus ProSpeed Plus ProSeed EF

Code Name Operator Console Detector

Liquid Crystal Plasma

SECTION 1 – INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–1

SECTION 2 – MAINTENANCE PROGRAM – SUPPORT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–1

SECTION 3 – MAINTENANCE PROGRAM – SUPPORT DISPLAY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–1

TABLE OF CONTENTS (continued)

SECTION 4 – MAINTENANCE PROGRAM – OTHERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–1

SECTION 5 – MESSAGE AND ERROR CODE LISTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–1

APPENDIX A – HOW TO MAKE CRASH SAVE DISK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A–1

APPENDIX B – HOW TO MAKE FLOT DISK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B–1

D SECTION 2 – MAINTENANCE PROGRAM – SUPPORT

D SECTION 5 – ERROR CODE AND MESSAGE LIST

1-2 MAINTENANCE PROGRAM

10. TEMPERATURE INITIALIZE

11. SERVICE MODE

12. SYSTEM PARAMETER DUMP/LOAD

The sections which follow describe how to use these programs.

1-2 MAINTENANCE PROGRAM (continued)

*** MAINTENANCE MENU ***

Insert the “BOOT” disk into the floppy disk drive.

Enter $$ to display the following Service Maintenance menu.

*** MAINTENANCE MENU ***

SECTION 2 – MAINTENANCE PROGRAM –

2-1 FUNCTIONS OF SUPPORT PROGRAMS

1. OFF–LINE SCAN --- Collects Scan raw data

2. TABLE/GANTRY CONTROL --- On–line control of Table and Gantry

3. STATISTICS --- Data statistics

4. ALIGNMENT --- X–ray alignment

9. FD DUMP/LOAD --- Transfers raw data files

10. MT DUMP/LOAD --- Transfers raw data files

11. MOD DUMP/LOAD --- Transfers raw data files

12. WARM UP ERROR ANALYSIS

13. GENERATOR / TUBE --- Generator diagnostics and Tube calibration

14. MTF SURVEY --- Calculates the image spatial resolution

2-2 HOW TO USE SUPPORT PROGRAMS

NEW PATIENT BLINKING

2-2 HOW TO USE SUPPORT PROGRAMS (Continued)

** SYSTEM ERROR XXXXXXXX

D The screen displays up to 30 lines of text and/or data at a time.

* MAINTENANCE MENU *

* MAINTENANCE MENU *

* KIND OF SCAN *

* RAW DATA FILE SELECT **

* KIND OF SCAN *

* RAW DATA FILE SELECT **

* KIND OF SCAN *

* RAW DATA FILE SELECT **

* TABLE/GANTRY CONTROL *

* TABLE/GANTRY CONTROL *

* STATISTICS *

* RAW DATA FILE SELECT *

* RAW DATA FORMAT *

* OFFSET AVERAGE *

* KIND OF DATA *

* RAW DATA FORMAT *

* RAW DATA FORMAT *

* ORIGINAL *

* DISPLAY/FILING *

* DISPLAY/FILING *

* MAX *

* KIND OF DATA *

* ALIGNMENT *